12.11.2012 Views

PDF. - full text - Dunarea de Jos

PDF. - full text - Dunarea de Jos

PDF. - full text - Dunarea de Jos

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 5-10<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

STRUCTURI ŞI FORME LITERARE/REPREZENTĂRI ALE FEMINITĂŢII<br />

ÎN NUVELA ROMÂNEASCĂ PAŞOPTISTĂ<br />

Simona Antofi<br />

În opinia lui Mihai Zamfir, proza intervalului 1830–1880 reprezintă „un mare <strong>text</strong><br />

relativ unitar, a cărui formulă internă <strong>de</strong> generare se modifică (...) foarte lent”, <strong>text</strong><br />

subsumabil binomului generalizator Memorie versus Imaginaţie – „un mo<strong>de</strong>l al prozei<br />

româneşti din secolul al XIX-lea”. Explicându-şi termenii, criticul arată că „memoria implică<br />

tot ceea ce se referă la asimilarea <strong>de</strong> formule epice antece<strong>de</strong>nte”, „la o memorie culturală”, în<br />

vreme ce Imaginaţia, o „minus memorie”, reprezintă, din punctul său <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re, „acea<br />

facultate epică a cărei acţiune tin<strong>de</strong> la producerea senzaţiei <strong>de</strong> noutate sub raport diegetic,<br />

dar şi sub acela al caracterelor, al <strong>de</strong>scripţiei” (Zamfir 1989: 70-71). Sub această umbrelă<br />

teoretică s-ar cuveni situată, prin urmare, multitudinea <strong>de</strong> manifestări concrete, plurimorfe,<br />

ale nuvelisticii româneşti în discuţie.<br />

Oarecum polemic la adresa opiniei citate, Liviu Papadima suplimentează binomul prin<br />

componenta Observaţie, respectiv cu preocuparea prozei şi a nuvelei paşoptiste <strong>de</strong> a<br />

cartografia şi <strong>de</strong> a ierarhiza realitatea vremii. Raportul concurenţial Memorie versus<br />

Imaginaţie explică invazia categoriilor literare ale memorialisticii în întreg teritoriul ficţiunii.<br />

Faptul este <strong>de</strong>monstrat <strong>de</strong> Mihai Zamfir şi este pus pe seama nevoii, resimţite <strong>de</strong> autorii<br />

vremii, <strong>de</strong> a-şi autentifica scrierile narative. Dat fiind statutul incert al prozei româneşti la<br />

începuturile ei, datorat, în principal, autorităţii mo<strong>de</strong>lului literar şi existenţial poetic,<br />

valoarea estetică se bizuie pe complementaritatea dintre emoţie, sinceritate, autenticitate şi<br />

autobiografie.<br />

Corelată cu incapacitatea aproape generală <strong>de</strong> invenţie epică, a scriitorilor români ai<br />

perioa<strong>de</strong>i, această stare <strong>de</strong> fapt a dus, în mod firesc, la umplerea tiparelor Memoriei literare<br />

cu încărcătură autobiografică implicit literaturizată. Instrumentarul favorit al literaturizării<br />

este cel melodramatic, bazat pe perspectiva maniheistă asupra lumii şi pe o retorică specifică:<br />

coinci<strong>de</strong>nţe numeroase (regimul coinci<strong>de</strong>nţelor poate fi investit cu funcţia <strong>de</strong> principal motor<br />

narativ şi diegetic, aşa cum se întâmplă în Buchetiera <strong>de</strong> la Florenţa, în cadrul căreia suita <strong>de</strong><br />

coinci<strong>de</strong>nţe face să progreseze naraţiunea şi, în parte, <strong>de</strong>ci<strong>de</strong> soarta eroilor), situaţii<br />

lacrimogene, lovituri <strong>de</strong> teatru şi posibilitatea amestecului <strong>de</strong> niveluri stilistice.<br />

Toate acestea ar ilustra, potrivit lui Nicolae Manolescu, apartenenţa prozei paşoptiste<br />

la romantismul <strong>de</strong> tip Bie<strong>de</strong>rmeier. Comentând punctul <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re al lui Virgil Nemoianu<br />

(Îmblânzirea romantismului), Manolescu (1990: 192) evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază principalele tipuri care se<br />

amestecă în Bie<strong>de</strong>rmeier Romanticism, şi-anume biograficul, melodramaticul şi istoricul, dar<br />

se <strong>de</strong>sparte <strong>de</strong> opina lui Zamfir făcând două observaţii categorice : „Nu cred că, totuşi, să se<br />

poată vorbi <strong>de</strong> o puritate a paradigmei, fiind mai <strong>de</strong>grabă vorba <strong>de</strong> o proză hibridă” chiar<br />

dacă „graniţele relativ discrete dintre speciile memorialistice sunt mai <strong>de</strong>s încălcate <strong>de</strong>cât<br />

aceea, mult mai netă, dintre memorialistică şi ficţiune” –ceea ce contrazice punctul <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re<br />

anterior, pentru care se poate accepta i<strong>de</strong>ea autonomizării memorialisticii, componentă<br />

principală a prozei româneşti <strong>de</strong> început, în raport cu celelalte forme literare narative; iar a<br />

5


doua observaţie slujeşte <strong>de</strong> minune <strong>de</strong>mersului nostru, căci evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază acuitatea spiritului<br />

critic al scriitorilor paşoptişti şi putinţa, ba chiar firescul existenţei meta<strong>text</strong>elor :<br />

„probabil că trăsătura cea mai remarcabilă a prozei noastre romantice (exceptând<br />

romanul) este alexandrinismul ei, faptul <strong>de</strong> a fi <strong>de</strong> la început bătrână ca mentalitate şi<br />

sofisticată stilistic” (Manolescu 1990: 192 şi 193).<br />

În această ordine <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>i, se cuvine amintită opinia lui Mircea Muthu, pentru care<br />

balcanitatea, respectiv „spiritul sud–estic” în literatură, se regăseşte ca stare <strong>de</strong> spirit<br />

<strong>de</strong>cantată şi <strong>de</strong>venită, „în evantaiul <strong>de</strong> motive, teme, tipologii, atitudini şi performanţe<br />

artistice”, balcanism literar. Configurat <strong>de</strong> un <strong>text</strong> cu multiple niveluri semantice, precum<br />

Istoria unui galben, balcanismul literar românesc îşi <strong>de</strong>zvăluie dubla sa dimensiune, parodică<br />

şi <strong>de</strong> evocare (Muthu 2002: 72 şi 79), în virtutea căreia nuvelele paşoptiste îşi asumă o dublă<br />

funcţie: <strong>de</strong> a reproduce/evoca artistic realitatea, conform convenţiei literare a epocii, şi <strong>de</strong> a<br />

pune în discuţie proce<strong>de</strong>ele <strong>de</strong> literaturizare ca şi formele literare aflate în circulaţie<br />

<strong>de</strong>monstrând, astfel, <strong>de</strong>schi<strong>de</strong>rea spre ironie şi spre parodie a prozatorilor vremii.<br />

Literatură a „memoriei restauratoare”, naraţiunea literară din secolul al XIX-lea şi<br />

scriitorul care-o compune relevă „«intenţia <strong>de</strong> a documenta», în limitele a<strong>de</strong>vărului şi,<br />

aproape întot<strong>de</strong>auna, în absenţa oricăror pretenţii <strong>de</strong> exprimare estetică <strong>de</strong>spre oameni şi<br />

întâmplări ştiute <strong>de</strong> scriitor prin sine însuşi sau prin alţii” (Curticăpeanu 1977: 13). La nivelul<br />

scriiturii, însă, cultura, spiritul critic, rezervele estetice, maliţiile şi ironiile prozatorilor<br />

români, familiarizaţi cu literaturile apusene, produc amestecuri inedite <strong>de</strong> realitate<br />

literaturizată, pe suport (auto)biografic cu funcţia <strong>de</strong> a legitima ficţiunea, şi reversul parodic,<br />

reacţia <strong>de</strong> disconfort intelectual provocată <strong>de</strong> nevoia <strong>de</strong> a apela la mo<strong>de</strong>le apusene mediocre<br />

şi <strong>de</strong> a le autohtoniza în limitele unei literaturi ce abia se năştea. Se adaugă ceea ce Liviu<br />

Papadima numeşte „miza lecturii «estetice» şi cea a persuasiunii i<strong>de</strong>ologice”, dirijate în<br />

conformitate cu întreg con<strong>text</strong>ul politic şi social paşoptist, care duce la „relaţia <strong>de</strong> solidaritate<br />

între ficţional şi nonficţional.” Mai mult, în condiţiile funcţionării precare a „instituţiei<br />

literaturii” şi într-o cultură marcată <strong>de</strong> efortul <strong>de</strong>finirii instituţionale a principalelor tipuri <strong>de</strong><br />

discurs–istoria, ştiinţa, morala, didactica, i<strong>de</strong>ologia–proza literară se ve<strong>de</strong> obligată să<br />

satisfacă două cerinţe distincte: să instruiască şi să se supună logicii naraţiunii literare,<br />

aceasta din urmă cu propria sa orientare dublă: cauzală, necesară pentru producerea<br />

efectului <strong>de</strong> verosimilitate, şi teleologică, cu misiunea <strong>de</strong> a asigura unitatea şi relevanţa<br />

<strong>text</strong>ului (Papadima 1989: 147 şi 151).<br />

De <strong>de</strong>parte cea mai prolifică specie literară a perioa<strong>de</strong>i paşoptiste, nuvela – şi formele<br />

sale concrete – se poate clasifica, în funcţie <strong>de</strong> dominanta tematică a fiecărui <strong>text</strong>, în patru<br />

categorii în cadrul cărora instrumentarul literar, strategiile şi tehnicile <strong>de</strong> lucru se amestecă,<br />

circulă <strong>de</strong> la o categorie la alta şi intră în combinaţii aproape neaşteptate pentru „tinereţea”<br />

prozei româneşti din epocă. Astfel, nuvelei istorice, celei sentimentale şi melodramatice,<br />

precum şi celei <strong>de</strong> moravuri, i se adaugă nuvela exerciţiu <strong>de</strong> stil, meta<strong>text</strong>ul care aspiră la a<br />

<strong>de</strong>construi, în special cu mijloacele parodiei, mo<strong>de</strong>lele <strong>de</strong> literaritate ale vremii.<br />

Fundamentat pe o restricţionare a strategiilor narative, pe favorizarea netă a relatării la<br />

persoana I singular şi facilitând, astfel, invazia biografismului şi asocierea acestuia cu latura<br />

documentară a <strong>text</strong>elor narative, mo<strong>de</strong>lul melodramatic asigură, totuşi, garanţia<br />

ficţionalităţii tocmai prin rigiditatea frustrantă – pentru spiritele luci<strong>de</strong> ale epocii – a reţetei<br />

sale literare. Emfatizând convenţia, melodramaticul acomodat nuvelistic permite elaborarea<br />

unei instanţe naratoare hibri<strong>de</strong>, „autonaratorul” care, pe <strong>de</strong> o parte, „intens personalizat”, îşi<br />

tematizează postura auctorială (Papadima 1989: 151), explicitându-şi intenţiile şi<br />

justificându-se, iar pe <strong>de</strong> alta, îşi asumă intenţiile specifice instanţei sale, în varianta Genette<br />

sau a altora. Ia naştere, astfel, ceea ce Nicolae Manolescu numeşte, în alt con<strong>text</strong>, „tirania<br />

semnificativului”.<br />

6


Naratorul a<strong>de</strong>sea intradiegetic şi cu veleităţi auctoriale se comportă <strong>de</strong> multe ori<br />

<strong>de</strong>spotic cu cititorul, dirijându-i cu autoritate lectura şi instaurând un pact <strong>de</strong> lectură univoc.<br />

Sprijinit, în <strong>de</strong>mersurile sale narative, <strong>de</strong> întreg angrenajul <strong>text</strong>ului, care anticipează ferm<br />

diegeza şi, mai ales, <strong>de</strong>znodământul, naratorul şi, prin el, scriitorul, cultivă „suprasaturarea<br />

informaţională a codurilor narative”, „hiper<strong>de</strong>terminarea”, ca instrumente ale<br />

„predictibilităţii” narative influenţate, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, <strong>de</strong> „indiciile privind încadrarea într-un<br />

gen anumit, sistemul personajelor, teme proeminente”. Ca mo<strong>de</strong>le literare apusene insistent<br />

valorificate în acest con<strong>text</strong>, „romanţul” <strong>de</strong> senzaţie, novella melodramatică sau povestirea<br />

<strong>de</strong> aventuri cultivă arbitrarul, la nivelul loviturilor <strong>de</strong> teatru, <strong>de</strong> pildă, dar îl şi „domesticesc”<br />

(Papadima 1989: 161 şi 167).<br />

La prima ve<strong>de</strong>re, Istoria unui galbân, aparţinând lui Alecsandri, ilustrează tendinţele<br />

romantice şi mo<strong>de</strong>lele literare apusene ale epocii, exploatând, prin tablouri şi scene <strong>de</strong><br />

moravuri, culoarea locală, dimensiunea etnografică şi sociologică a prozei Bie<strong>de</strong>rmeier. Pe<br />

baza personajului <strong>de</strong> tip picaro-conform tradiţiei literare <strong>de</strong> sursă spaniolă şi <strong>de</strong> secole XVI –<br />

XVII, un vagabond, un aventurier, un cerşetor care circulă dintr-o pătură socială în alta,<br />

dintr-o ţară în alta etc. –se investighează medii sociale şi moravuri şi se satirizează acid<br />

relaţiile sociale, ierarhiile, sistemul <strong>de</strong> valori, mijloacele <strong>de</strong> parvenire etc. din societatea<br />

românească a epocii.<br />

Actualizând strategic proce<strong>de</strong>ul alegoriei, scriitorul îşi etajează <strong>text</strong>ul, corelându-l cu<br />

două instanţe narative distincte, doi naratori care îşi asumă, fiecare, secvenţe distincte.<br />

Primul narator fixează cadrul – rama – istorisirilor celor <strong>de</strong>-al doilea şi asigură, prin relatarea<br />

la persoana întâi şi printr-o serie <strong>de</strong> similitudini biografice cu autorul (redactor la Propăşirea),<br />

prezumţia <strong>de</strong> autenticitate şi <strong>de</strong> credibilitate. Acest narator îşi recuză, însă, discursul satiric,<br />

punându-l pe seama celui <strong>de</strong>-al doilea narator, un galben olan<strong>de</strong>z cu certe veleităţi<br />

scriitoriceşti. Dubla schemă a comunicării, astfel instituită, antrenează un naratar prim –<br />

cititorul virtual – căruia i se adresează satira socială şi morală a timpului, şi un naratar<br />

secund, real în ţesătura <strong>text</strong>ului, o para turcească.<br />

Modalităţile narării diferă şi ele şi antrenează <strong>text</strong>ul într-un joc meta<strong>text</strong>ual <strong>de</strong><br />

autoreflectare ironică a „virtuţilor” naratoriale apreciate în epocă: mânat <strong>de</strong> o curiozitate cu<br />

iz ironic, primul narator – „autonaratorul” – se auto-ironizează în această postură şi<br />

ironizează, totodată, prin consimţirea tacită la sancţionarea, <strong>de</strong> către para, a „practicii<br />

literare” a galbenului, recuzita romantică a timpului şi mo<strong>de</strong>lele ei apusene. Găsind un<br />

echivalent alegoric strategiei narative a „manuscrisului găsit”, „autonaratorul” îşi îngăduie<br />

libertatea <strong>de</strong> a se pretin<strong>de</strong> un singur scriptor. La rândul său, galbenul–narator serveşte drept<br />

instrument pentru realizarea, la adăpostul unei binevenite obiectivităţi <strong>de</strong> suprafaţă, a satirei<br />

sociale multiplu orientate aşa încât, graţie unei secţiuni transversale prin societatea epocii se<br />

obţine o rudimentară „comedie umană” miniaturală şi se dă o rezolvare i<strong>de</strong>ologică pentru<br />

obligaţia <strong>text</strong>ului <strong>de</strong> a fi verosimil. Pe <strong>de</strong> altă parte, galbenul olan<strong>de</strong>z colaborează, împreună<br />

cu naratarul său a<strong>de</strong>sea recalcitrant, la un „manual al bunului povestaş” (Papadima 1989:<br />

195), trecând în revistă şi exemplificând, prin discurs, suficiente elemente negative ale<br />

literaturii epocii. Rezultă <strong>de</strong> aici un inventar <strong>de</strong> producţii literare sau (pseudo)literare – un<br />

meta<strong>text</strong> sui generis – care actualizează şi ju<strong>de</strong>că acid mo<strong>de</strong>lele literare ale epocii.<br />

Impresia <strong>de</strong> ansamblu pe care o lasă Istoria unui galbân, <strong>de</strong>opotrivă „poveste a vieţii”<br />

galbenului şi „istorisire”, este <strong>de</strong> „amestec <strong>de</strong> istorisire picarescă şi cronică <strong>de</strong> moravuri,<br />

abilă întreţesere <strong>de</strong> «popular» şi <strong>de</strong> «livresc»” (Papadima 1989: 245). Un efect imediat al<br />

acestei procedări este ceea ce Andrei Bodiu (2002: 26) numeşte „teatralizarea epicului” –<br />

formă <strong>de</strong> hibridizare a epicului şi a dramaticului , la care se adaugă jocul <strong>de</strong> scenă, bine<br />

intenţionat, şi cu scop parodic, al galbenului, precum şi hibridizarea cu secvenţe <strong>de</strong> discurs<br />

poetic „împrumutate” <strong>de</strong> autor personajelor sale şi, automat, <strong>de</strong>venite victime ale <strong>de</strong>riziunii.<br />

Exploatând avantajele povestirii cu sertare, care oferă galbenului întreaga gamă <strong>de</strong><br />

disponibilităţi şi <strong>de</strong> instrumente literare ale epocii, a<strong>de</strong>sea convertite în instrumentele<br />

7


autorului moralist (ca în povestea tragică – şi exemplu <strong>de</strong> nuvelă sentimentală cu recuzită<br />

melodramatică – a ţigăncii Zamfira), Istoria unui galbân nu mai blochează iniţiativele<br />

interpretative ale cititorului avizat ci, tocmai prin dramatizarea narării, pune în evi<strong>de</strong>nţă<br />

colaborarea interpretativă activă, „pe viu”, a naratorului-personaj cu naratarul său. Urmarea<br />

este aceea că repere <strong>de</strong> bază ale convenţiei melodramatice sunt scurtcircuitate ferm, precum<br />

tema „suferinţei în amor”, sau „mo<strong>de</strong>lul <strong>de</strong> sensibilitate” al vremii, portretul „canonic” al<br />

frumuseţii feminine, <strong>de</strong>construit cu precizie <strong>de</strong> galben, spre încântarea paralei (uşor geloasă<br />

pe obiectul presupus al adoraţiei galbenului) ş. a.<br />

În ţesătura istorisirii, dialogul inter<strong>text</strong>ual îşi face loc cu putere, printr-un lanţ <strong>de</strong><br />

parodii bine conturate: parodierea mo<strong>de</strong>lului melodramatic însuşi, actualizat ca istorie <strong>de</strong><br />

dragoste a celor două mone<strong>de</strong>, din care nu lipsesc lovitura <strong>de</strong> teatru, recunoaşterea<br />

spectaculoasă, <strong>de</strong>scrierea frumuseţii feminine şi a celei masculine şi confesiunea obligatorie;<br />

parodierea – prin prezenţa unor elemente ce fac posibilă recunoaşterea mo<strong>de</strong>lului apusean –<br />

romanul <strong>de</strong> capă şi spadă, sau parodia Desperarea, o <strong>de</strong>monstraţie pe dos <strong>de</strong> virtuozitate<br />

poetică ce sancţionează reţeta poetică a epocii. Pe lângă aceste elemente se cuvin amintite şi<br />

„reuşitele” literare ale galbenului – instantaneele realiste, dar ascultând <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ologia socială<br />

romantică, rudimentele nuvelistice, nucleele nuvelistice autentice, autonome (povestea<br />

Zamfirei), precum şi fiziologiile ce creionează tipuri umane şi sociale - parazitul social<br />

(cartoforul), parvenitul prin femei, avarul (evreu), sau tipologii romantice încă active (hoţul<br />

<strong>de</strong> codru).<br />

Întrucât a<strong>de</strong>sea paraua intervine şi rupe coerenţa mo<strong>de</strong>lelor literare sau stilistice,<br />

refuzând „pactul <strong>de</strong> lectură” şi sancţionând, prin <strong>de</strong>sele ei avertismente, suspendarea<br />

nejustificată a naraţiunii şi parantezele digresive, se poate spune că ambii, naratorul şi<br />

naratarul, „se luptă pentru aproprierea «sujetului»” (Papadima 1989: 196). Având toate<br />

atributele necesare unui scriitor, paraua este, virtual, un contracandidat serios al galbenului<br />

şi jocul <strong>de</strong>-a uite-literatura-nu-e-literatura, din Istoria unui galben, susţine opinia potrivit<br />

căreia „învinuite <strong>de</strong> clişee romantice şi convenţionalism, scuzate oarecum prin tinereţea<br />

autorului, scrierile <strong>de</strong> început ale lui Alecsandri au, <strong>de</strong> fapt, un substrat polemic nu<br />

în<strong>de</strong>ajuns <strong>de</strong> evi<strong>de</strong>nt pentru toţi criticii scriitorului” (Curticăpeanu 1977 : 137).<br />

Nuvela lui Negruzzi, O alergare <strong>de</strong> cai, rescrie, meta<strong>text</strong>ual, acelaşi mo<strong>de</strong>l melodramatic,<br />

optând pentru proce<strong>de</strong>ul contrapunctării a două istorii şi a două istorisiri spuse <strong>de</strong> doi<br />

naratori distincţi. Cel dintâi, şi el un „autonarator” strategic, se înclină, ironic, gustului<br />

publicului şi dă <strong>text</strong>ului necesarul aspect memorialistic întrucât, afirmă Nicolae Manolescu<br />

(1990: 198) „ca să fie creditabilă povestea <strong>de</strong> amor, e nevoie <strong>de</strong> această mise-en-scène extrem<br />

<strong>de</strong> minuţioasă, în care îşi găseşte locul însuşi naratorul, introdus cât se poate <strong>de</strong> subtil”.<br />

Acest prim narator prezintă lumea bună a Chişinăului şi slujeşte <strong>de</strong> naratar celui <strong>de</strong>-al doilea<br />

narator, doamna B. Aceasta din urmă relatează povestea nefericită <strong>de</strong> dragoste a Olgăi –<br />

înţesată cu elemente ale recuzitei sentimentale şi melodramatice – asigurând <strong>text</strong>ului<br />

garanţia <strong>de</strong> autenticitate şi încărcătura emoţională obligatorie. Căci doamna B. a auzit<br />

povestea chiar <strong>de</strong> la Olga, care i s-a confesat <strong>de</strong> mai multe ori, iar „autonaratorul” îşi poate<br />

permite, şi <strong>de</strong> această dată, să pozeze în simplu scriptor, lipsit <strong>de</strong> responsabilităţi narative<br />

sau ... morale. De altfel, pe tot parcursul relatării doamnei B., maliţiosul „autonarator”<br />

întrerupe istorisirea contrapunctând-o cu ironii bine regizate, care reverberează în ţesătura<br />

<strong>de</strong> ansamblu a acestei „bijuterii <strong>de</strong> precizie tehnică” negruzziene (Manolescu 1990: 197).<br />

Istorisirea doamnei B, este încadrată, la nivelui ansamblului <strong>text</strong>ual, în naraţiunea cu<br />

aspect memorialistic a naratorului prim, ce se autoportretizează cu falsă candoare drept „un<br />

june brunet care, dupe barbetă şi musteţi, se conoştea că era străin” (Negruzzi 1983: 32) şi<br />

vizează, maliţios, clişeele literare ale ascun<strong>de</strong>rii i<strong>de</strong>ntităţii povestitorului. În acest mod,<br />

miezul melodramatic „îşi creează propriul con<strong>text</strong> situaţional” (Papadima 1989: 224) care, <strong>de</strong><br />

această dată, îl invali<strong>de</strong>ază, <strong>de</strong>structurându-i mecanismele.<br />

8


Senzaţia <strong>de</strong> artificialitate pe care o antrenează stereotipiile temei iubirii (ne)împărtăşite<br />

este eficient amendată <strong>de</strong> asumarea parodică a rolului îndrăgostitului nefericit (sau a<br />

seducătorului fără scrupule, dar numai aluziv astfel, aşa cum arată scrisoarea primită <strong>de</strong><br />

narator <strong>de</strong> la o tânără fată care îl iubeşte), completat cu autoaprecierea aerului melodramatic<br />

arborat intenţionat (Manolescu 1990: 198) şi cu trimiterea inter<strong>text</strong>uală la Balzac. În acest<br />

mod, povestea Olgăi, sinucigaşa îndrăgostită iremediabil <strong>de</strong> Ipolit, femeia fascinantă şi<br />

misterioasă ale cărei lecturi duc – ca într-un alt inter<strong>text</strong> celebru – cuplul Francesca da Rimini<br />

şi Paolo Malatesta din Divina Commedia – la îndrăgostire şi la formarea cuplului tragic, este<br />

situată într-un „mo<strong>de</strong>l interactiv <strong>de</strong> funcţionare a literaturii” (Papadima 1989: 215) care<br />

permite reacţiile cele mai diverse: fie acceptarea „pactului <strong>de</strong> lectură” cerut <strong>de</strong> convenţia<br />

melodramaticului (lecturile Olgăi au funcţie premonitorie şi <strong>de</strong>zvăluie pasionalitatea ascunsă<br />

a femeii, hărăzită din start unui final tragic), fie <strong>de</strong>taşarea lucidă şi ironică <strong>de</strong> convenţie şi <strong>de</strong><br />

clişeele literare în uz.<br />

Exploatând valoarea <strong>de</strong> document autentic a scrisorii, naratorul îşi joacă mai <strong>de</strong>parte<br />

rolul melodramatic şi, ca orice înşelat în dragoste, mimează actul retragerii din lume sau al ...<br />

călugăririi. Şi pentru ca ascuţimea critică a <strong>de</strong>mersului parodic să fie şi mai evi<strong>de</strong>ntă, se<br />

inserează în <strong>text</strong>, pe baza proce<strong>de</strong>ului mise en abîme, un rezumat al întâmplărilor şi al<br />

tipologiei literare a personajelor, ilustrate <strong>de</strong> nuvelă, precum şi al strategiilor <strong>de</strong>constructive<br />

ale noului tip nuvelistic exersat <strong>de</strong> Negruzzi. În acest fragment se regăsesc, concurenţial, mai<br />

multe registre stilistice, „în care funebrul se combină cu burlescul, patima Olgăi cu cochetăria<br />

doamnei B., oile pastoralei neoclasice cu vibratoul melodramei romantice” (Negruzzi 1983:<br />

47) şi, totodată, variantele „pozitive” ale frumuseţii feminine, Olga şi doamna B., cu<br />

imaginea ilar – grotescă a Saşei, cea căreia i s-a scurs un ochi, şchioapă <strong>de</strong> un picior, dar care<br />

„scrie, ceteşte groaznic” (Negruzzi 1983: 47).<br />

Epilogul (pseudo)istoriei <strong>de</strong> amor dintre narator şi doamna B. dă ultima lovitură<br />

eşafodajului melodramatic din centrul <strong>text</strong>ului. Întors în Chişinău, după douăzeci şi doi <strong>de</strong><br />

ani, naratorul face o vizită doamnei B. şi relatează :<br />

„Găsii o băbuţă zbârcită, înconjurată <strong>de</strong> căţei şi <strong>de</strong> motani, care, după ce cu politeţă<br />

mă invită lângă dânsa, îmi prezentă o priză <strong>de</strong> tabac! […].<br />

--Cum, doamna mea, porţi ochilari ?<br />

--Ce ? Ai pleşuvit ?<br />

--Tragi tabac ?<br />

--Ţ-au căzut dinţii ? ş. c. l., s. c. l. ”(Negruzzi 1983: 53-54)<br />

Pe nedrept uitată, eronat lecturată, nuvela exerciţiu <strong>de</strong> stil a lui Negruzzi este încă o<br />

dovadă a lucidităţii critice a actului <strong>de</strong> scriitură, luciditate care a însoţit mersul literaturii<br />

române <strong>de</strong> la începuturile acesteia.<br />

Referinţe<br />

Bodiu, A. (2002). Şapte teme ale romanului postpaşoptist, Piteşti: Paralela 45.<br />

Curticăpeanu, D. (1977). Vasile Alecsandri prozator, Bucureşti: Minerva.<br />

Manolescu, N. (1990). Istoria critică a literaturii române, vol. I, Bucureşti: Minerva.<br />

Muthu, M. (2002). Balcanismul literar românesc, III, Balcanitate şi balcanism, Cluj-Napoca: Dacia.<br />

Negruzzi, C. (1983). Păcatele tinereţelor, Bucureşti: Minerva.<br />

Papadima, L. (1989). Literatură şi comunicare. Relaţia autor–cititor în proza paşoptistă şi postpaşoptistă, Iaşi:<br />

Polirom.<br />

Zamfir, M. (1989). Din secolul romantic, Bucureşti: Cartea Românească.<br />

9


Abstact<br />

The Romanian literary production has for a long time witnessed a ten<strong>de</strong>ncy towards aligning with<br />

the literary phenomena of the western civilization. During the revolutionary year of 1848, the<br />

short story, for instance, which was one of the most prolific literary forms, was characterized by<br />

relative submissiveness to the European literary patterns accounted for in the ironic and parodic<br />

discourse overtones. The parodic style <strong>de</strong>veloped by Vasile Alecsandri or by Constantin Negruzzi<br />

in several varieties of literary proves the transparency of a critical spirit bearing upon the creative<br />

art of literary criticism performed during the same period.<br />

Résumé<br />

On a remarqué <strong>de</strong>puis longtemps la tendance <strong>de</strong> la littérature roumaine <strong>de</strong> se synchroniser avec la<br />

littérature européenne occi<strong>de</strong>ntale, ce qui met en évi<strong>de</strong>nce d’une façon particulière le statut <strong>de</strong> la<br />

femme du point <strong>de</strong> vue littéraire. Pendant l’époque <strong>de</strong> 1848, une <strong>de</strong>s plus fertiles formes littéraires,<br />

la nouvelle, se caractérise par la soumission relative aux modèles littéraires européens, aussi que<br />

par l’exercice ironique et parodique. La démarche parodique se développe, dans la pratique<br />

littéraire <strong>de</strong> Vasile Alecsandri ou <strong>de</strong> Constantin Negruzzi, en plusieurs variantes et prouve<br />

l’existence <strong>de</strong> la lucidité et <strong>de</strong> l’esprit critique qui accompagnent, à l’époque mentionnée, l’acte <strong>de</strong><br />

création littéraire.<br />

Rezumat<br />

S-a remarcat <strong>de</strong> multă vreme tendinţa literaturii române <strong>de</strong> a se sincroniza cu literatura europeană<br />

occi<strong>de</strong>ntală, fapt ce scoate în evi<strong>de</strong>nţă, într-o manieră cu totul specială, statutul femeii văzut prin<br />

prisma literaturii. În timpul perioa<strong>de</strong>i paşoptiste, una dintre cele mai fertile forme literare, nuvela,<br />

se caracterizează prin relativa supunere faţă <strong>de</strong> mo<strong>de</strong>lele literare europene precum şi prin<br />

exerciţiul ironic şi parodic. Demersul parodic se <strong>de</strong>zvoltă în mai multe variante în practica literară<br />

a lui Vasile Alecsandri sau a lui Constantin Negruzzi şi <strong>de</strong>monstrază existenţa spiritului critic şi<br />

a lucidităţii care însoţesc, în perioada menţionată, actul creaţiei literare.<br />

10


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 11-14<br />

FORMULA LIVRESCĂ A UMORULUI<br />

ÎN SCRIERILE LUI<br />

ION CREANGĂ<br />

Simona Antofi<br />

11<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Formula <strong>de</strong> umor creată prin scrisul literar al lui Ion Creangă stârneşte, şi azi, dacă nu<br />

controverse, în mod cert, <strong>de</strong>zbateri concentrate fie în jurul surselor folclorice ale comicului şi,<br />

implicit, ale umorului, fie pe problematica raportului dintre scriitorul aşa-zis poporal şi cel pe<br />

<strong>de</strong>plin conştient <strong>de</strong> actul său <strong>de</strong> creaţie. În felul său – discret metaforic, literar şi voit<br />

ambiguu – Călinescu remarcase natura aparent concurenţială, înşelătoare pentru neavizaţi, a<br />

scrisului, a umorului şi a plăcerii estetice provocate <strong>de</strong> opera lui Creangă: „plăcerea stârnită<br />

<strong>de</strong> audiţia scrierilor lui Creangă e <strong>de</strong> rafinament erudit. [...]. Creangă e un umanist al ştiinţei<br />

săteşti, scoţând din erudiţia lui un râs gros, fără a fi totuşi un autor vesel prin materie.<br />

Conţinutul poveştilor şi al amintirilor este indiferent în sine, ba chiar apt <strong>de</strong> a fi tratat liric ori<br />

fantastic, veselă este hohotirea interioară, setea nestinsă <strong>de</strong> vorbe, sorbite pentru ele însele<br />

dintr-o voluptate strict individuală” (Simion 2004 : 451).<br />

Criticul semnalează, <strong>de</strong> altfel, două aspecte esenţiale ale scriiturii lui Ion Creangă:<br />

centrarea asupra sa însăşi, într-o formă <strong>de</strong> autoreferenţialitate inedită şi greu <strong>de</strong> hotărât în ce<br />

măsură intenţionată <strong>de</strong> autor, şi figura complexă a spiritului creator. Dispus să-şi asume<br />

public, mai ales în cercul elitist al Junimii, rolul scriitorului popular, autor <strong>de</strong> ţărănii şi hâtru,<br />

gata oricând să înveselească prin anecdotele lui corosive, Ion Creangă a fost, în realitate, un<br />

forçat <strong>de</strong> la plume al literaturii române.<br />

Lupta continuă cu inerţiile şi capcanele limbii – a aceleia literare, pe care a predat-o<br />

învăţăceilor săi, şi a aceleia <strong>de</strong>prinse în Humuleşti – s-a dovedit a fi, în ultimă instanţă, şi o<br />

luptă cu sine. Lupta dintre răzeşul din Humuleşti, bun ştiutor <strong>de</strong> carte şi cu mintea limpe<strong>de</strong><br />

şi severă a dascălului, şi scriitorul în <strong>de</strong>venire, perfect conştient <strong>de</strong> riscurile meseriei şi <strong>de</strong><br />

talentul pe care-l avea.<br />

Pe <strong>de</strong> altă parte, (re)facerea lumii prin discurs refuncţionalizează, în cazul lui Ion<br />

Creangă, proce<strong>de</strong>e ale oralităţii şi <strong>de</strong> sorginte populară – probabil, singurele pe care scriitorul<br />

le simţea ca fiind ale sale – transformându-le în instrumente aducătoare <strong>de</strong> prospeţime ale<br />

literaturii culte. Reelaborarea imaginii satului Humuleşti se bizuie, în egală măsură, pe efecte<br />

<strong>de</strong> real menite să stabilizeze o referinţă ambiguizată constant <strong>de</strong> jocurile <strong>de</strong> limbaj, ca şi pe<br />

capacitatea discursului literar <strong>de</strong> a-şi construi un referent <strong>de</strong> al doilea grad, pe ruinele celui<br />

primar.<br />

Aşadar, lectura euristică simplifică, dar şi văduveşte scriitura lui Ion Creangă <strong>de</strong><br />

a<strong>de</strong>văratele ei valenţe. Lectura hermeneutică, însă, face posibilă sesizarea şi analizarea<br />

opţiunilor stilistice ale autorului, a arhitecturii <strong>de</strong> ansamblu a fiecărui <strong>text</strong> în parte şi a<br />

tuturor, împreună. În sensul acesta, umorul lui Ion Creangă poate corespun<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finiţiilor<br />

<strong>de</strong>ja clasicizate, cu condiţia acceptării <strong>de</strong> către orice interpret a particularităţilor <strong>de</strong> scriitură<br />

care transferă sursa râsului în atitudinea auctorială şi în volutele <strong>text</strong>ului.<br />

Comparând umorul cu ironia, şi formula umorului lui Ion Creangă cu cele ale altor


scriitori din literatura universală, Todoran remarcă :<br />

“umorul rezultă dintr-o «integrare» a omului în lume, iar ironia dintr-o «distanţare» faţă<br />

<strong>de</strong> ea. Superioritatea umoristului este aparenta lui prostie, adică aparenta lui inferioritate,<br />

care se dove<strong>de</strong>şte o reală superioritate când înălţimea lumii imaginare este măsurată pe<br />

dimensiunea vieţii lui reale.”<br />

(Todoran 1985 : 64)<br />

Altfel spus, notele <strong>de</strong> ironie sau <strong>de</strong> autoironie din Amintiri, <strong>de</strong> pildă, sunt reacţii ale<br />

autorului însuşi, ale cărui intrări şi ieşiri din <strong>text</strong> sunt rapid cenzurate prin întoarcerea la<br />

literatură – „Hai mai bine <strong>de</strong>spre copilărie să vorbim, căci ea singură este veselă şi<br />

nevinovată.” Retragerea în literatură, sub zodia umorului atoatevin<strong>de</strong>cător reprezintă, fără<br />

îndoială, şi o soluţie <strong>de</strong> supravieţuire. Faptul a fost <strong>de</strong>ja remarcat în critica <strong>de</strong> specialitate.<br />

Efectul catarctic al scriiturii şi al umorului pe care-l înmagazinează transformă copilăria celui<br />

mai mare fiu al unei familii cu mulţi fraţi, <strong>de</strong>stul <strong>de</strong> înstărită, dar mereu cu grija zilei <strong>de</strong><br />

mâine, în copilăria copilului universal, iar satul Humuleşti într-un e<strong>de</strong>n infantil spre care<br />

gândurile adultului se întorc mereu, pentru o necesară regenerare afectivă, spirituală şi<br />

creatoare.<br />

Mereu luminoasă, imaginea mamei pare a fi unul dintre instrumentele privilegiate <strong>de</strong><br />

rescriere literară a istoriei proprii. Aşa se face că aparenta contradicţie dintre umorul – mereu<br />

ţărănesc şi proaspăt 1 – şi natura <strong>de</strong>osebit <strong>de</strong> elaborată a scriiturii din Amintiri dispare odată<br />

cu evi<strong>de</strong>nţierea statutului <strong>de</strong> roman indirect a <strong>text</strong>ului, în mod fundamental recreator al unei<br />

vieţi cu exemplaritate <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>stin.<br />

În fond, în termenii Mariei Corti, „pentru un scriitor, stilurile sau registrele oferă un<br />

mo<strong>de</strong>l formal”, iar „elementele care provin dintr-un tip <strong>de</strong> scriitură sau registru” „poartă în<br />

ele, împreună cu conţinutul semantic, o «informaţie suplimentară <strong>de</strong> registru».” 2 Aşa se<br />

explică faţada folclorică a eşafodajului arhitectural din Amintiri, ca şi din orice alt <strong>text</strong> al lui<br />

Ion Creangă.<br />

Mai mult <strong>de</strong>cât atât, aparenta contradicţie se regăseşte şi în structura spiritului creator.<br />

Conştientizându-şi, fără doar şi poate, latura ţărănească, sau, altfel spus, disponibilitatea<br />

intrinsecă pentru faptele literare pe care le numea, a<strong>de</strong>seori cu falsă mo<strong>de</strong>stie, ţărănii,<br />

scriitorul se <strong>de</strong>dublează, suprapunându-i originii sale ţărăneşti conştiinţa lucidă a creatorului<br />

<strong>de</strong> literatură care trebuie să vorbească <strong>de</strong>spre lume – <strong>de</strong>spre lumea sa – pe cât <strong>de</strong> bine poate.<br />

Şi dacă „la fiecare efort <strong>de</strong> construire al producătorului, aceasta [opera] suferă o alterare,<br />

opera îl modifică şi, odată terminată, reacţionează, încă o dată, asupra lui” (Negrici 1978 : 20).<br />

În această relaţie complexă a scriiturii cu autorul ei şi a acestuia cu sine pârghia<br />

umorului funcţionează ca soluţie <strong>de</strong> recalibrare a realităţii care, nu <strong>de</strong> puţine ori, a dat năvală<br />

peste scriitor. Episoa<strong>de</strong>le dureroase ale existenţei lui Ion Creangă, culminând cu <strong>de</strong>clanşarea<br />

epilepsiei, sunt binecunoscute. De aceea, scepticismul pare a fi „fondul <strong>de</strong> atitudine<br />

existenţială pe care se clă<strong>de</strong>şte umorul.” 3 Iar gratuităţii umorului i se adaugă acea atitudine<br />

înţelegătoare, îngăduitoare şi nota discretă <strong>de</strong> simpatie care supra<strong>de</strong>termină scepticismul. 4<br />

În Moş Nechifor Coţcariul, <strong>de</strong> exemplu, neajunsurile meseriei <strong>de</strong> harabagiu şi nu<br />

suficienta în<strong>de</strong>stulare care par a se ascun<strong>de</strong> în spatele existenţei prin cuvinte a personajului<br />

masculin pălesc simţitor în faţa aventurii erotice din limbaj, care o surclasează pe cea reală.<br />

Putând fi citită şi ca un discurs involuntar meta<strong>text</strong>ual, nuvela propune un dialog savuros,<br />

prin aluzii şi echivocuri, între harabagiu şi giupâneşica Malca, respectiv între un abil<br />

mânuitor al forţei persuasive şi creatoare a limbajului şi un interlocutor nu mai puţin dibaci<br />

la vorbe şi, cu siguranţă, priceput interpret.<br />

Mult mai aproape <strong>de</strong> umor <strong>de</strong>cât <strong>de</strong> obscen, expresia echivocă ascun<strong>de</strong> şi <strong>de</strong>scoperă, în<br />

acelaşi timp, un proces <strong>de</strong> negociere între Moş Nechifor şi giupâneşică, fie a disponibilităţii<br />

erotice a ambilor, fie a (in)discretei puteri a limbajului literar <strong>de</strong> a înlocui pe <strong>de</strong>-a-ntregul<br />

12


ealitatea. Drumurile săptămânale pe care Malca le va face, cu harabagiul, la socri, <strong>de</strong>notă,<br />

aşa cum s-a remarcat <strong>de</strong>ja, apropierea erotică a celor doi şi, totodată, obiceiurile – şi<br />

obişnuinţele – lingvistice comune.<br />

Cu sau fără ameninţarea vreunui lup, cu o căruţă (aparent) gata <strong>de</strong> a se <strong>de</strong>zmembra, cei<br />

doi călători vor înnopta <strong>de</strong> fiecare dată în aceeaşi pădure protectoare şi e <strong>de</strong> bănuit că vor<br />

prelungi mereu plăcerea dialogului ce pare a masca flirtul, pentru a-l crea un<strong>de</strong>va dincolo <strong>de</strong><br />

aparenţe. „Umorul povestitorului constând – remarca Eugen Todoran – tocmai în echivocul<br />

care ne scuteşte <strong>de</strong> urmărirea întâmplărilor până la ceea ce în realitate este obscen” (Todoran<br />

1985 : 62).<br />

Iar Mircea A. Diaconu semnalează, odată cu nenumăratele fire care-l leagă pe autor <strong>de</strong><br />

personajul său 5, dimensiunea inedit <strong>text</strong>ualistă a literaturii lui Ion Creangă, respectiv<br />

„spectacolul limbajului în sine, spectacol gratuit şi autonom”, căci „orice ierarhie se<br />

suspendă, orice convenţie este distrusă şi un sentiment al egalizării tuturor nivelurilor<br />

existenţei provoacă râsul «homeric»: conştiinţa plasează egalizarea sub semnul ludicului, al<br />

gratuităţii.” 6<br />

Se adaugă, aici, căutarea structurii sonore <strong>de</strong>săvârşite a limbajului, ca o garanţie a<br />

literaturităţii şi a acreditării răzeşului din Humuleşti ca scriitor. Acel „hermetism folcloric”<br />

<strong>de</strong> care vorbea Ion Negoiţescu înseamnă atât putinţa <strong>de</strong> a crea atmosferă la nivelul sugestiei<br />

sonore cât mai ales boicotarea voită a sensului referenţial, aşa încât personajele şi acţiunile<br />

lor să fie „cortina în spatele căreia inteligenţa, ironia, complexele scriitorului construiesc un<br />

alt semnificat”, estetic. 7 Şi un profil al autorului din <strong>text</strong> <strong>de</strong>ghizându-se în spatele<br />

anecdoticului şi luând pe rând locul fiecăruia dintre personajele sale, pe care le alimentează<br />

mereu, afectiv şi lingvistic.<br />

Restituindu-şi lumea copilăriei pe măsură ce o creează, Creangă se construieşte şi pe<br />

sine, „sceptic şi autoironic, histrion şi narcisist” 8, transformând o practică semnificantă într-un<br />

modus vivendi care nu face concurenţă stării civile, cum s-ar putea spune, pentru că o<br />

înlocuieşte, venind dinspre literatură, cu vocaţia autenticităţii.<br />

Note<br />

1. Eugen Todoran remarcă: „în comparaţie cu formule caracteristice ale umorului la diferiţii scriitori ai<br />

literaturii universale – în <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea ei istorică – umorul tragic la Cervantes, corosiv la Boccacio,<br />

in<strong>de</strong>cent la Rabelais, jovial la Chaucer, trist la Mark Twain, paradoxal la Bernard Shaw – umorul lui<br />

Creangă rămâne un umor ţărănesc, păstrând în el urmele originii lui folclorice” – în Secţiuni<br />

literare, 1985, p. 53<br />

2. Maria Corti, Principiile comunicării literare, Ed. Univers, Bucureşti, 1981, pp. 90 - 91<br />

3. Mircea A. Diaconu, Ion Creangă. Nonconformism şi gratuitate, Ed. Dacia, Cluj-Napoca, 2002, p. 103<br />

4. I<strong>de</strong>m, p. 105<br />

5. „Moş Nechifor e un alter ego al autorului pentru că el înspăimântă parodiind spaima şi seduce<br />

parodiind seducţia în aceeaşi măsură în care naratorul acestei nuvele mimează inocenţa” – Mircea<br />

A. Diaconu, op.cit., p. 116<br />

6. Ibi<strong>de</strong>m<br />

7. I<strong>de</strong>m, p. 139. De altfel, la p.123, criticul enumeră principalele strategii <strong>de</strong> articulare lingvistică a unei<br />

imago mundi unice: „proza ritmată şi rimată, ironia, discursul alert, cu enumerări ingenioase,<br />

nesofisticata plăcere a inventării, toate acestea excelează într-o serie <strong>de</strong> sinonime la nivelul<br />

antroponimelor sau chiar al toponimelor. Prin fluxul care pare involuntar, <strong>de</strong>şi este atât <strong>de</strong> studiat,<br />

al asociaţiilor lingvistice, Creangă face dovada geniului său lingvistic.”<br />

8. I<strong>de</strong>m, p. 157<br />

Bibliografie<br />

Corti, M. (1981). Principiile comunicării literare, Bucureşti: Univers.<br />

Diaconu, M. A. (2002). Ion Creangă. Nonconformism şi gratuitate, Cluj-Napoca : Dacia.<br />

Negrici, E. (1978). Figura spiritului creator, Bucureşti: Cartea românească.<br />

Simion, E. (coord.) (2004). Dicţionarul General al Literaturii Române, C/D, Bucureşti: Univers<br />

13


Enciclopedic.<br />

Todoran, E. (1985). Secţiuni literare, Timişoara: Facla.<br />

Abstract<br />

Unjustly consi<strong>de</strong>red a „folk writer” by the Romanian critical tradition, Ion Creangă created a<br />

structured „illusion of reality” <strong>de</strong>eply rooted in his <strong>text</strong>ual humour. Relying on his active writing<br />

conscience and the expectations of his contemporary and forthcoming rea<strong>de</strong>r’s concerns, Ion<br />

Creangă’s work valued the sense of humour not as an end in itself but as a means of gaining<br />

supremacy over his rea<strong>de</strong>rs crossing over time and spac by paving the way for different types of<br />

reading. nto mean of gaining over the rea<strong>de</strong>r – the real and the future ones – opening the way<br />

toward different types of reading. Thus, beyond the surface reading and the overt humoristic<br />

structures, the aesthetic category of humour generates the construction of a specific kind of<br />

discourse, to which reality is only a starting point.<br />

Résumé<br />

Considéré, en vertu <strong>de</strong> la tradition critique roumaine, écrivain populaire, Ion Creangă met en<br />

oeuvre une illusion <strong>de</strong> réel parfaite, fondée, entre autres, sur la composante humoristique <strong>de</strong> son<br />

écriture. L’oeuvre <strong>de</strong> Ion Creangă – élaborée à l’ai<strong>de</strong> d’une conscience créatrice luci<strong>de</strong> et fondée sur<br />

l’évaluation correcte <strong>de</strong> l’horizon d’attente <strong>de</strong> l’époque – utilise l’humour en tant que stratégie <strong>de</strong><br />

gagner l’adhésion du lecteur contemporain et <strong>de</strong> la postérité. De ce point <strong>de</strong> vue, en <strong>de</strong>hors <strong>de</strong> la<br />

perception superficielle <strong>de</strong>s informations <strong>text</strong>uelles, et <strong>de</strong>s effets immédiats <strong>de</strong> l’humour, cette<br />

catégorie esthétique prend part, par ses éléments concrets, à l’élaboration d’un univers <strong>de</strong> discours<br />

spécifique, pour lequel la réalité n’est que le point <strong>de</strong> départ.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Pe nedrept numit, în virtutea unei în<strong>de</strong>lungate tradiţii critice, „scriitor poporal”, Ion Creangă<br />

construieşte o impecabilă iluzie <strong>de</strong> real fundamentată, printre altele, pe componenta umoristică a<br />

scriiturii sale. Rod al unei conştiinţe scriitoriceşti <strong>de</strong>osebit <strong>de</strong> active, şi al aprecierii corecte a<br />

aşteptărilor publicului cititor din vremea sa, opera lui Ion Creangă face din umor pârghia necesară<br />

câştigării a<strong>de</strong>ziunii cititorului – a celui real şi a posterităţii – permiţând, totodată, o lectură<br />

diferenţiată. În această ordine <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>i, dincolo <strong>de</strong> percepţia superficială a datelor <strong>text</strong>ului, şi <strong>de</strong><br />

efectele imediate ale componentei umoristice, categoria estetică a umoristicului participă, prin<br />

elementele ei concrete, la elaborarea unui univers <strong>de</strong> discurs specific, pentru care realitatea<br />

reprezintă doar punctul <strong>de</strong> plecare.<br />

14


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 15-22<br />

STRATEGIA<br />

ACHIZIŢIEI PROPRIETĂŢILOR SEMANTICE LA<br />

PREŞCOLARI<br />

Filip Cristian Bacalu<br />

15<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Evoluţia semantică este strâns legată <strong>de</strong> evoluţia cognitivă. Sensul se <strong>de</strong>zvoltă cu<br />

ajutorul experienţei, al predispoziţiilor înnăscute şi al oportunităţilor disponibile. În timpul<br />

evoluţiei pre-lingvistice, copiii îşi însuşesc înţelesuri pentru evenimentele trăite prin<br />

intermediul altor membri. În timpul jocului şi al altor evenimente care necesită atenţie, se<br />

stabilesc legături bine <strong>de</strong>finite între acţiuni, obiecte şi vocalizări.<br />

Înţelegerea limbajului nu presupune doar înţelegerea aspectelor limbajului în sine,<br />

precum intonaţia şi situarea temporală care ajută la i<strong>de</strong>ntificarea cuvintelor şi frazelor, ci şi<br />

crearea <strong>de</strong> legături între semnificat şi semnificant cu referire la evenimentele din jur<br />

(Veneziano 1989; Veneziano, Sinclair şi Berthoud 1990). Semnele lingvistice sunt arbitrare; <strong>de</strong><br />

exemplu, obiectul caracterizat prin lungime şi aspect subţire care conţine grafit este folosit<br />

pentru scriere şi poartă <strong>de</strong>numirea <strong>de</strong> „creion.” L-am fi putut <strong>de</strong>numi simplu „goo,” <strong>de</strong>şi<br />

aceasta înseamnă ca toţi să îl numească astfel.<br />

Relaţia dintre semnificant şi semnificat este, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, una abstractă. Unele obiecte,<br />

precum creioanele şi pietrele, sunt entităţi concrete, dar alte concepte, precum libertatea şi<br />

iubirea, sunt abstracte. Piaget a propus trei scheme pentru inteligenţa senzorial-motorie –<br />

previziunea (abilitatea <strong>de</strong> a anticipa următorul eveniment dintr-o activitate în <strong>de</strong>sfăşurare),<br />

intenţionalitatea şi recunoaşterea relaţiilor dintr-o frază – scheme care ajută copiii să<br />

folosească sistemele simbolice. În momentul în care tutorii adulţi reacţionează la vocalizările<br />

copiilor, aceştia <strong>de</strong>monstrează copiilor că vocalizările lor au un înţeles, fie că aceştia din<br />

urmă au intenţionat un anume lucru, fie că nu. Copiii <strong>de</strong>vin astfel conştienţi <strong>de</strong> importanţa şi<br />

înţelesul evocat <strong>de</strong> vocalizările lor.<br />

Limbajul folosit în preajma copiilor poate <strong>de</strong>termina şi semnificaţia comunicativă şi<br />

socială a limbajului. Limbajul dintre adulţi şi copii („mămos”) are caracteristici distincte,<br />

diferite faţă <strong>de</strong> limbajul dintre adulţi. În general, „mămoşenia” se distinge printr-o<br />

intensitate ridicată, frecvenţe variate, <strong>de</strong>bit scăzut al verbalizării, intonaţie variată, enunţuri<br />

mai scurte, repetiţie, structură simplă a propoziţiei, verbalizare concentrată pe momentul<br />

prezent şi folosirea <strong>de</strong> diminutive, precum ursuleţ, nani, păpică. „Mămoşenia” se orientează<br />

către interesele şi nivelurile <strong>de</strong> conştientizare, jucând un rol important în evoluţia lingvistică<br />

şi a comunicării, <strong>de</strong>şi cre<strong>de</strong>m că trebuie evitate.<br />

În jurul vârstei <strong>de</strong> 9 luni, copiii încep să <strong>de</strong>vină familiari cu cei din jur, în special cu<br />

părinţii. La scurt timp după aceasta, ei folosesc idiomorfisme (Werner şi Kaplan 1963).<br />

Idiomorfismele (vocabule sau forme fonetice constante) sunt sunete unice pe care le atribuie<br />

copiii, în mod constant, unui obiect sau acţiuni. Deşi aceste idiomorfisme nu sunt cuvinte şi<br />

nu sunt recunoscute astfel, ele au rol <strong>de</strong> cuvinte idiosincretice pentru copil. Unele<br />

idiomorfisme pot avea punctul <strong>de</strong> plecare în imitaţie, precum „rrr” pentru a face referire la o<br />

maşină sau la un câine. În genere, tutorii i<strong>de</strong>ntifică uşor înţelesul idiomorfismelor folosite,


<strong>de</strong>şi alţii nu au această capacitate. Stabilitatea fonetică se poate mări, un proces <strong>de</strong>numit<br />

asociere în lanţ (Vygotsky 1962). De asemenea, idiomorfismele reflectă creativitatea lingvistică<br />

a copilului. În mod frecvent, idiomorfismele sunt combinate cu primele cuvinte (Reich 1986).<br />

1. Vorbirea pentru sine<br />

Teoria <strong>de</strong>zvoltării propusă <strong>de</strong> Vygotsky menţionează achiziţia mentală a limbajului<br />

social şi ajutorul acestuia în rezolvarea problemelor şi în raţionament. Între 2 şi 4 ani,<br />

vorbirea pentru sine capătă un caracter pronunţat, care sca<strong>de</strong> însă pe măsură ce este<br />

convertit în limbaj mental propriu. Furrow (1984) a sugerat că vorbirea pentru sine serveşte<br />

funcţiilor <strong>de</strong> reglare lingvistică proprie, <strong>de</strong>scriere şi expresivitate. Frawley şi Lantolf (1986)<br />

însă, au accentuat faptul că toate formele <strong>de</strong> vorbire pentru sine sunt reglatoare, iar<br />

neapariţia limbajului în efectuarea unei sarcini nu afectează funcţionalitatea. Deşi<br />

<strong>de</strong>scoperirile sunt variate, există o teorie care susţine viziunea lui Vygotsky adaugând că<br />

vorbirea pentru sine este o funcţie cognitivă cu orientare din partea utilizatorului. Aceste<br />

<strong>de</strong>scoperiri atestă şi faptul că funcţiile limbajului sunt în acest punct într-o perioadă <strong>de</strong><br />

tranziţie.<br />

O culegere <strong>de</strong> lucrări <strong>de</strong>spre vorbirea pentru sine editată <strong>de</strong> Diaz şi Berk (1992) se<br />

concentrează asupra lărgirii şi testării perspectivei teoretice propuse <strong>de</strong> Vygotsky. Cele două<br />

mari direcţii prezente în lucrările lui Vygotsky – importanţa vorbirii pentru sine ca stadiu<br />

cognitiv intermediar între colaborarea cu alţii şi propria activitate cerebrală şi, pe <strong>de</strong> altă<br />

parte, natura <strong>de</strong> reglare proprie a vorbirii pentru sine a copiilor – au parte <strong>de</strong> un sprijin<br />

marcat. Lucrările lui Vygotsky oferă, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, o perspectivă în istoria socio-culturală<br />

proprie copiilor şi a evoluţiei cognitive, astfel încât legăturile create între mediu, pe <strong>de</strong> o<br />

parte, şi creşterea şi <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea copilului, pe <strong>de</strong> altă parte, pot fi analizate mai atent<br />

(Behrend, Rosengren şi Perimutter 1989, Smolucha şi Smolucha 1992).<br />

2. Primele cuvinte<br />

De obicei, primele cuvinte apar între 9 şi 12 luni şi se referă la oameni importanţi<br />

pentru copil (mama sau tata) sau la obiecte. Cuvintele pentru obiecte mişcătoare (ex.: maşini)<br />

sau care pot fi manipulate (ex.: suc) sunt mai frecvente <strong>de</strong>cât cuvintele <strong>de</strong> acţiuni (ex.: pa-pa).<br />

Funcţiile asociate cu primele cuvinte sunt, în general, numirea, afirmarea şi cererea.<br />

Denumirile date <strong>de</strong> copii reflectă <strong>de</strong>numiri <strong>de</strong> categorii, „căţeluş,” şi nu <strong>de</strong> entităţi separate,<br />

cum ar fi „câine mare, câine rău” (Baldwin şi Markman 1989). S-a observat o preferinţă a<br />

copiilor pentru primele tipuri <strong>de</strong> cuvinte achiziţionate; copiii care achiziţionează multe<br />

substantive comune sunt <strong>de</strong>numiţi referenţiali, iar cei care îşi însuşesc alte tipuri <strong>de</strong> cuvinte,<br />

expresivi. În timpul folosirii primelor cuvinte, copiii folosesc cuvintele în mod frecvent, fie în<br />

forma fonetică, fie făcând referire la semnificat. În acest stadiu, ei percep cuvintele ca parte<br />

din sistemul lingvistic şi conştientizează valoarea comunicativă a acestora.<br />

Copiii referenţiali sunt consi<strong>de</strong>raţi mai avansaţi în <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea lexicală din punctul <strong>de</strong><br />

ve<strong>de</strong>re al înţelegerii şi producerii, fiind capabili să folosească cuvintele în con<strong>text</strong>e variate.<br />

Deşi copiii expresivi prezintă expresii fixe şi un vocabular eterogen, copiii referenţiali se<br />

concentrează asupra <strong>de</strong>numirii obiectelor şi folosirea substantivelor şi a atributelor acestora.<br />

Copiii se folosesc <strong>de</strong> mai multe strategii pentru achiziţionarea primelor cuvinte. Un<br />

principiu important este contrastul. Conform acestuia, copilul presupune că un termen nou<br />

nu se referă la obiectul menţionat anterior (Markman şi Wachtel 1988). Alt principiu este<br />

presupoziţia că un termen nou cuprin<strong>de</strong> toate părţile constitutive ale unui obiect, şi nu doar<br />

o parte din acesta; acest principiu este <strong>de</strong>numit principiul scopului obiectului (Taylor şi<br />

Gelman 1988). Un alt studiu semnat Taylor şi Gelman menţionează că un copil <strong>de</strong> 2 ani se<br />

foloseşte atât <strong>de</strong> categoria lingvistică formală (ex.: substantiv sau adjectiv), cât şi <strong>de</strong><br />

16


contrastul lexical pentru interpretarea cuvintelor noi. A treia strategie, schiţarea rapidă,<br />

adună informaţii <strong>de</strong>spre înţelesul cuvântului, folosindu-se <strong>de</strong> modul <strong>de</strong> întrebuinţare în<br />

propoziţie şi <strong>de</strong> cuvintele cu care este comparat; această strategie oferă informaţii rapi<strong>de</strong>, dar<br />

incomplete, <strong>de</strong>spre noile cuvinte. Heibeck şi Markman (1987) au arătat că, la 2 ani, copiii pot<br />

îngusta sfera semnificatului cu ajutorul celei <strong>de</strong>-a treia strategii. În plus, copiii cuprind<br />

frecvent noile cuvinte în vocabularul propriu prin formarea <strong>de</strong> ierarhii lingvistice în care<br />

cuvintele noi sunt subordonate unei categorii <strong>de</strong>ja stabilite (Taylor şi Gelman 1989).<br />

Alte investigaţii au format legături între <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea semantică şi cea cognitivă în<br />

timpul etapei enunţurilor formate dintr-un singur cuvânt. Gopnik şi Meltzoff (1986)<br />

formulează teoria specificităţii, care propune conexiuni specifice între anumiţi termeni<br />

lingvistici şi anumite stadii <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>zvoltare cognitivă în etapa enunţurilor formate dintr-un<br />

singur cuvânt.<br />

Sensurile primelor cuvinte pe care copiii şi le formează, <strong>de</strong>şi constante, au tendinţa <strong>de</strong> a<br />

exagera sau minimiza folosirea categorială. Minimizarea survine atunci când copilul observă<br />

că multitudinea <strong>de</strong> semnificaţii aferente unui cuvânt este mai restrânsă <strong>de</strong>cât cea a unui<br />

adult. De exemplu, ceea ce copilul înţelege prin minge ar putea fi restrâns la mingea favorită,<br />

şi nu la mingi în general, cu atât mai mult la mingea <strong>de</strong> rugby. Exagerarea folosirii<br />

categoriale survine atunci când copiii folosesc excesiv un anumit cuvânt – numirea tuturor<br />

bătrânilor „bunic.” Această exagerare este răspândită atât în vorbire, cât şi în înţelegerea<br />

vorbirii altora.<br />

Primele cuvinte rostite au iscat divergenţe <strong>de</strong> opinie cu privire la caracterul simbolic<br />

sau <strong>de</strong> specificare a intenţiilor copilului. Aceasta naşte întrebarea: cuvintele reflectă concepte<br />

fundamentale sau servesc ca mijloc alternativ <strong>de</strong> atingere a unui scop? Piaget susţine că<br />

primele cuvinte nu au caracter simbolic, ci sprijină <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea <strong>de</strong> noi scheme <strong>de</strong> acţiuni în<br />

ve<strong>de</strong>rea stabilirii <strong>de</strong> noi meto<strong>de</strong> pentru atingerea unui scop. Acest proces are loc între 12 şi 18<br />

luni. Unii specialişti susţin ipoteza şi afirmă că aceste vocalizări reprezintă acţiunile care<br />

reflectă direct intenţiile copilului. Acţiunile sunt, <strong>de</strong> obicei, protoenunţiative (comentarii<br />

informative) sau protoimperative (ordine). În continuare, pentru o mai bună înţelegere a<br />

producerii primelor cuvinte, se vor <strong>de</strong>talia explicaţii teoretice alternative <strong>de</strong>spre primele<br />

cuvinte şi <strong>de</strong>spre folosirea acestora.<br />

3. Explicaţii alternative pentru concepte şi primele cuvinte<br />

Owens (1992) susţine că semantica face referire la un sistem <strong>de</strong> reguli care dictează<br />

conţinutul cuvintelor şi combinaţiile dintre cuvinte. Cuvintele nu sunt oglinda realităţii, ci<br />

numai conceptele şi credinţele oamenilor <strong>de</strong>spre realitate. Cunoaşterea cognitivă reflectă<br />

cunoaşterea realităţii – modul în care oamenii împart experienţele şi conceptele în categorii.<br />

Oamenii stochează informaţii <strong>de</strong>spre experienţele trăite (memorie episodică), simboluri,<br />

reguli şi legăturile dintre acestea (memorie semantică). Memoria episodică şi cea semantică<br />

au o bază comună <strong>de</strong> informaţii şi experienţe; formarea conceptelor fiind consi<strong>de</strong>rată cel mai<br />

important proces cognitiv. Când un concept este asociat cu un cuvânt, rezultă cunoaşterea<br />

semantică, luând naştere, în felul acesta, fundamentele înţelesului lingvistic.<br />

Pentru caracteristicile care stau la baza cunoştinţelor semantice au fost propuse câteva<br />

explicaţii:<br />

ipoteza trăsăturilor semantice,<br />

ipoteza nucleului funcţional şi<br />

învăţarea prototipică.<br />

Fiecare dintre aceste perspective susţine că diferitele caracteristici ale referentului sunt<br />

însuşite <strong>de</strong> copii, dar nimeni nu cunoaşte ce se ascun<strong>de</strong> în gândurile altora; oamenii pot doar<br />

<strong>de</strong>duce înţelesuri din cuvinte sau presupuneri.<br />

17


4. Ipoteza trăsăturilor semantice<br />

Eve Clark (1973a, 1973b) argumentează că un copil învaţă un set <strong>de</strong> trăsături universale<br />

care caracterizează toţi referenţii, ca <strong>de</strong> exemplu uman / non-uman, neînsufleţit / însufleţit,<br />

etc. Copiii află înţelesuri noi prin i<strong>de</strong>ntificarea particularităţilor mai importante ale unui<br />

referent. Spre exemplu, o minge poate fi caracterizată prin rotunjime şi proprietatea <strong>de</strong> a<br />

sări. Pe măsură ce copilul creşte, criteriile se pot schimba, putându-se adăuga sau şterge<br />

unele caracteristici, spre exemplu, mărimea, materialul, etc. Clasificarea conform acestor<br />

particularităţi este gradată <strong>de</strong> la trăsăturile cele mai largi la cele mai specifice (Ingram, 1991).<br />

Pentru unii termeni, spre exemplu antonimele, doar unul este consi<strong>de</strong>rat a fi <strong>de</strong> bază,<br />

subliniind dimensiunea semantică. De exemplu, în cazul antonimelor „înalt” şi „scund,”<br />

dimensiunea semantică <strong>de</strong>finitorie este conceptul <strong>de</strong> „înălţime.” Când se doreşte cunoaşterea<br />

înălţimii unei persoane, se întreabă cât <strong>de</strong> înaltă este persoana în cauză; astfel, înălţimea este<br />

dimensiune semantică <strong>de</strong>finitorie şi fundamentală. Dimensiunea <strong>de</strong>finitorie este consi<strong>de</strong>rată<br />

marcată, înţelesul acesteia fiind cel dintâi element achiziţionat (Clark 1973a, 1973b). Alte<br />

categorii, precum pipăitul sau auzul sunt achiziţionate la început. Backschei<strong>de</strong>r, Shatz şi<br />

Gelman (1993) evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază că între 3 şi 4 ani, copiii înţeleg genul ontologic; aceştia<br />

conştientizează că plantele şi animalele pot creşte, dar că obiectele nu au această capacitate.<br />

Unii critici au înaintat presupunerea că această ipoteză nu specifică exact care sunt<br />

caracteristicile cele mai importante. Aceştia susţin că referenţii abstracţi sau cei care implică<br />

ju<strong>de</strong>căţi relative, precum „mai mult,” nu sunt explicaţi <strong>de</strong> această ipoteză.<br />

5. Ipoteza nucleului funcţional<br />

Kathryn Nelson (1974) afirmă că proprietăţile funcţionale ale referentului, şi nu<br />

proprietăţile statice, sunt cele care <strong>de</strong>finesc înţelesul referentului. Copiii încep prin a numi<br />

termenii <strong>de</strong> acţiune; Nelson susţine <strong>de</strong>finirea obiectelor <strong>de</strong> către copii în funcţie <strong>de</strong> calităţile<br />

funcţionale şi adăugarea ulterioară <strong>de</strong> proprietăţi perceptive relevante. Nucleul<br />

semnificatului îl reprezintă folosirea funcţională a unui obiect. Conceptul se achiziţionează;<br />

apoi se adaugă proprietăţile funcţionale, iar la final, proprietăţile nucleului referentului sunt<br />

distinse <strong>de</strong> alte relaţii. De exemplu, mărul reprezintă ceva digerabil, care poate fi aruncat, şi<br />

este, <strong>de</strong> obicei, rotund şi roşu. La un moment dat, faptul că mărul poate fi aruncat este<br />

consi<strong>de</strong>rată o calitate funcţională importantă. Deşi Nelson a adunat dovezi practice, ipoteza<br />

nucleului functional nu a fost susţinută <strong>de</strong> mulţi.<br />

6. Învăţarea prototipică<br />

Bowerman (1978) a criticat atât ipoteza proprietăţilor semantice, cât şi cea a nucleului<br />

funcţional ca fiind limitate în ceea ce priveşte capacitatea copilului <strong>de</strong> a <strong>de</strong>osebi relaţia<br />

constantă dintre referenţi. Teoria susţine existenţa unui mo<strong>de</strong>l sau prototip central pe care<br />

copiii îl asociază cuvintelor; <strong>de</strong> obicei, acest mo<strong>de</strong>l se suprapune, i<strong>de</strong>ntificându-se cu<br />

referentul care a fost folosit cel mai <strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> adulţi în asociere cu un anumit cuvânt care l-a<br />

<strong>de</strong>numit în primă instanţă. Învăţarea prototipică permite extin<strong>de</strong>rea continuă şi adaptarea<br />

conceptelor. De exemplu, cuvântul „scaun” poate face referire, în primul rând, la taburetul<br />

folosit <strong>de</strong> copil, dar, gradual, <strong>de</strong>numirea va cuprin<strong>de</strong> şi scaunele <strong>de</strong> la masă sau balansoarul<br />

tatălui. Treptat, taburetul va căpăta un înţeles <strong>de</strong> sine stătător, fără a-l mai inclu<strong>de</strong> în<br />

categoria scaunelor <strong>de</strong>oarece nu <strong>de</strong>ţine suficiente caracteristici asemănătoare cu cele ale<br />

semnificaţiei principale <strong>de</strong> „scaun.” Iniţial, toate animalele blănoase, cu patru picioare erau<br />

<strong>de</strong>numite „căţeluş,” dar treptat câinii, pisicile, caii şi veveriţele <strong>de</strong>vin creaturi distincte, <strong>de</strong>şi<br />

toate poartă <strong>de</strong>numirea comună <strong>de</strong> „animal.”<br />

Noţiunea <strong>de</strong> prototipie se bazează pe i<strong>de</strong>ea lui Wittgenstein (1958) potrivit căreia toate<br />

sensurile lexicale nu reprezintă caracteristici invariabile, ci asemănări <strong>de</strong> familie sau un grup<br />

18


<strong>de</strong> proprietăţi. Referenţii care împart caracteristicile <strong>de</strong>finitorii ale unui concept sau obiect<br />

vor <strong>de</strong>veni prototipul respectivului concept sau obiect.<br />

Potrivit ipotezei caracteristicii semantice, copiii <strong>de</strong>zvoltă înţelesuri prin adăugarea <strong>de</strong><br />

proprietăţi; ei au tendinţa <strong>de</strong> a lărgi sfera cuvintelor la început pentru ca ulterior să fie<br />

corespunzătoare cu întrebuinţarea corectă. Pe <strong>de</strong> altă parte, ipoteza nucleului funcţional<br />

susţine existenţa unui nivel conceptual între referent şi cuvânt. Ambele ipoteze sunt<br />

asemănătoare, prin evaluarea înţelesului ca organizat în jurul proprietăţilor invariabile<br />

(Ingram, 1991). Spre <strong>de</strong>osebire <strong>de</strong> aceasta, învăţarea prototipică presupune <strong>de</strong>finirea <strong>de</strong> către<br />

un prototip central a înţelesului principal, alţi referenţi fiind evaluaţi în funcţie <strong>de</strong> prototip.<br />

Deşi nu există o limită bine <strong>de</strong>finită în <strong>de</strong>celarea mecanismelor cognitive, apare totuşi o<br />

abilitate <strong>de</strong>finitorie <strong>de</strong> clasificare a experienţelor, <strong>de</strong> recunoaştere a asemănărilor şi<br />

<strong>de</strong>osebirilor, <strong>de</strong> aplicare a noilor cunoştinţe situaţiilor familiare şi a regulilor familiare<br />

situaţiilor noi.<br />

7. Achiziţia proprietăţilor semantice selectate<br />

Această secţiune va formula câteva concluzii generale şi va analiza unele cuvinte<br />

achiziţionate în anii preşcolari; copiii au nevoie <strong>de</strong> câţiva ani pentru a stăpâni aceşti termeni.<br />

După cum am menţionat anterior, primele cuvinte sunt <strong>de</strong> obicei nominale, în special<br />

cele care fac referire la obiectele <strong>de</strong>s întâlnite în jur, sau la persoanele familiare. Cuvintele<br />

care exprimă acţiuni sunt comune, dar sunt mai puţin frecvente. Nominalele sunt<br />

achiziţionate, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, la început, în cadrul nivelului intermediar <strong>de</strong> generalizare. De<br />

exemplu, la nivelul intermediar, „câine” poate <strong>de</strong>veni termen abstract şi general şi poate fi<br />

înlocuit <strong>de</strong> „animal” sau poate <strong>de</strong>veni specific, fiind înlocuit <strong>de</strong> „câinele lup.” Nivelul<br />

intermediar este, probabil, generic şi folositor pentru clasificare, astfel încât ar părea<br />

rezonabil ca acesta să fie printre primele însuşite.<br />

Cuvintele englezeşti care încep cu wh- folosite în propoziţiile interogative sunt<br />

achiziţionate în ordinea aparentului caracter abstract. What, who şi where (ce, cine, un<strong>de</strong>) sunt<br />

primele achiziţionate; acestea privesc, în general, referenţi concreţi prezenţi în interacţiunea<br />

zilnică, în consecinţă nu au un grad <strong>de</strong> abstractizare atât <strong>de</strong> ridicat, precum how, why sau<br />

when (cum, <strong>de</strong> ce, când). „How” are un caracter mai concret, în sensul că se poate ve<strong>de</strong>a cum<br />

ceva se produce, dar why şi when sunt cele mai abstracte. Alţi factori care contribuie la<br />

achiziţia acestor termeni sunt funcţiile sintactice ale diferitelor forme verbale care conţin<br />

grupul wh, verbele din propoziţiile interogative care cuprind elemente din grupul wh şi<br />

utilizarea interogaţiilor wh în discurs (Bloom, Merkin şi Wootten, 1982). Alte studii<br />

anterioare arată că preşcolarii nu <strong>de</strong>ţin raţionament bidirecţional, fiind limitaţi din punct <strong>de</strong><br />

ve<strong>de</strong>re al ordinii (ex.: răspun<strong>de</strong>au mai corect la întrebări ca “Ce s-a întâmplat după x” faţă <strong>de</strong><br />

întrebări ca “Ce s-a întâmplat înainte <strong>de</strong> x”). Însă, French (1989) observă că preşcolarii<br />

răspund mai ferm la întrebările conţinând „după” <strong>de</strong>cât la întrebări <strong>de</strong>spre evenimente<br />

petrecute la care s-a făcut referire prin „când.” Acesta a mai observat că dacă se oferă un<br />

con<strong>text</strong> a<strong>de</strong>cvat, răspunsurile bidirecţionale sunt posibile şi relevante în circumstanţele<br />

respective.<br />

Aceste constatări dovedind influenţele complexităţii cognitive (sau gradul <strong>de</strong><br />

conceptualizare cognitivă) asupra însuşirii semnificatului, pot constitui o ipoteză plauzibilă<br />

în cazul achiziţiei cuvintelor <strong>de</strong> relaţie („mare,” „mic”), <strong>de</strong> schimbare („acesta,” „acela” referitor<br />

la distanţa dintre referent şi vorbitor) şi gra<strong>de</strong>le <strong>de</strong> ru<strong>de</strong>nie („unchi,” „văr”). Coley şi Gelman<br />

(1989) afirmă că utilizarea cuvântului „mare” <strong>de</strong>pin<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> factorii con<strong>text</strong>uali, şi <strong>de</strong><br />

inter<strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nţa factorilor semantici şi cognitivi. În studiul acestora, copiii mai mari se bazau<br />

pe înălţime în <strong>de</strong>terminarea obiectului cel mai mare; copiii <strong>de</strong> 3 ani se foloseau <strong>de</strong> înălţime în<br />

ceea ce priveşte oamenii, nu <strong>de</strong> lăţime / grosime, însă toţi subiecţii se ghidau după spaţiul în<br />

care se aflau pentru <strong>de</strong>terminarea obiectului celui mai mare.<br />

19


Însuşirea conceptelor şi reprezentările lingvistice respective ar trebui să fie paralele. De<br />

exemplu, copiii care folosesc corect expresia „în faţa” ar trebui supuşi testelor <strong>de</strong> nonverbalitate<br />

pentru conceptele <strong>de</strong> apropiere şi <strong>de</strong> caracteristici ale obiectelor, pentru a dovedi<br />

stăpânirea conceptelor şi caracteristicilor obiectelor înainte <strong>de</strong> folosirea acestei forme<br />

lingvistice; ei ar trebui să <strong>de</strong>monstreze însuşirea înţelesurilor formei „în faţa” în aceeaşi<br />

ordine ca în cazul achiziţiei <strong>de</strong> concepte relaţionate non-verbale. Astfel, ordinea <strong>de</strong>zvoltării<br />

cognitive conceptuale ar trebui să preceadă şi, respectiv, să se regăsească în formele<br />

lingvistice aferente. Retrospectiva formulată <strong>de</strong> Johnston (1986) arată că frecvenţa<br />

întrebuinţării şi complexitatea lingvistică şi semantică pot influenţa ordinea achiziţiei<br />

termenilor relaţionaţi. Urmând o i<strong>de</strong>e similară, E. Clark (1980) spune că „sus” este cel dintâi<br />

cuvânt folosit corect din perechea „sus-jos,” iar abia mai apoi „jos,” la fel şi în cazul perechii<br />

„faţă-spate.” Ea argumentează că aceste înţelesuri sunt achiziţionate în ordinea <strong>de</strong>terminată<br />

<strong>de</strong> strategiile non-lingvistice anterioare folosite <strong>de</strong> copii pentru aceiaşi termeni.<br />

8. Termenii <strong>de</strong> schimbare<br />

Termenii <strong>de</strong> schimbare sunt termeni ai căror referenţi se schimbă în funcţie <strong>de</strong> vorbitor,<br />

<strong>de</strong> un<strong>de</strong> şi când se adresează vorbitorul. Termenii reprezentând gra<strong>de</strong>le <strong>de</strong> ru<strong>de</strong>nie,<br />

pronumele, „acesta” sau „acela” provoacă schimbarea referentului în funcţie <strong>de</strong> vorbitor.<br />

Pronumele <strong>de</strong> persoana întâi şi a doua nu sunt însuşite <strong>de</strong>cât după anii preşcolari (Reich,<br />

1986). Referinţele anaforice, în care un pronume poate fi ataşat la mai mult <strong>de</strong>cât un singur<br />

substantiv, ca în propoziţia „Bogdan i-a spus lui Nae că îl cunoaşte pe Batman,” sunt<br />

stăpânite în timp, pe măsură ce copiii pot alterna între perspective (Smyth, 1995).<br />

Diferenţierea între „aici” şi „acolo” şi „acesta” şi „acela” se <strong>de</strong>finitivează abia în jurul vârstei<br />

<strong>de</strong> 7 ani. Astfel, termenii <strong>de</strong> schimbare şi <strong>de</strong> relaţie sunt achiziţionaţi <strong>de</strong>-a lungul unei întinse<br />

perioa<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> timp. Înţelegerea acestor termeni presupune localizarea obiectelor cu referire la<br />

sine sau la punctul <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re al vorbitorului.<br />

9. Termenii psihici<br />

Termenii psihici ca „a gândi,” „a cunoaşte,” încep a fi folosiţi între 2 şi 3 ani. Wellman<br />

şi Estes (1987) spun că acest tip <strong>de</strong> termeni au fost mai întâi utilizaţi drept funcţii ale<br />

conversaţiei, majoritatea fiind folosiţi pentru referinţe psihice distincte, explicite. Copiii au<br />

abilitatea <strong>de</strong> a face diferenţa între termeni <strong>de</strong> ordin psihic şi planul real. Până la 4 – 5 ani ei<br />

înţeleg întrebuinţarea termenilor <strong>de</strong> ordin psihic, precum „a cunoaşte,” „a gândi” pentru<br />

acţiuni sigure. Până la 4 ani, copiii fac distincţia între „a cunoaşte” şi „a gândi” şi „a ghici” şi<br />

percep termenul „a cunoaşte” ca o ju<strong>de</strong>cată sigură (Moore, Bryant şi Furrow 1989).<br />

Evoluţia semantică, în special a primelor cuvinte, este o sarcină complicată care<br />

<strong>de</strong>pin<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> maturitatea şi complexitatea cognitivă, <strong>de</strong> frecvenţa utilizării şi a oportunităţii.<br />

Copiii folosesc o gamă variată <strong>de</strong> strategii lingvistice şi non-lingvistice pentru achiziţionarea<br />

înţelesului. Proprietăţile semantice joacă, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, un rol important în enunţurile din<br />

perioa<strong>de</strong>le <strong>de</strong> tranziţie. Enunţurile formate din două cuvinte se construiesc, în mod frecvent,<br />

pe conexiunile semantice constituite înainte <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea şi formarea relaţiilor sintactice.<br />

Referinţe<br />

Backschei<strong>de</strong>r, A.G., Shatz, M., Gelman, S.A. (1993). Preschoolers’ ability to distinguish living kinds as<br />

a function of self-healing, in Child Development, 64, 1242–1257.<br />

Baldwin, D.A., Markman, E.M. (1989). Establishing word-object relations: A first step, in Child<br />

Development, 60, 381–398.<br />

Bloom, L., Merkin, W., Wootten, J. (1982). Wh-questions: Linguistic factors that contribute to the<br />

sequence of acquisition, in Child Development, 53, 1084-1092.<br />

Bowerman, M. (1978). Systematizing semantic knowledge: changes over time in the child’s<br />

20


organization of word meaning, in Child Development, 41, 977-987.<br />

Clark, E.V. (1973a). What’s in a word? On the child’s acquisition of word meanings, in Cognition, 161-<br />

182.<br />

Clark, E. (1973b). What’s in a word? On the child’s acquisition of semantics in his first language, in T.<br />

Moore (ed.), Cognitive <strong>de</strong>velopment and the acquisition of language, New York: Aca<strong>de</strong>mic Press, 267-<br />

278.<br />

Coley, J., Gelman, S. (1989). The effect of object orientation and object type on children’s interpretation<br />

of the word big, in Child Developmen, 60, 372-380.<br />

Diaz, R., Berk, L. (1992, pp 706-708). Private speech, Hillsdale: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.<br />

Frawley, W., Lantolf, J. (1986). Private speech and self-regulation: A commentary on Frauenglass and<br />

Diaz, in Developmental Psychology, 22.<br />

French, L. (1989). Young children’s responses to ”when” questions: Issues of directionalities, in Child<br />

Development, 60, 225-236.<br />

Furrow, D. (1984). Social and private speech at two years, in Child Development, 55, 355-362.<br />

Gopnik, A., Meltzoff, A.N. (1986). Words, plans, things, and locations: Interactions between semantic<br />

and cognitive <strong>de</strong>velopment in the one-word stage, in S.A. Kuczaj, M. Barrett (eds.), The <strong>de</strong>velopment<br />

of word meaning, New York: Springer-Verlag, pp390-401.<br />

Heibeck, T.H., Markman, E.M. (1987). Word learning in children: an examination of fast mapping, in<br />

Child Development, 58, 1021-1034.<br />

Ingram, D. (1991, pp 21-39). First language acquisition, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.<br />

Johnston, J. (1986). Cognitive prerequisites: The evi<strong>de</strong>nce from children learning English, in D. Slobin<br />

(ed.) Cross-linguistic study of language acquisition, Hillsdale: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, pp 257-<br />

277.<br />

Markman, R., Wachtel, C. (1988). Children’s use of mutual exclusivity to constrain the meaning of<br />

words, in Cognitive Psychology, 20, 121-157.<br />

Moore, C., Bryant, D., Furrow, D. (1989). Mental terms and the <strong>de</strong>velopment of certainty, in Child<br />

Development, 60, 167-171.<br />

Nelson, K. (1974). Concept, word and sentence: Interrelations in acquisitions and <strong>de</strong>velopment, in<br />

Psychological Review, 81, 267-285.<br />

Owens, S. (1992, pp 87-90). Language <strong>de</strong>velopment, New York: Macmillan.<br />

Piaget, J. (1980, pp 146-183). Les formes élémentaires <strong>de</strong> la dialectique, Paris: Gallimard.<br />

Reich, P. (1986, pp 56-71). Language <strong>de</strong>velopment, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall.<br />

Smolucha, L., Smolucha, F. (1992). Vygotskian theory: An emerging paradigm with implications for a<br />

synergistic psychology, in Creativity Research Journal, 5, 87–96.<br />

Smyth, J. (1995, pp 25-32). Aca<strong>de</strong>mic work: The changing labour process in higher education, Buckingham:<br />

Open University Press.<br />

Taylor, M., Gelman, S.A. (1989). Incorporating new words into the lexicon: Preliminary evi<strong>de</strong>nce for<br />

language hierarchies in two-year-old children, in Child Development, 60, 625-636.<br />

Veneziano, E. (1989). Les proto-conversations et les actes <strong>de</strong> langage : <strong>de</strong> l’alternance <strong>de</strong>s tours <strong>de</strong><br />

rôles aux significations partagées, in Revue Internationale <strong>de</strong> Psychologie sociale, T. 2 – 1, 23-36.<br />

Veneziano, E., Sinclair, H. & Berthoud, I. (1990). From one word to two words. In Journal of Child<br />

Language, 17, 633.<br />

Vygotsky, L. (1962, pp 55-70). Thought and language, Cambridge: MIT Press.<br />

Wellman, H.M., Estes, D. (1987). Children's early use of mental verbs and what they mean, in<br />

Discourse process, 10, 141-156.<br />

Werner, H., Kaplan, B. (1963). Symbol Formation in An Organismic-Developmental Approach to Language<br />

and the Expression of Thought, New York: Wiley, pp 21-25.<br />

Wittgenstein, J. (1958, pp 127-133). Philosophical Investigations, Oxford: Blackwell.<br />

Abstract<br />

In the con<strong>text</strong> of an ever-growing globalization and multiculturalism, the present paper wishes to<br />

analyze the methods that evince the acquisition of the native linguistic structures in the case of the<br />

Romanian and English preschoolers. We shall also try to <strong>de</strong>monstrate the link between cognitive<br />

21


<strong>de</strong>velopment and lexical complexity as well as the different strategies adopted by the preschoolers<br />

for the production of idiosyncratic words. We consi<strong>de</strong>r that it is precisely these primary methods<br />

that form a reliable basis for the later acquisition of other complex techniques of lexical<br />

<strong>de</strong>velopment.<br />

The semantic evolution, especially of the first words, is a complicated task that <strong>de</strong>pends on the<br />

cognitive complexity and maturity, on the frequency of use and con<strong>text</strong>. Children use a wi<strong>de</strong> range<br />

of linguistic and non-linguistic strategies in or<strong>de</strong>r to acquire meaning. The semantic properties are<br />

surely of great importance in the productions of this transition period. Two-word productions<br />

usually rely on the semantic links that have been formed before the <strong>de</strong>velopment and establishment<br />

of the syntactic relations.<br />

Résumé<br />

Dans le con<strong>text</strong>e d’une globalisation et d’un multiculturalisme en plein essor, ce papier se propose<br />

d’analyser les métho<strong>de</strong>s qui mettent en évi<strong>de</strong>nce l’acquisition <strong>de</strong>s structures linguistiques<br />

maternelles, dans le cas <strong>de</strong>s préscolaires roumains et anglais. Nous essayeront <strong>de</strong> démontrer la<br />

relation entre le développent cognitif et la complexité lexicale aussi comme les différentes stratégies<br />

adoptées par les préscolaires pour la production <strong>de</strong> quelques mots idiosyncratiques. Nous<br />

considérons que ces métho<strong>de</strong>s primaires jouent le rôle le plus important dans la formation d’une<br />

base pour l’acquisition, plus tard, <strong>de</strong>s autres techniques complexes du développement lexical.<br />

L’évolution sémantique, surtout, celle <strong>de</strong>s premiers mots est une tâche compliquée et dépendante<br />

<strong>de</strong> la complexité et maturité cognitive, <strong>de</strong> la fréquence <strong>de</strong> l’utilisation et du con<strong>text</strong>e. Les enfants<br />

utilisent une gamme large <strong>de</strong>s stratégies linguistiques et non-linguistiques pour acquérir du sens.<br />

Les propriétés sémantiques sont, certainement, très importantes surtout dans le cas <strong>de</strong>s<br />

productions <strong>de</strong> cette pério<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> transition. Les productions qui contiennent <strong>de</strong>ux mots, d’habitu<strong>de</strong>,<br />

se basent sur les relations sémantiques formées avant le développement et l’établissement <strong>de</strong>s<br />

relations syntactiques.<br />

Rezumat<br />

În con<strong>text</strong>ul unei globalizări şi al unui multiculturalism în continuu progress, lucrarea <strong>de</strong> faţă îşi<br />

propune să analizeze meto<strong>de</strong>le care evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază dobândirea structurilor lingvistice materne în<br />

cazul preşcolarilor români şi englezi. Vom încerca să <strong>de</strong>monstrăm şi legătura dintre <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea<br />

cognitivă şi complexitatea lexicală precum şi strategiile diferite adoptate <strong>de</strong> preşcolari pentru<br />

producerea unor cuvinte idiosincretice. Consi<strong>de</strong>răm că aceste meto<strong>de</strong> primare joacă rolul cel mai<br />

important în alcătuirea bazei pentru însuşirea, mai târziu, a celorlalte tehnici complexe ale<br />

<strong>de</strong>zvoltării lexicale. Evoluţia semantică, mai ales a primelor cuvinte, este o sarcină complicată şi<br />

care <strong>de</strong>pin<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> gradul <strong>de</strong> complexitate şi maturitate cognitivă, <strong>de</strong> frecvenţa utilizării şi <strong>de</strong> con<strong>text</strong>.<br />

Copiii folosesc o gamă largă <strong>de</strong> strategii lingvistice şi non-lingvistice pentru a-şi însuşi sensuri.<br />

Proprietăţile semantice sunt, <strong>de</strong>sigur, <strong>de</strong>osebit <strong>de</strong> importante în cazul producţiilor acestei perioa<strong>de</strong><br />

<strong>de</strong> tranziţie. Producţiile alcătuite din două cuvinte se bazează, <strong>de</strong> obicei, pe legăturile semantice<br />

formate înaintea <strong>de</strong>zvoltării şi consolidării relaţiilor sintactice.<br />

22


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 23-14<br />

A FEW CONSTRAINTS ON STUDENT QUESTIONING<br />

Anca Cehan<br />

23<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

In education, it is believed that much of the learning that takes place in the classroom is<br />

the result of the questions asked by the teachers, and that the better the teacher’s questions,<br />

the better the teacher’s teaching and the class learning. Aristotle, in Posterior Analitics, 89b<br />

(quoted by Dillon 1988: 7) says ‘These, then, are the kinds of questions we ask, and it is in the<br />

answers to these questions that our knowledge consists’. In other words, stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions<br />

prece<strong>de</strong> teacher questions in the learning process, and when stu<strong>de</strong>nts ask questions, learning<br />

follows in answer. According to Aristotle, questions arise in ignorance and perplexity, and<br />

the stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s un<strong>de</strong>rstanding is shaped by the relation s/he builds between question and<br />

answer as questions and answers conjoin to form knowledge and un<strong>de</strong>rstanding. Questions<br />

invite both a search for answers and other questions which follow from these answers. The<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s knowledge consists in the proposition that s/he forms of question and answer.<br />

Even if asking questions is believed to stimulate thoughtfulness and to encourage<br />

expression, education is in many ways, an activity similar to other fields where questioning<br />

is an exercise of power and control. James Dillon (1988) showed that in fields that encourage<br />

both talking and thinking, such as counselling and personal interviewing, practitioners avoid<br />

questions. In other fields, such as courtroom advocacy and public opinions surveying, where<br />

the goal is to limit thoughtfulness and to control the utterances of the people being<br />

questioned, the practitioners are highly skilled in asking questions. In other words, social<br />

superiors ask questions and subordinates answer them. This pattern where the questions of<br />

the social subordinates are rare or miss altogether is normal practice: physicians seldom<br />

answer questions from patients, lawyers are never questioned by witnesses, adults do not<br />

always answer questions from children. In the classroom, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt has years of experience<br />

with only the teachers asking questions and answers being given by self and classmates.<br />

Although stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions are often mentioned in theory, there is small room for them in<br />

classroom practice.<br />

Since Aristotle and before him, questioning by the stu<strong>de</strong>nts has been wi<strong>de</strong>ly regar<strong>de</strong>d<br />

by pedagogues as the starting point for effective education. In reality, questioning by<br />

teachers seems to actually be an exercise of power and control, as it is in other fields, where<br />

questions limit authentic discussion. In theory, stu<strong>de</strong>nt questioning and questions, together<br />

with the answers given to them, are encouraged and supported in the classroom, and no<br />

teachers would admit that they do not <strong>de</strong>sign lessons which encourage stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ questions<br />

and answers. However, although as Aristotle showed, learning follows in answer to a<br />

question, few stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions are asked aloud in the classroom.<br />

In normal classroom practice, classes in which no question is asked by stu<strong>de</strong>nts are not<br />

the exception but the rule. This is explained by the fact that stu<strong>de</strong>nts have few opportunities<br />

or reasons to ask questions, as they are busy giving answers to teacher questions. Classroom<br />

activities are organised in ways that do not motivate stu<strong>de</strong>nts to formulate questions, while<br />

the classroom setting gives stu<strong>de</strong>nts reasons not to ask many questions.


We have never walked into a classroom, irrespective of the level of English of the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nts, where the stu<strong>de</strong>nts asked a lot of questions 1. In fact, the ol<strong>de</strong>r the stu<strong>de</strong>nts get, the<br />

fewer questions they ask, although their level of proficiency in a foreign language gets<br />

higher. Apparently, children ask a lot of questions, but not in the classroom. In 26 classroom<br />

recordings 2, with approximately 600 pupils participating, only one genuine stu<strong>de</strong>nt<br />

information question could be heard (“What’s the English for roabă?”), while the questions<br />

from the teachers account for over 60% of the teacher’s talking time. Such features are not<br />

uncommon for foreign language classroom practice or for classroom practice in general.<br />

Even if one could argue that most of class recordings mentioned were done in primary and<br />

lower secondary schools (18), and that most of these classes were taught in countrysi<strong>de</strong><br />

schools (14), still we have to admit that this is the rule and not the exception. In fact, the<br />

teacher’s asking a lot of questions does not by any means guarantee the stimulation of the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ interaction by the latter asking questions. Actually, certain types of teacher<br />

questions may discourage interactive learning (Kinsella 1991, quoted by Brown, D.H. 2001):<br />

display questions, obvious questions that may insult the stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ intelligence, vague or<br />

abstract ones, questions that are too wordy or too complex, rhetorical and random questions<br />

(i.e., questions that do not fall into a well-planned sequence).<br />

Although not represented in the corpus mentioned, besi<strong>de</strong>s information, knowledge<br />

and comprehension questions, stu<strong>de</strong>nts use other interrogative strategies, such as<br />

application, inference, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and procedural questions and<br />

<strong>de</strong>vices (Dillon, 1988). Procedural questions (e.g.: Is this going to be on the test?) are the most<br />

strategic, as they are used effectively by stu<strong>de</strong>nts to solve their problems, to execute routines<br />

and to negotiate over obligations. Conversational questions can also be heard formulated in<br />

Romanian (e.g. What? I didn’t hear, Poftim?). Self-answered and rhetorical questions are not<br />

uncommon during stu<strong>de</strong>nt project presentations, used to express some feeling or to make<br />

some point. They have the role of statements, and a common response to them is a remark<br />

such as ‘Good point’ or ‘Yeah, but…’ These other interrogative strategies are completely absent<br />

in the corpus mentioned.<br />

One can argue that in the classroom, many of the questions that the stu<strong>de</strong>nts formulate<br />

and keep in their minds, remaining unasked, are answered by something said by the teacher<br />

or another stu<strong>de</strong>nt later on, as the discussion proceeds. In the same way, an unasked<br />

question that comes to a stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s mind may be asked in the next part of the lesson.<br />

However, in classroom interaction, in the talk between teacher and stu<strong>de</strong>nts, it is sensible<br />

that stu<strong>de</strong>nts ask questions: the non-asking <strong>de</strong>nies the very purpose of interacting. To refrain<br />

from asking is not to join in the discussion. Questions are due to arise and be shared, and it is<br />

a failing for a participant in the interaction not to speak his / her mind on the current issue,<br />

by withholding the questions instead of contributing them. On the other hand, it is true that<br />

some people learn just by listening and following along, but in a discussion, this <strong>de</strong>fines nonparticipation,<br />

and is just an alibi. Some unspoken questions may be answered, others are not;<br />

in either case the answering is acci<strong>de</strong>ntal. This thwarts the essence of the pedagogical<br />

activity, whose aim is to teach and to make the stu<strong>de</strong>nt learn that which is taught. The nonasking<br />

impairs the activity of teaching, turning it into something else.<br />

Paradoxically, classroom teaching involves planned behaviour, adjusted in the process<br />

of enacting it. When planning a lesson, the teacher needs to anticipate the questions in the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ minds. If s/he is unable to do so, the teacher can neither plan nor act in accordance.<br />

In this process the teacher cannot know whose questions will be answered and whose will<br />

not, or which ones. However, when stu<strong>de</strong>nts do not ask questions, both teaching and<br />

learning suffer, and classroom interaction is affected.<br />

However, it is normal and un<strong>de</strong>rstandable for the stu<strong>de</strong>nts not to ask questions in<br />

class. A stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question may be an exceptional event as there are many powerful factors<br />

accounting for the rarity of stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions. Although all these factors operate in the<br />

24


classroom, they do not necessarily originate in the classroom; nor are they located in either<br />

the stu<strong>de</strong>nt or the teacher. They operate systematically, and have to do with the structures<br />

and conditions of society and schooling, with rules of socialisation in schools and with<br />

situational authority rules. They inclu<strong>de</strong> the whole complex of ways that other classrooms<br />

use with the same stu<strong>de</strong>nts, the curriculum itself, the nature of the subject-matter and the<br />

character of materials and <strong>text</strong>books.<br />

Of all these factors, we will examine only the constraints of classroom discourse on<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions, showing that stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions are almost exclu<strong>de</strong>d by the cycles of<br />

interaction, rules, and norms of classroom discourse.<br />

1. The IRF cycle<br />

Typical classroom interaction leaves little room for the stu<strong>de</strong>nts to ask questions as<br />

they find it hard to fit a question into the ongoing IRF cycle. When a stu<strong>de</strong>nt bids for a<br />

question, the teacher has to think how to stop everything in or<strong>de</strong>r to let the stu<strong>de</strong>nt start in.<br />

However, most of the time the teacher has no reason to stop the ongoing cycle, since no one<br />

seems to have a question when they are all engaged in the ongoing interaction. The teacher<br />

and stu<strong>de</strong>nts are talking back and forth, and the cycle of talk is closed to everything but<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ answers. The cycle typically begins with (a) a teacher’s question, then turns to (b) a<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s answer, and then to (c) the teacher’s evaluation of answer plus (a) next question.<br />

Stu<strong>de</strong>nts can do nothing but answer in this cycle, and there is no turn at talk for them.<br />

However, when a stu<strong>de</strong>nt asks a question, the cycle turns quite differently. The cycle<br />

does not begin with a stu<strong>de</strong>nt question, as in his subordinate position, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt must first<br />

gain permission to ask a question. To do that, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt must first gain the floor. Therefore,<br />

before the stu<strong>de</strong>nt can formulate a question, two exchanges are required:<br />

1. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s bid for the floor<br />

Teacher’s nomination of stu<strong>de</strong>nt<br />

2. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s request to ask a question<br />

Teacher’s permission to stu<strong>de</strong>nt<br />

These preliminary exchanges are not easy to get going from the position of the stu<strong>de</strong>nt.<br />

This is because when a stu<strong>de</strong>nt bids for the floor, the teacher’s assumption is that s/he wants<br />

to give an answer. On the other hand, when the stu<strong>de</strong>nt does get the floor, s/he is in the<br />

awkward position of having to substitute an answer with a question at that juncture, and<br />

therefore switch things around. However, the preliminary exchanges are usually smoothly<br />

executed:<br />

1. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s bid<br />

Teacher’s nomination: Yes, Anda.<br />

2. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question: What is the English for ‘roabă’?<br />

The stu<strong>de</strong>nt may be waving a hand for bidding and the teacher may nod or say the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s name. Permission to ask might be asked for and granted parenthetically instead of<br />

in actual words. Even so, everyone knows that permission is involved. In our example, the<br />

question was prece<strong>de</strong>d by a non-verbal bid from the stu<strong>de</strong>nt. Although we haven’t found<br />

any example in our limited corpus, such exchanges may also involve the stu<strong>de</strong>nt specifically<br />

asking for permission to ask a question, using formulas like Can I ask (you) a question?, I want<br />

to ask a question, or even Romanian formulas to the same effect. The teacher’s accord can also<br />

be verbal or non-verbal: OK, Yes, Go ahead, What is it? or a simple nod.<br />

While after a teacher question, the next move is always a stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s answer, after a<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question, the next move always belongs to the teacher. This move is more<br />

unpredictable: it can be either a reply or a non-reply to the question. In the reply, the teacher<br />

25


may answer the question, but other replies may involve a counter-question, a redirection, a<br />

reformulation, or even a disparaging of the question or of the stu<strong>de</strong>nt who asked the<br />

question. This shows why asking a question may sometimes be a <strong>de</strong>motivating move for the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt.<br />

After a stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s answer, the next move is teacher’s feedback. This is most often, the<br />

evaluation of the stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s answer, which is then followed by the next question. After a<br />

teacher’s answer to a stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question, the next move always belongs to the teacher.<br />

Optionally, the teacher may allocate this turn to the stu<strong>de</strong>nt who asked the question, but if<br />

the stu<strong>de</strong>nt takes it, s/he can only acknowledge the answer and never evaluates it. More<br />

typically, the teacher keeps the floor and continues with the next move, which is another<br />

teacher’s question, and the cycle repeats itself: teacher initiates / asks – stu<strong>de</strong>nt answers –<br />

teacher provi<strong>de</strong>s feedback / evaluation. By contrast, the cycle for a stu<strong>de</strong>nt question turns<br />

uncertainly at every turn:<br />

1. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s bid<br />

T’s nomination<br />

2. (Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s request to ask question)<br />

T’s permission)<br />

3. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question<br />

4. Teacher’s move<br />

a. reply<br />

b. non-reply<br />

5a. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s acknowledgement (optional)<br />

5b. Teacher’s move (question)<br />

2. IRF and politeness rules<br />

General rules of politeness, learnt both at home and in the years of schooling, also<br />

govern talk in the classroom. These rules do not encourage stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions, either. The<br />

cycle involving a stu<strong>de</strong>nt question takes remarkable tact and <strong>de</strong>licacy to find a suitable<br />

moment to begin, although no teacher would ever institute a rule against the stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s<br />

questions. A general politeness rule says ‘one speaker at a time’, meaning that a stu<strong>de</strong>nt may<br />

not interrupt a speaker, whether the teacher or another stu<strong>de</strong>nt, with a question. On the<br />

other hand, a superordinate school rule holds that the teacher can talk at any time and that<br />

the teacher can interrupt the stu<strong>de</strong>nt, typically with a question. In other words, the teacher<br />

always has the floor, and the next turn at talk, and a stu<strong>de</strong>nt cannot take it to ask a question.<br />

In<strong>de</strong>ed, the next turn at talk always belongs to the teacher, even when a stu<strong>de</strong>nt is speaking,<br />

as it is the teacher who allocates the turn to a stu<strong>de</strong>nt, and can take it back at any time.<br />

Unlike other interactions where speakers negotiate turns and topics, in the classroom<br />

interaction, the turns are allocated by the teacher, who <strong>de</strong>signates both the next speaker and<br />

the topic. A consequence of this is that a stu<strong>de</strong>nt cannot, as a rule, interrupt with a question<br />

when the turn is already taken, and the speaker and topic are <strong>de</strong>signated. As the cycle<br />

follows its course, it is a real feat for a stu<strong>de</strong>nt to break it and ask a question. The corollary to<br />

these rules is that a stu<strong>de</strong>nt does not have a right to speak unless s/he is <strong>de</strong>signated to do so<br />

by the teacher, and then s/he has the obligation to address the teacher and the topic<br />

specified. In other words, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt is supposed to answer the teacher’s question and then<br />

stop and wait for the teacher’s evaluation of the answer followed by the next question.<br />

To conclu<strong>de</strong>, in or<strong>de</strong>r for the stu<strong>de</strong>nt to ask a question, s/he must locate an appropriate<br />

juncture, make a bid to talk, gain the floor, obtain permission to ask the question, and, very<br />

often, change the topic. This kind of move, <strong>de</strong>termines a change in classroom dynamics,<br />

which reverses the usual one: from passivity, reactivity, expectancy and <strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nce to<br />

26


initiative, in<strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nce, proactive attitu<strong>de</strong>, energetic action, and even aggression. All these<br />

are contrary to habit and violate the norms of classroom behaviour.<br />

3. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt behaviour norms<br />

Although not written, the norms of class behaviour are also very powerful. These<br />

norms do not support the stu<strong>de</strong>nt in the act of asking either, as displaying ignorance in<br />

school is against the norms. Even when the stu<strong>de</strong>nt has followed all the rules of talk and<br />

entered the cycle of interaction in the right way, s/he must ask the right question at the right<br />

time. If the stu<strong>de</strong>nt asks a question too soon or too late, the teacher’s reaction will be We’ll get<br />

to that later or We have already <strong>de</strong>alt with that. Moreover, the question should be about<br />

something that nearly everyone does not know. Otherwise, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt who asks the<br />

question will lose face when sighs or comments of What a dumb question! will be heard. One<br />

strategy to avoid this, used by some more advanced stu<strong>de</strong>nts is to <strong>de</strong>precate self in the<br />

asking, prefacing the question by I was just won<strong>de</strong>ring or This may be kind of dumb,<br />

but…Moreover, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt must take care not to ask one question too many or two<br />

questions in a row.<br />

A stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question is expected to meet with negative reactions on the part of both<br />

classmates and teacher. A negative reaction may consist in a non-reply or a reprimand from<br />

the teacher and / or <strong>de</strong>preciation from classmates. Perplexity, incomprehension and the need<br />

for asking are disapproved, especially when the topic at hand seems so simple to everyone<br />

else and only the questioner still does not un<strong>de</strong>rstand. Moreover, in many classes, it is<br />

against the group rules to display interest in the subject-matter or the teacher.<br />

To conclu<strong>de</strong>, powerful social forces insi<strong>de</strong> and outsi<strong>de</strong> the classroom make difficult the<br />

asking of questions by the stu<strong>de</strong>nts. These forces involve peers, teacher, status, language<br />

proficiency, the IRF cycle and norms of discourse, class dynamics and years of school<br />

experience. Stu<strong>de</strong>nts have every reason but one not to ask the questions that occur to them in<br />

class. This one reason is <strong>de</strong>sire of knowledge and un<strong>de</strong>rstanding.<br />

Notes<br />

1. We do not refer here to the practice of foreign language interrogative structures.<br />

2. The recordings were done in the lessons taught in February and March 2008 by the participants in<br />

the MA in ELT Programme at the English Department, “Alexandru Ioan Cuza” University of Iaşi.<br />

References<br />

Brown, D. H. (2001). Teaching by Principles: An Interactive Approach of Language Pedagogy, Addison<br />

Wesley Longman Inc.<br />

Clark, M. (1972). Perplexity and knowledge: An inquiry into the structures of questioning, The Hague:<br />

Mouton.<br />

Dillon, J.T. (1988). Questioning and Teaching. A Manual of Practice, New York: Teachers College Press.<br />

Malamah-Thomas, A. (1988) Classroom Interaction, Oxford: Oxford University Press.<br />

Abstract<br />

This paper presents the constraints which complicate and restrict the questions the learners<br />

formulate during the foreign language class. These concern the other participants in interaction,<br />

the status of the one who risks asking one question, the structure of the cycle initiation – response<br />

– feedback, the dynamics of the class as well as the general norms of politeness and those of school<br />

conduct.<br />

27


Résumé<br />

L’article présente les contraintes qui ren<strong>de</strong>nt difficile et qui limitent la formulation <strong>de</strong>s questions<br />

par les élèves pendant une leçon. Celles-ci se réfèrent aux autres participants à l’interaction, au<br />

statut <strong>de</strong> celui qui risque une question, à la structure du cycle Initiation–Réponse–Feedback, à la<br />

dynamique <strong>de</strong> la classe aussi comme aux normes générales <strong>de</strong> politesse et <strong>de</strong> conduite scolaire.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Lucrarea prezintă constrângerile care îngreunează şi limitează formularea întrebărilor <strong>de</strong> către<br />

elevi în timpul lecţiei. Aceste constrângeri se referă la ceilalţi participanţi la interacţiune, la<br />

statutul acelui participant care riscă şi formulează o întrebare, la structura ciclului Iniţiere–<br />

Răspuns–Feedback, la dinamica lecţiei precum şi la normele generale <strong>de</strong> politeţe şi <strong>de</strong> conduită<br />

şcolară.<br />

28


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 29-34<br />

IRONIE ET ALLEGORIE POLITIQUE<br />

DANS L’ŒUVRE DE<br />

GRIGORE ALEXANDRESCU<br />

Ana-Elena Costandache<br />

29<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Située à la jonction avec <strong>de</strong>s éléments <strong>de</strong> l’Ouest, d’une part, et <strong>de</strong>s éléments <strong>de</strong>s<br />

Balkans, d’autre part, à une époque où il y avait <strong>de</strong> nombreuses sources d’inspiration, la<br />

littérature roumaine a subi <strong>de</strong>s changements <strong>de</strong>s formes en fonction <strong>de</strong>s événements<br />

politiques <strong>de</strong> la première moitié du XIX e siècle (la Révolution, l’Union), mais aussi en<br />

fonction <strong>de</strong>s affinités <strong>de</strong>s auteurs pour les exemples culturels déjà renommés. Dans ce<br />

con<strong>text</strong>e, ce qui a attiré l’attention a été l’abondance <strong>de</strong>s genres et leur influence, alors que les<br />

troubles sociaux et politiques <strong>de</strong> l’époque ont fait une marque décisive sur les écrits, en<br />

dévoilant “<strong>de</strong>s changements imprévus dans la conscience <strong>de</strong>s écrivains”. 1<br />

Vrai pionnier du genre, confronté avec les difficultés spécifiques aux débuts littéraires,<br />

surtout celles qui tenaient à la modalité d’expression poétique du XIX e siècle, Grigore<br />

Alexandrescu aspirait, dès le commencement <strong>de</strong> son écriture, “à enrichir la langue<br />

roumaine”. En valorisant la simplicité et la sobriété, en alliant le classicisme et le<br />

romantisme, l’auteur a été en mesure <strong>de</strong> se différencier <strong>de</strong>s autres auteurs romantiques<br />

Roumains <strong>de</strong> l’époque, mais aussi <strong>de</strong>s romantiques occi<strong>de</strong>ntaux.<br />

Lucia Simona Dinescu, suite à ses étu<strong>de</strong>s culturelles expliquées dans <strong>de</strong>s discours<br />

prononcés sur la mo<strong>de</strong>rnité, a conclu qu’ “en Roumanie, la culture s’est formée à la suite <strong>de</strong><br />

différentes influences [...] et a servi à la politique”. 2 Pourtant, les interdictions brutales et les<br />

thèmes imposés ont été dépassés <strong>de</strong> manière diplomatique:<br />

“En 1840, les principautés étaient trop intégrés dans le domaine intellectuel ou<br />

économique <strong>de</strong> l’Europe, et leur développement comprenait trop d’éléments <strong>de</strong> rupture<br />

avec l’ordre féodal pour qu’une politique rétrogra<strong>de</strong>, étroite et hostile à l’intérêt national<br />

ne puisse avoir <strong>de</strong>s chances <strong>de</strong> réussite”. 3<br />

Le discours politique <strong>de</strong> l’époque en question (celle <strong>de</strong> ’48) a été particulièrement<br />

connu dans la vie culturelle, dans les œuvres littéraires, par l’intermédiaire <strong>de</strong> la promotion<br />

<strong>de</strong>s idéologies libérales et révolutionnaires. Les réactions <strong>de</strong>s groupes d’intellectuels à tout ce<br />

qui représentait la vie politique n’ont pas retardé, que ce soit au niveau <strong>de</strong>s thèmes et <strong>de</strong>s<br />

raisons littéraires, ou au niveau <strong>de</strong>s espèces visées. Les variantes étaient multiples: certaines<br />

satirisaient, comme dans le cas d’Ion Ghica “les mœurs <strong>de</strong> la société et <strong>de</strong>s pratiques<br />

rétrogra<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> l’époque, [...] la phraséologie et la démagogie politique, les arrangements en<br />

coulisses, le carriérisme, le faux démocratisme et la corruption <strong>de</strong>s médias” 4, tandis que<br />

d’autres discours proposaient aux lecteurs un langage assez violent. Parmi les écrivains qui<br />

ont agi d’une manière où d’autre, Alexandrescu s’est fait remarquer, en proposant <strong>de</strong>s types<br />

<strong>de</strong> politiques, mais surtout en créant <strong>de</strong>s “types d’intrigue d’où sa propre imagination<br />

pourrait tirer les éléments nécessaires à la création d’une histoire, d’un conte...” 5


En participant à la vie politique <strong>de</strong> l’époque, mais sans une implication particulière<br />

dans les mouvements révolutionnaires <strong>de</strong> 1848, Alexandrescu s’est révélé être un simple<br />

observateur politique et surtout morale. “Esprit Gaulois” 6, (surnom attribué par N.<br />

Manolescu), Alexandrescu a fait partie <strong>de</strong> la génération qui<br />

“a créé <strong>de</strong>ux <strong>de</strong>s paradigmes durables <strong>de</strong> la poésie roumaine, celui dérivé du latin (sous<br />

les influences italienne et française, lamartinisme, alexandrin iambique, élégiaque,<br />

méditation, mélancolie, etc.) et celui du folklore autochtone (mythe national et passé<br />

historique, militantisme, etc.), sans réduire la valeur <strong>de</strong> la langue littéraire, restée jusqu’à<br />

présent sous la même forme, mais en introduisant <strong>de</strong>s espèces et <strong>de</strong>s genres mo<strong>de</strong>rnes”. 7<br />

Grigore Alexandrescu n’a pas excellé en reliant les rimes, mais les espèces littéraires<br />

qu’il a promues à cette époque-là étaient différentes: l’élégie (Minuit, Adieux. A Târgovişte),<br />

la méditation (L’ombre <strong>de</strong> Mircea. A Cozia), la satire (Satire. A mon esprit), la fable (La<br />

hache et la forêt, Le chien et le chiot, La justice du lion). L’attention du lecteur est attirée<br />

par les œuvres qui versifient l’esprit politique <strong>de</strong> l’époque, en particulier la fable et la satire<br />

et, par conséquent, les œuvres <strong>de</strong> l’écrivain roumain “sont variées et très précieuses. Sa<br />

composition est réussie et tout à fait claire. Pourtant, la versification n’est pas parfaite”. 8<br />

Que ce soit <strong>de</strong> la satire ou <strong>de</strong> la fable comme espèces prises par connexion française, ou<br />

que ce soit <strong>de</strong>s productions originales, Alexandrescu a été en mesure d’y ajouter <strong>de</strong>s notes<br />

personnelles: “Dans ces productions didactiques, le poète démontre une constante affinité<br />

pour le classicisme plutôt que pour le romantisme français.” 9 Parmi les modèles que la<br />

littérature occi<strong>de</strong>ntale a proposés comme une catégorie d’espèces littéraires à part et<br />

auxquelles Alexandrescu a accordé une attention particulière s’inscrivent les espèces<br />

cultivées par La Fontaine. En effet, le fabuliste roumain doit beaucoup au grand poète<br />

français par certains éléments <strong>de</strong> technique artistique. Les faits politiques <strong>de</strong> l’époque ont<br />

“mis en forme” sa poésie et la fable d’Alexandrescu est tributaire à la fable <strong>de</strong> La Fontaine,<br />

quant au niveau <strong>de</strong>s données techniques du genre. Le poète, lui-même, avait dévoilé les<br />

significations politiques et satiriques, les physionomies et les moralités, par l’intermédiaire<br />

<strong>de</strong> certaines <strong>de</strong> ses œuvres, ce qui lui avait donné l’occasion d’une longue méditation. Mais<br />

l’allusion satirique est justement une caractéristique du genre, dont le développement est<br />

soumis à <strong>de</strong>s régimes stricts <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>spotisme et d’interdiction <strong>de</strong> la liberté d’expression. Ainsi,<br />

La Fontaine est actuel par ses fables en présentant, <strong>de</strong> façon dramatique, les réalités <strong>de</strong> sa<br />

nation. Son œuvre constitue la “source” <strong>de</strong>s situations politiques et sociales locales,<br />

caractéristiques aux réalités <strong>de</strong> Roumanie à cette époque-là: “Les fables sont aussi célèbres<br />

dans notre littérature que celles <strong>de</strong> La Fontaine dans la littérature française ou celles <strong>de</strong><br />

Krîlov dans la littérature russe”. 10<br />

L’ironie d’Alexandrescu est celle d’un esprit qui se moque <strong>de</strong> tout et <strong>de</strong> tous dans <strong>de</strong>s<br />

épîtres et <strong>de</strong>s satires (dans L’Union <strong>de</strong>s principautés): “Dans leurs tombeaux, Bogdan et<br />

Mircea ont convenu / D’unir les Roumains…” 11 et sa satire est, par excellence, politique.<br />

D’ailleurs, la fable était, à cette époque-là, un moyen <strong>de</strong> contourner la censure et l’ironie<br />

d’Alexandrescu s’avérait être insensible à l’art <strong>de</strong>s contemporains. Sa prédilection pour la<br />

fiction est expliquée par les nombreuses possibilités <strong>de</strong> satiriser les événements politiques.<br />

Sous le masque <strong>de</strong> la versification, on pourrait tout dévoiler et, par l’humour, l’auteur<br />

affirme ce qu’il semble nier - dans L’épître à M. Majeur Voinescu II. 12 Silvian Iosifescu<br />

appréciait que “le scepticisme adopté dans L’épître D.V.II était en accord avec son style<br />

ironique. Le poète défend, <strong>de</strong>rrière un sourire, l’innocence <strong>de</strong> ses fables”. 13 Par ailleurs, dans<br />

la correspondance, Alexandrescu préfère dissimuler discrètement l’ironie, le dégoût et<br />

l’amertume qui lui a inspiré le déni, tout aussi que les concessions morales <strong>de</strong> l’époque. Dans<br />

son œuvre, l’ironie est une sorte <strong>de</strong> déguisement <strong>de</strong> la fable et la “la censure la plus sage”,<br />

rappelée dans L’Epître à M. Voinescu 14 suggère une telle qualification.<br />

30


En plus <strong>de</strong> la mission d’éduquer et <strong>de</strong> former, la fable a le rôle <strong>de</strong> divertir. Le conflit<br />

présenté a un résultat immédiat, ce qui fait que la fable soit presqu’une comédie. Chez<br />

Alexandrescu, l’histoire est spécifique aux premiers écrits désignés comme <strong>de</strong>s fables,<br />

prenant la forme d’une croquis <strong>de</strong> mœurs et <strong>de</strong> caractères et en culminant dans <strong>de</strong>s écrits<br />

bien rédigés tels que Le chien et le chiot ou Le bœuf et le veau: “Quoi! Nous, tes frères! / Je<br />

vais te donner un coup…” 15 Le veau, arrivé chez son oncle, “un bœuf comme tous les<br />

autres”, mais qui occupait une bonne place «aidé par le <strong>de</strong>stin», reste surpris qu’un parent a<br />

changé ses habitu<strong>de</strong>s. “Quoi! Il dort, maintenant? / […] il a changé, le monsieur…, non pas<br />

comme vous le savez…” 16<br />

Le “spectacle” <strong>de</strong> la fable est mis en scène avec un excellent sens <strong>de</strong> la morale et <strong>de</strong>s<br />

situations, car l’auteur est bien conscient <strong>de</strong> la “manipulation” par sa langue.<br />

Habituellement, ses écrits commencent par une mise en question directe du sujet, en attirant<br />

l’attention par la formule <strong>de</strong> début, tout comme dans les contes <strong>de</strong> fées: “Dans les temps<br />

anciens, toutes les bêtes, / Dégoûtées du Roi lion...” (L’éléphant) ou comme une réflexion:<br />

“je ne vois plus <strong>de</strong> miracles à nos jours”. (La hache et la forêt). Parfois, Alexandrescu utilise<br />

le ton du narrateur, comme un conseiller d’enfants: “Le loup, <strong>de</strong> toute la bêtise / Gouvernait<br />

le pays”. (Le chien pourchassé).<br />

Les animaux personnages mettent en évi<strong>de</strong>nce les aspects du comportement humain,<br />

en particulier la conduite négative. L’éléphant - “tête dure”, chef du royaume, désigne le<br />

loup comme “ministre <strong>de</strong>s moutons”. Quand les autres animaux viennent se plaindre chez le<br />

maître que ”les moutons sont mala<strong>de</strong>s“ et que ”les agneaux sont abattus“, le roi écoute son<br />

ministre qui répond sincèrement qu’il ne prend qu’ [...] ”une peau <strong>de</strong> mouton, comme<br />

d’habitu<strong>de</strong>“. 17 (L’éléphant)<br />

Dans une autre fable, Le loup moraliste, le roi loup convoque «une réunion publique»,<br />

car il a entendu que ”les responsables poilus“ font rages et que ”la loi est faite à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s<br />

griffes“, puis il commence à prêcher sur la modération et les bonnes mœurs, mais portant<br />

lui-même ”une veste <strong>de</strong> mouton écorché.“ Ainsi, le loup est <strong>de</strong>mandé par un autre, plus<br />

vieux, qui ”faisait l’éloge du travail“, d’où il avait acheté ”son manteau en peau <strong>de</strong> mouton»,<br />

occasion pour l’auteur <strong>de</strong> conclure: ”Quand votre manteau est en peau <strong>de</strong> mouton, /<br />

Assurez-vous ensuite que les juges tirent les boutons. “ 18<br />

La démagogie est un autre objectif <strong>de</strong>s fables. Le renard dans Le renard libéral parle<br />

sur le manque <strong>de</strong> raison, mais il est ”mis au service au département <strong>de</strong>s volailles“ et il cesse<br />

alors toute critique. Par ailleurs, la morale <strong>de</strong> la fable d’Alexandrescu concernait directement<br />

ses contemporains: ”Je sais que beaucoup <strong>de</strong> libéraux parlent en vain / Mais d’un os ils se<br />

noient à la fin.“ 19<br />

La fable La hache et la forêt révèle, <strong>de</strong> manière allégorique, les circonstances<br />

répréhensibles <strong>de</strong> l’époque. Les actes patriotiques, tels que ceux liés à la Révolution <strong>de</strong> 1848<br />

et le syndicat ont été sapés non seulement par les étrangers, mais aussi par <strong>de</strong>s ”citoyens<br />

d’entre nous, <strong>de</strong>venus <strong>de</strong>s traîtres“. 20<br />

Un thème <strong>de</strong> prédilection <strong>de</strong> Gr. Alexandrescu est représenté par l’arrogance. Le bœuf<br />

<strong>de</strong> la fable Le bœuf et le veau ne reconnaît plus son neveu, le veau arrivé pour <strong>de</strong>man<strong>de</strong>r<br />

”un peu <strong>de</strong> foin“, en déclarant qu’il n’a pas <strong>de</strong> tels parents. Alors, il ordonne à ses sujets <strong>de</strong><br />

”l’éloigner.“ 21<br />

L’égalité entre les adultes <strong>de</strong> la court est tenue par le grand chien Samson, qui est prêt<br />

d’appliquer la peine la plus sévère au chiot Samurache; ce <strong>de</strong>rnier avait osé lui s’adresser par<br />

l’appellation ”frère“ : ”Quoi ! Nous, tes frères! / Je vais te donner un coup…“ 22 (Le chien et<br />

le chiot)<br />

Le caractère dominant <strong>de</strong>s fables d’Alexandrescu est représenté par le comique <strong>de</strong><br />

caractère et <strong>de</strong> situation. Les personnages sont bien individualisés et l’action est bien située.<br />

L’individualisation est cependant limitée par les espèces spécifiques en jeu, allégoriques. Les<br />

personnages font partie du mon<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s animaux auxquels le folklore et le discours normal,<br />

31


populaire, offrent certains traits (le lion symbolise la force, le renard - la ruse, l’âne et le bœuf<br />

- la bêtise). Pourtant, il y a dans les fables d’Alexandrescu une telle individualisation et un<br />

langage comique qui placent les personnages dans une époque différente : les conseillers du<br />

roi lui s’adressent <strong>de</strong> manière fausse élégante, ”Vous, monsieur le bœuf“ et, ce <strong>de</strong>rnier, ”au<br />

cours du Carême“ apprend que son neveu est venu lui rendre visite: il s’agit du fils <strong>de</strong> Mme<br />

la Vache.<br />

Le changement <strong>de</strong> registre langagier se réalise dans certaines fables qui proposent<br />

comme thème la presse officielle <strong>de</strong> l’époque. Ce thème se retrouve comme symbole dans Le<br />

peintre et le portrait: ”Lorsque le beau <strong>de</strong>vient laid, le peintre prend un bon salaire: / T’es<br />

noir, il te fait blanc; t’es faible, il te fera grossir…“ 23<br />

Une place différente occupe Satire. A mon esprit où le commentaire satirique refait<br />

fidèlement l’image <strong>de</strong>s salons <strong>de</strong> 1840. Le raffinement du mon<strong>de</strong> occi<strong>de</strong>ntal – concrétisé en<br />

jeu <strong>de</strong> cartes, flirt, danse, mo<strong>de</strong> – est refusé: les dames jouent au whist, conscientes que ”la<br />

vie passe“. Un jeune homme galant et élégant porte <strong>de</strong>s vêtements cousus à Paris. Le<br />

bavardage et le snobisme sont propres aux salons; les <strong>de</strong>moiselles prétentieuses ne parlent à<br />

personne pendant toute une semaine lorsqu’elles ont l’occasion et l’honneur d’être<br />

remarquées par un jeune homme ”<strong>de</strong> bonne famille“. Dans ce con<strong>text</strong>e, la critique <strong>de</strong> l’auteur<br />

prend la forme <strong>de</strong>s reproches faits d’une manière humoristique. Ainsi, le poète fait preuve<br />

d’une bonne conduite en société: au whist (ou ”vist“), il gagne toujours, tandis qu’à la danse<br />

il séduit toutes les dames. Au contraire, il ne peut pas ignorer les situations ridicules partout<br />

où il y en a le cas. 24 Ainsi, la satire <strong>de</strong>vient une série <strong>de</strong> scènes: les cartes à jouer, le jeune<br />

homme qui se moque <strong>de</strong>s dames, la danse, la conversation, tout dans le même décor – les<br />

salons bourgeois d’autrefois.<br />

La contribution <strong>de</strong> Gr. Alexandrescu au développement <strong>de</strong>s moyens artistiques est<br />

incontestable. La critique littéraire a été d’avis que ”son travail a conduit à l’enrichissement<br />

<strong>de</strong> la langue roumaine, mais d’une manière négative au niveau <strong>de</strong> la versification“ 25 ;<br />

pourtant, le poète s’est avéré être un chercheur <strong>de</strong> la langue et du langage artistique. Sa<br />

contribution la plus gran<strong>de</strong> a été au niveau stylistique, sur les moyens comiques, par la<br />

manipulation <strong>de</strong> l’ironie et <strong>de</strong> l’humour, compte tenant <strong>de</strong> la place que le langage occupe<br />

dans les versets satiriques écrits à la première personne. D’ailleurs, le comique tient à la<br />

manière <strong>de</strong> savoir raconter et d’apprécier, tout aussi que le comique est fourni par<br />

l’utilisation inattendue du ton familier, léger.<br />

Pour conclure, on peut affirmer que l’œuvre d’Alexandrescu reste le témoignage d’un<br />

travail assidu. Son rôle a été important pour ”le <strong>de</strong>stin“ du XIX e siècle, en restant un poète<br />

toujours actuel.<br />

Notes<br />

Şerban Cioculescu, Istoria literaturii române mo<strong>de</strong>rne, Eminescu, Bucureşti, 1985, p. 10<br />

2 Vatra (L’Âtre), no 4/ avril 2008, p. 21<br />

3 Paul Cornea, Originile romantismului românesc, Cartea românească, Bucureşti, 2008, p. 370-371<br />

4 Teodor Vârgolici, Aspecte ale romanului românesc din secolul al XIX-lea, Eminescu, Bucureşti, 1985,<br />

p. 32<br />

5 Nicolae Iorga, Istoria literaturii româneti. Arta şi literatura românilor, Editura Fundaţiei Culturale<br />

Române, Bucureşti, 1999, p. 161<br />

6 Nicolae Manolescu, Poeţi romantici, Editura Fundaţiei Culturale Române, Bucureşti, 1999, p. 76<br />

7 Al. Piru, Istoria literaturii române <strong>de</strong> la început până azi, Univers, Bucureşti, 1981, p. 63<br />

8 Ghe. Adamescu, Istoria literaturii române, Eminescu, Bucureşti, 1998, p. 136<br />

9Şerban Cioculescu, Vladimir Streinu, Tudor Vianu, Istoria literaturii române mo<strong>de</strong>rne, Eminescu,<br />

Bucureşti, 1985, p. 45<br />

10 Nicolae Manolescu, œuvre citée, p. 92<br />

11 Gr. Alexandrescu, Satiră. Duhului meu, Porto-Franco, Galaţi, 1993, p. 44<br />

32


12 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 63<br />

3 Silvian Iosifescu, Gr. Alexandrescu, Editura tineretului, Bucureşti, 1965, p. 100<br />

4 Gr. Alexandrescu, œuvre citée, p. 45<br />

5 Gr. Alexandrescu, œuvre citée, p. 84<br />

6 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 89<br />

7 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 76<br />

18 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 88<br />

19 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 91<br />

20 Gr. Alexandrescu, Opere, volumul I, Editura <strong>de</strong> stat pentru literatură şi artă, Bucureşti, 1957, p. 75<br />

2 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 89<br />

22 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 84<br />

23 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 324<br />

24 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, pp. 190-191<br />

25 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 36<br />

Bibliographie sélective<br />

Adamescu, Gh. (1998). Istoria literaturii române, Bucureşti: Eminescu.<br />

Alexandrescu, Gr.(1957). Opere, tom I, Bucureşti: Editura <strong>de</strong> Stat pentru Literaturǎ şi Artǎ.<br />

Alexandrescu, Gr.(1993). Satiră. Duhului meu, Galaţi: Porto-Franco.<br />

Cioculescu, Ş., Streinu, V., Vianu, T. (1985). Istoria literaturii române, Bucureşti: Eminescu.<br />

Cioculescu, Ş. (1985). Istoria literaturii române mo<strong>de</strong>rne, Bucureşti: Eminescu.<br />

Cornea, P. (2008). Originile romantismului românesc, Bucureşti: Cartea Româneascǎ.<br />

Iorga, N. (1999). Istoria literaturii româneşti. Arta şi literatura românilor, Bucureşti: Editura Fundaţiei<br />

Culturale Roumâne.<br />

Iosifescu, S. (1965). Gr. Alexandrescu, Bucureşti: Editura Tineretului.<br />

Manolescu, N. (1999). Poeţi romantici, Bucureşti: Editura Fundaţiei Culturale Roumâne.<br />

Piru, Al. (1981). Istoria literaturii române <strong>de</strong> la început până azi, Bucureşti: Univers.<br />

* * * * * Vatra, no 4/ avril 2008<br />

Vârgolici, T. (1985). Aspecte ale romanului românesc din secolul al XIX-lea, Bucureşti: Eminescu.<br />

Abstract<br />

Grigore Alexandrescu played an important role in the lyrical <strong>de</strong>stiny of the 19 th century, being<br />

consi<strong>de</strong>red as the poet of his time. The content of his work was not only meant to outline opinions<br />

and to educate but also to entertain. Obviously influenced by La Fontaine’s literary creation, the<br />

Romanian author succee<strong>de</strong>d in creating a political satire of his times, presenting a conflict of i<strong>de</strong>as<br />

(usually as a dialogue) or imagining dramatic political confrontations which had an immediate<br />

impact, being, most frequently, unexpected for the rea<strong>de</strong>r. The refined allusions and the poetical<br />

language intertwined with satirical notes reveal an important element peculiar to Alexandrescu:<br />

the irony of a witty person who knows how to make jokes by means of puns.<br />

Résumé<br />

Grigore Alexandrescu a joué un rôle important dans le <strong>de</strong>stin lyrique du XIX e siècle, étant<br />

considéré comme un poète à l’époque actuelle. Le contenu <strong>de</strong> son travail a, en plus <strong>de</strong> la mission <strong>de</strong><br />

former et d’éduquer un rôle différent, plus important encore: celui <strong>de</strong> divertir.<br />

Visiblement influencé par l’œuvre <strong>de</strong> La Fontaine, l’écrivain roumain a réussi à réaliser une satire<br />

politique <strong>de</strong> son temps, en présentant un conflit d’idées versifiées (habituellement sous la forme du<br />

dialogue) ou en imaginant <strong>de</strong>s affrontements politiques dramatiques, mais avec un résultat<br />

immédiat et, le plus souvent, inattendu pour le lecteur. Les allusions fines et le langage poétique<br />

entrecoupé <strong>de</strong> notes satiriques „trahissent” un élément important d’Alexandrescu: l’ironie d’un<br />

homme d’esprit qui sait plaisanter par <strong>de</strong>s jeux <strong>de</strong> mots.<br />

33


Rezumat<br />

Grigore Alexandrescu a jucat un rol important în <strong>de</strong>stinul liric al secolului al XIX-lea, fiind<br />

consi<strong>de</strong>rat un poet al epocii actuale. Conţinutul lucrărilor sale are, pe lângă misiunea <strong>de</strong> a forma si<br />

educa, un rol mai important, acela <strong>de</strong> a distra.<br />

Vizibil influenţat <strong>de</strong> opera lui La Fontaine, scriitorul român a reuşit să realizeze o satiră politică a<br />

timpului său, prezentând, în formă versificată, un conflict <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>i (cel mai frecvent, sub forma<br />

unui dialog) sau imaginând confruntări politice dramatice, cu rezultat imediat şi, cel mai a<strong>de</strong>sea,<br />

neaşteptat pentru cititor. Aluziile fine şi limbajul poetic întretăiat <strong>de</strong> note satirice «tră<strong>de</strong>ază» un<br />

element important al operei lui Alexandrescu : iromia unui om <strong>de</strong> spirit care ştie să glumească<br />

prin intermediul jocurilor <strong>de</strong> cuvinte.<br />

34


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 35-38<br />

FRACTAL EXTENSIONS WITHIN THE LITERARY TEXT<br />

Nicoleta Ifrim<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

The fractal theory relates to a specific view on the "natural consciousness", now<br />

focused on as inherently fractal, fragmented and broken up into irregular fragments.<br />

For a fractal as a geometric figure not only does it have irregular shapes - the zig-zag<br />

world of nature - but a hid<strong>de</strong>n or<strong>de</strong>r of these irregular shapes is lurking in that disor<strong>de</strong>r. The<br />

irregular patters are self-similar over scales. The overall pattern of a fractal is repeated, with<br />

similarity, and sometimes even with exactitu<strong>de</strong>, when one looks at a small part of the figure.<br />

It ren<strong>de</strong>rs recursive structures. For instance, if one looks at the irregular shape of a mountain,<br />

and then he looks closer at a small part of the mountain, he will find the same basic shape of<br />

the whole mountain repeated on a smaller scale. When you look closer still you see the same<br />

shape again, and so on to infinity. This happens within the Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot itself where there is<br />

an infinite number of smaller Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot shapes hid<strong>de</strong>n everywhere within the zig-zaggy,<br />

spiral edges of the overall form.<br />

As Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot points out, this i<strong>de</strong>a of recursive self-similarity was originally <strong>de</strong>veloped<br />

by the philosopher Leibniz, but it also can be related to Goethe’s organicist view. Another<br />

basic principle that gives essence to the fractalic perspective is that entropic disor<strong>de</strong>r plays a<br />

constructive way in creating or<strong>de</strong>r. A new approach has been born, as it requires, as N.<br />

Katherine Hayles says, ”a shift from the individual unit to recursive symmetries between<br />

scale levels” (Hayles 1990: 13). That means that the reserch discourse is now focused on the<br />

similarities which are replicated across the scale levels of a system, be it existential, social or<br />

cultural. The phenomena associated to the scale-<strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nt symmetries are characteristic to a<br />

fractal point of view.<br />

Therefore, the necessary coexistence of the two ways of approaching fractals in<br />

literature brings about the concept of continuity in rupture which appears to be the only<br />

productive critical pattern suiting the purposes of our approach. Thus, what mathematics<br />

and the science of fractals have finally revealed can be applied in interpreting literature,<br />

namely that: the "microcosm" (the literary <strong>text</strong>) which is smaller or drawn at a lower-level, is<br />

essentially similar to the "macrocosm" (the real world) which is larger and/or levelled<br />

higher; the latter is not somehow superior to the former by virtue of size or level; the<br />

dynamics of literary <strong>de</strong>velopment are such that the macrocosm springs from and is<br />

groun<strong>de</strong>d in the microcosm, not the other way around (the fictionalised real world). What<br />

Blaise Pascal, the French mathematician and philosopher, observed over three centuries ago<br />

can now be truly noted: "Nature (n.b. literature) imitates herself. A grain thrown onto good<br />

ground brings forth fruit; a principle thrown into a good mind brings forth fruit. Everything<br />

is created and conducted by the same Master - the root, the branch, the fruits, the principles,<br />

the consequences."<br />

In our view, literature is a fractal object due to the following arguments: it is subjected<br />

to specific tensional fields such as unforeseeability, <strong>de</strong>viation, ambiguity, its critical<br />

interpretation displays rea<strong>de</strong>r-centrism and hazard, being structured as a fragment ma<strong>de</strong> up of<br />

fragments, the literary work creates a fluctuating geometrical space (different interpretations,<br />

open ends, puzzle-like structures, disseminated characters), the fractal potentiality can be<br />

35


applied in re-interpreting classical works, the contemporary literature becomes an<br />

intermediate fractality within the infinite possible fractalities such as the historical, cultural<br />

or artistic ones.<br />

One can also notice that fractality is complementarily bi-dimensional. There is an overt<br />

fractal literarity as well as a covert one. The former occurs especially in the postmo<strong>de</strong>rn<br />

literature, where the skeptical solution of the mo<strong>de</strong>rnists, who witnessed the failuire of their<br />

utopias, is replaced by the resurrection of the secondary, the fragment and the marginal, by<br />

disregarding hierarchies so that new sensibility might be said to be fractal, post-dichotomist and<br />

post-reductive (Monica Spiridon). The latter is implied by literature in general as its intrinsec<br />

feature.<br />

Un<strong>de</strong>r these circumstances, the literary work reveals itself as a continuum which<br />

ren<strong>de</strong>rs the multiplication of the same root-theme, also structured by means of a collage of<br />

mises en abyme that can make up a liminal sub<strong>text</strong> <strong>de</strong>veloping the main <strong>text</strong>ual i<strong>de</strong>a in<br />

infinite variations and inversions. Being a „major mechanism of <strong>text</strong>ual self-reflection”, as<br />

Stephanie Sieburth puts it, the mise en abyme technique can be <strong>de</strong>fined as a „ <strong>text</strong>ual segment<br />

which constitutes a microcosm, a schematic, con<strong>de</strong>nsed version of the entire <strong>text</strong> as<br />

macrocosm” (Sánchez 1992: 259). This concept is compatible with the i<strong>de</strong>a of a fractal, as both<br />

relate to a <strong>text</strong>ual representation whose complexity can be best approached by regarding at<br />

its inner self-similarity across <strong>text</strong>ual levels. The recursive symmetries of the <strong>text</strong>-system turn<br />

into a puzzle of mutually referential fragments with no dominating voice. From this point of<br />

view, Sieburth <strong>de</strong>scribes the novel as a dynamic, non-liniar system, predominantly fractal, as<br />

it grows out of the infinite replicas of the main story, thematic variations that always reflect<br />

the <strong>text</strong>ual whole. The critic illustrates these i<strong>de</strong>as within Clarín’s novel, La Regenta, where<br />

she notes that<br />

”the meaning of any given fragment constantly shifts, changes, even inverts, <strong>de</strong>pending<br />

on which other fragment is juxtaposed with it (...). Continual dialectic of diversity and<br />

similarity, and the freedom of juxtaposition resulting from the breakdown of the <strong>text</strong>’s<br />

liniarity, cause La Regenta to be a constantly changing body, whose meaning is never<br />

static and <strong>de</strong>terminable, but always being created and dissolving as different segments<br />

are juxtaposed.” (Sánchez 1992: 260)<br />

Dällenbach’s second type of mise en abyme comes into discussion here, namely the<br />

repeated reflection, as the inner <strong>text</strong>ual secquence not only reflects the enclosing <strong>text</strong>, but in its<br />

turn inclu<strong>de</strong>s a fragment which reflects infinitly the reflecting level. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot’s fractals are<br />

ma<strong>de</strong> up in the same way, as they can be projecting a multitu<strong>de</strong> of specular metaphors that<br />

share the infinite return of cvasi-i<strong>de</strong>ntical forms.[1] Elisabeth Sánchez says that<br />

”the internal mirror, regardless of the aspect of the <strong>text</strong> at which it is aimed, may create<br />

the impression of a faithful copy, but the duplication will always be inexact – a bare<br />

outline, a con<strong>de</strong>nsation, a partial reflection, perhaps even a polar opposite. The <strong>text</strong>ual<br />

mirror provi<strong>de</strong>s only the suggestion of i<strong>de</strong>ntity, but minds bent on finding i<strong>de</strong>ntical<br />

structures will in<strong>de</strong>ed find them, perhaps at the expense of noting the differences. For<br />

this reason, I think that the difference I outlined between the self-reflecting <strong>text</strong> as<br />

<strong>de</strong>fined by the mise en abyme and the quasi-self-similar, mind-boggling structures which<br />

constitute a typical fractal is not so much a difference in kind as one of emphasis. The<br />

shift in emphasis, I believe, corresponds to the transition between structuralism and<br />

poststructuralism. Because our un<strong>de</strong>rstanding of literary <strong>text</strong>s has evolved since the time<br />

Dällenbach pinned down the mise en abyme, our use of the term has also evolved, and it<br />

has evolved in the direction of the fractal. Our <strong>text</strong>ual mirrors are no longer smoothsurfaced,<br />

static reflectors emitting images of unified, regularly self-embedding and<br />

enclosed structures. They have become turbulent and fractured, and the images they<br />

project are of a <strong>text</strong> which is fragmented, dynamic, unpredictable, in<strong>de</strong>terminate, open,<br />

36


and much more complex than many of us had once imagined. Fractal, then may be the<br />

better term (...). Within these <strong>text</strong>ual bounds, an infinite number of <strong>text</strong>s is possible. This<br />

is the beauty of the fractal: it allows for the possibility of infinitu<strong>de</strong> circumscribed within<br />

a finite area.” (Sánchez 1992:261-2)<br />

Or, in the same sense,<br />

”All elements in the novel are part of a network of relations and not entities complete in<br />

themselves. Characters are shown to be merely particular instances of recurring patterns,<br />

while the <strong>text</strong> can be seen to break up into mutually reflecting segments which, like the<br />

characters, participate in an interrelated whole. I realize, of course, that all literary <strong>text</strong>s<br />

are networks of relations, but [...] La Regenta invites us to become aware of its reflexive<br />

structure as well as of the relational nature of its characters.” (Sánchez 1996:6)<br />

Another novel, Pedro Páramo, makes Elisabeth Sánchez note that<br />

”In such a novel as Pedro Páramo, where boundaries dissolve and imagined wholes break<br />

up into fragments that echo each other and one another without ever quite connecting<br />

(except, perhaps, in the mind of the rea<strong>de</strong>r), the notion of fractal spaces – spaces that lie<br />

in the interstices of our thought categories – is ma<strong>de</strong> to or<strong>de</strong>r. We might say that Rulfo<br />

has produced an artistic object that looks very much like a fractal in its unwieldy surface<br />

structure, and that he has intentionally increased the complexity of his work by first<br />

breaking the story into bits and pieces, which in turn may contain smaller, self-similar<br />

bits and pieces, and then or<strong>de</strong>ring the segments in such a manner that they reveal much<br />

more about his story, and in fewer words, than a traditional sequential or<strong>de</strong>ring would.<br />

Whereas it is possible to view the novel as a mosaic to be pieced toghether, or as a broken<br />

mirror, I prefer the metaphor of the fractal, precisely because it brings the i<strong>de</strong>a of the<br />

mirror into play by inviting rea<strong>de</strong>rs to look for recursive symmetry, at the same time that<br />

it suggests a comparison with the mosaic, whose fractured pieces rea<strong>de</strong>rs must reor<strong>de</strong>r<br />

one by one if they hope to discover a recognizable form hid<strong>de</strong>n within fragments.”<br />

(Sánchez 1996: 232)<br />

The act of reading itself seems to bear spectral and fractal features as well. In this<br />

perspective, the <strong>text</strong> to be interpreted surpasses its traditional linear and static characteristics<br />

to turn into a process,<br />

”a fractal in motion, an evolving shape (...). Whether we are attempting to represent our<br />

diachronic movement through the <strong>text</strong> or our synchronic overview of its parts, we always<br />

must do so by imagining or drawing forms in space, and, as we have seen, the form that<br />

best captures the temporal doubling (the spiral) is much more complex than it first<br />

seemed. It is more complex because we have become aware that it is possible to focus on<br />

different aspects or levels of the <strong>text</strong> and to chart their behavior over time. When we<br />

recognize the correspon<strong>de</strong>nces in behavior between the parts and levels (the repetitions<br />

with variations), we return to a synchronic reading. In this we are very much like the<br />

fractal geometricians who likewise have shifted their attention to consi<strong>de</strong>r what is going<br />

on between scale levels.” (Sánchez 1993: 203)<br />

Or<br />

„we can draw maps of our temporal movement through the <strong>text</strong>, following the<br />

plot of a novel, for example, or tracing patterns of imagery or recurring themes; or we can<br />

draw a mo<strong>de</strong>l of relationships among parts or between parts and the whole. There are<br />

many ways that a literary <strong>text</strong> can be represented as a form moving through space or as a<br />

form that the critic has frozen momentarily in or<strong>de</strong>r to examine the relationships between<br />

37


its parts. We should not forget, however, that our diagrams will be mere approximations<br />

of the infinitely rich and complex process of reading–of constructing a world through our<br />

interpretation of verbal signs and continually restructuring that world as our reading<br />

progresses.” (Sánchez 1993: 198-9)<br />

Note<br />

1) See also Antofi S.: The Poetical Discourse – Galati: Europlus, 2005<br />

References<br />

Hayles, N.H. (1990). Chaos Bound: Or<strong>de</strong>rly Disor<strong>de</strong>r in Contemporary Literature and Science, Ithaca:<br />

Cornell University Press.<br />

Sánchez, E. (1992). ”La Regenta as Fractal” in Revista <strong>de</strong> Estudios Hispánicos, 26, 259.<br />

Sánchez, E. (1992). ”Or<strong>de</strong>r/Disor<strong>de</strong>r and Complexity in La Regenta: A Case for Spiraling Outward<br />

and Upward”, in South Central Review. The Journal of the South Central Mo<strong>de</strong>rn Language Association,<br />

13, 4, 6.<br />

Sánchez, E. (1993). ”Spatial Forms and Fractals: A Reconsi<strong>de</strong>ration of Azorín’s Doña Inés”, in Journal of<br />

Interdisciplinary Literary Studies: Innovative Approaches to Hispanic Literature, 5, 2, 203.<br />

Abstract<br />

Against the background of contemporary morphogenetic sciences, the theory of fractals brings up a<br />

new perspective on natural objects generating different processes which can no longer be discussed<br />

in terms of the Eucli<strong>de</strong>an geometry. B.Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot, the foun<strong>de</strong>r of this theory, said that various<br />

natural forms have irregular, fragmented structures so that Nature bears a higher qualitative level<br />

of intrinsec complexity than the one ren<strong>de</strong>red by the Eucli<strong>de</strong>an geometry. Thus, the theory of<br />

fractals bears a <strong>de</strong>eper level of structuring world which turns into a multi-faceted complexity of<br />

forms and meanings. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot shows mathematically and graphically how nature uses the<br />

fractal dimensions and what he calls self-constrained chance to create the complex and irregular<br />

forms of the real world.<br />

Résumé<br />

Dans le con<strong>text</strong>e général <strong>de</strong>s sciences morphogénétiques contemporaines, la théorie <strong>de</strong>s fractales<br />

ouvre une nouvelle perspective sur les objets naturels, en générant <strong>de</strong>s procès qu’on peut plus<br />

analyser dans les termes <strong>de</strong> la géométrie euclidienne. B. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot, le créateur <strong>de</strong> cette théorie,<br />

soutient que les différentes formes naturelles ont une structure fragmentaire et irrégulière, et que<br />

l’espace naturel relève un niveau qualitatif intrinsèque <strong>de</strong> complexité tout à fait différente <strong>de</strong> celui<br />

montre par le filtre euclidien. Ainsi, la théorie <strong>de</strong> fractales développe une image ordonnée du<br />

mon<strong>de</strong> dans un univers avec <strong>de</strong>s multiples facettes <strong>de</strong>s formes et significations. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot<br />

démontre a l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s mathématiques et graphiquement la manière dans laquelle la nature utilise la<br />

dimension fractale pour re-créer les formes complexes et irrégulières <strong>de</strong> l’univers.<br />

Rezumat<br />

În con<strong>text</strong>ul general al ştiinţelor morfogenetice contemporane, teoria fractalilor oferă o nouă<br />

perspectivă asupra obiectelor naturale, generând diferite procese care nu mai pot fi analizate în<br />

termenii geometriei euclidiene liniare. B.Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot, fondatorul acestei teorii, afirmă ca variatele<br />

forme naturale au structură fragmentară şi iregulată, încât spaţiul natural relevă un nivel<br />

calitativ intrinsec <strong>de</strong> complexitate total diferit <strong>de</strong>cât cel evi<strong>de</strong>nţiat prin filtrul euclidian. Astfel,<br />

teoria fractalilor <strong>de</strong>zvoltă o imagine a lumii ordonată într-un univers multifaţetat <strong>de</strong> forme şi<br />

semnificaţii. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot <strong>de</strong>monstrează matematic şi grafic modul în care natura foloseşte<br />

dimensiunea fractală pentru a re-crea formele complexe şi iregulate ale universului.<br />

38


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 39-42<br />

39<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

DAS BILD NAPOLEONS IN DER DEUTSCHEN LITERATUR<br />

Gabriel Isto<strong>de</strong><br />

“Egal wie stark sie meine Verdienste vermin<strong>de</strong>rn, ob sie mich<br />

beiseitezuschaffen o<strong>de</strong>r zu verstümmeln versuchen, es wird sehr schwer sein,<br />

mich ganz und gar zum Verschwin<strong>de</strong>n zu bringen. Der französische Historiker<br />

wird verpflichtet sein, sich mit <strong>de</strong>m Kaiserreich zu beschäftigen und, wenn er ein<br />

Herz haben sollte, wird er gezwungen sein, mir etwas zurückzugeben, und mir<br />

mein Recht zu gewähren. “<br />

Napoleon I. Bonaparte<br />

Epos, Drama und Lyrik haben sich mit <strong>de</strong>m Leben Napoleons beschäftigt, sowohl in<br />

<strong>de</strong>r Zeit seines Lebens als auch nach seinem To<strong>de</strong>. Wenn zur Zeit seines Lebens ein<br />

Hassgefühl bei <strong>de</strong>n feindlichen Völkern sich leicht bemerkbar macht, schon mit <strong>de</strong>m To<strong>de</strong><br />

<strong>de</strong>s großen Menschen vermin<strong>de</strong>rt und eben verliert sich dieses Gefühl zugunsten <strong>de</strong>s Hel<strong>de</strong>n<br />

und <strong>de</strong>s Genies: “ … die Musen wer<strong>de</strong>n bessere Sänger zum Feier ihres Lieblings begeistern,<br />

und wenn einst Menschen verstummen, so sprechen die Steine…“<br />

Hellere o<strong>de</strong>r düstere Farben spiegeln Napoleon nach <strong>de</strong>r politischen Richtung <strong>de</strong>s<br />

Autors: Einerseits bleiben die begeisterten Dichter Italiens und Polens, die ihn für ein Symbol<br />

<strong>de</strong>s nationalen Freiheitskampfes hielten, dann die, die in ihm <strong>de</strong>n Mann mit einem Herz für<br />

sein Volk und für seine getreuen Grenadiere und Invali<strong>de</strong>n sahen und nicht letzendlich die,<br />

die das Genie und <strong>de</strong>n großen Hel<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>s Jahrhun<strong>de</strong>rts verstan<strong>de</strong>n und ehrlich schätzen<br />

wollten.<br />

Zu dieser III. Kategorie könnten wir auch Heine zählen, wenn man nicht so stark in<br />

Anbetracht nimmt - wie einige behaupten - dass er Napoleon verehrte, weil er <strong>de</strong>n Ju<strong>de</strong>n<br />

seiner Heimat die bürgerliche Gleichberechtigung gebracht hätte.<br />

An<strong>de</strong>rerseits stan<strong>de</strong>n Bourbonentreue, Liberale und Napoleons Gegner, Anhänger <strong>de</strong>r<br />

Revolution (in Frankreich) und meistens englische o<strong>de</strong>r politisch gegnerisch - orientierte<br />

Schriftsteller. Lyriker <strong>de</strong>r Befreiungskriege, wie Kleist, Körner, Arndt, Rückert und<br />

Schenkendorf entwickelten in Preußen dieses negative Napoleon-Bild. So wur<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Held,<br />

das Genie, <strong>de</strong>r Titan mit seinen großen Leistungen, <strong>de</strong>r Volkskaiser mit seinem Mythos, <strong>de</strong>r<br />

Sieger und <strong>de</strong>r Herrscher, <strong>de</strong>m Renegaten, <strong>de</strong>m Immoralisten, <strong>de</strong>m Attila und Tamerlan, <strong>de</strong>m<br />

Tyrannen, Nationalfeind, Gotteslästerer und Menschenverächter entgegengestellt.<br />

Die Zeit und die Geschichte haben doch – so wie es aussieht – <strong>de</strong>n zuerst genannten<br />

Kombatanten mehr Achtung und Anerkennung erwiesen.<br />

In <strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>utschen Literatur belegen Höl<strong>de</strong>rlins Hymnen: Bonaparte und Dem<br />

Allgenannten (1798), wie sehr <strong>de</strong>r Aufstieg <strong>de</strong>s Generals die Miterleben<strong>de</strong>n blen<strong>de</strong>te. Wie<br />

weit sich auch in <strong>de</strong>r jüngst wie<strong>de</strong>rgefun<strong>de</strong>nen Frie<strong>de</strong>nsfeier das Bild <strong>de</strong>s Völkerbezwingers<br />

spiegelt, ist umstritten. Die Lyriker <strong>de</strong>r Befreiungskriege entwickeln das negative Napoleon<br />

Bild zu einer gewissen literarischen Höhe und zu schärferen Umrissen. Das Bild behielt aber


die einseitig gesteigerten Züge <strong>de</strong>s Nationalfein<strong>de</strong>s und Tyrannen, <strong>de</strong>s Menschenverchters<br />

und Gotteslästerers, <strong>de</strong>ssen militärischer Größe man, nach Kleist, erst Bewun<strong>de</strong>rung zollen<br />

könne, wenn er gestürzt sei.<br />

Diesem negativen Bild stehen entgegen das zwischen Tyrannenhass und Geniekult<br />

schwanken<strong>de</strong> Napoleon-Porträt Lord Byrons - “Du mehr als Mensch, im Schlimmen wie im<br />

Guten” - (O<strong>de</strong> to Bonaparte, 1814 ) sowie Goethes Auffassung von <strong>de</strong>m “Bändiger <strong>de</strong>r<br />

Revolution” und einem <strong>de</strong>r “produktivsten Menschen”.<br />

Gedichte auf <strong>de</strong>m Tod <strong>de</strong>s großen Kaisers entstan<strong>de</strong>n mit <strong>de</strong>r Nachricht von seinem<br />

En<strong>de</strong> (F. Grillparzer, 1821; A.v. Chamisso). Byron (O<strong>de</strong> to Napoleon, 1814 und The Age of<br />

Bronce,1823) benutzter Vergleich Napoleons mit Prometheus, <strong>de</strong>r an <strong>de</strong>n Felsen geschmie<strong>de</strong>t<br />

wur<strong>de</strong>, ist häufig wie<strong>de</strong>rholt wor<strong>de</strong>n und er erscheint auch bei Heine in seiner Reise von<br />

München nach Genua:<br />

„Vielleicht nach Jahrtausen<strong>de</strong>n, wird ein spitzfindiger Schulmeister beweisen, daß<br />

<strong>de</strong>r Napoleon Bonaparte ganz i<strong>de</strong>ntisch sei mit jenem an<strong>de</strong>rn Titane, <strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>n Göttern<br />

das Licht raubte und für dieses Vergehen auf einem einsamen Felsen, mitten im Meere<br />

angeschmie<strong>de</strong>t wur<strong>de</strong>, preisgegeben einem Geier, <strong>de</strong>r täglich sein Herz zerfleischte”.<br />

Ein richtiger Napoleon - Kult wird <strong>de</strong>utlich in Heines Buch Le Grand (1827) und<br />

Nordseebil<strong>de</strong>r (1827). Die großartige Persönlichkeit von Napoleon Bonaparte hat Heine<br />

eigentlich während seines ganzen Lebens beschäftigt. Das Bild <strong>de</strong>s Kaisers erscheint mit<br />

einer unablässigen Beharrlichkeit in <strong>de</strong>n verschie<strong>de</strong>nsten Werken <strong>de</strong>s Dichters: Dieses fängt<br />

mit <strong>de</strong>r berühmten Balla<strong>de</strong> Die Grenadiere (1820) an, und geht weiter mit I<strong>de</strong>en. Das Buch Le<br />

Grand (1826), Reisebil<strong>de</strong>r (1862-1831), Französische Maler (1831), Französische Zustän<strong>de</strong> (1832),<br />

Deutschland. Ein Wintermärchen (1844), Geständnisse (1854) und die monumentale Lutetia, die<br />

zwischen <strong>de</strong>n Jahren 1840 - 1846 verfasst wur<strong>de</strong> und 1854 vollständig erschienen ist. Der<br />

<strong>de</strong>utsche Schriftsteller macht <strong>de</strong>m Kaiser in einer seiner Werken ein Bild, das Napoleon uns<br />

fast zum Gott vorstellt :<br />

“…neue Geschlechter wer<strong>de</strong>n aus <strong>de</strong>r Er<strong>de</strong> hervorwachsen, wer<strong>de</strong>n schwin<strong>de</strong>lnd an<br />

jenes Bild hinaufsehen und sich wie<strong>de</strong>r in die Er<strong>de</strong> legen; -und die Zeit, unfähig, solch<br />

Bild zu zerstören, wird es in sagenhafte Nebel zu hüllen suchen, und seine ungeheure<br />

Geschichte wird endlich ein Mythos .“<br />

Das sind aber nur die be<strong>de</strong>utendsten Werke <strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong>utschen Schriftstellers, in <strong>de</strong>nen<br />

dieser sukzessive und obsessive Auftritt Napoleons o<strong>de</strong>r seines Namens eine Art Leitfa<strong>de</strong>n<br />

bil<strong>de</strong>t; es gibt aber noch viele von Heines Schriften, in <strong>de</strong>nen von Zeit zu Zeit <strong>de</strong>r Name <strong>de</strong>s<br />

großen Mannes mit Bezug auf verschie<strong>de</strong>ne Aspekte und Situationen erscheint.<br />

Es ist doch nicht nur so, dass Napoleon in <strong>de</strong>n obengenannten Werken erscheint,<br />

son<strong>de</strong>rn er wird in<strong>de</strong>ssen zu einem wahren Wertkriterium seiner Epoche.<br />

Und wo <strong>de</strong>r Kaiser Napoleon vor unseren Augen in <strong>de</strong>n ersten Schriften Heines wie<br />

Die Harzreise, I<strong>de</strong>en. Das Buch Le Grand, Die Reise von München nach Genua und Englische<br />

Fragmente unter solchen epopeischen Dimensionen enthüllt wird, wo er sich immer<br />

irgendwo zwischen einer überschwenglichen und einer pathetischen mit “mythischem<br />

Fa<strong>de</strong>n” gewebten Verherrlichung fin<strong>de</strong>t, da zeigt Heine später in seinen Französischen<br />

Zustän<strong>de</strong>n und Lutetia nur eine abweisen<strong>de</strong> Haltung, die eine stark ausgeprägte Nüchternheit<br />

bewies.<br />

So wird Napoleon “<strong>de</strong>r eiserne Mann, fußend auf seinen Kanonenruhm”, so wird er<br />

nur ein “Genie, in <strong>de</strong>ssen Haupte die Adler <strong>de</strong>r Begeisterung horsteten, während in seinem<br />

Herzen die Schlangen <strong>de</strong>s Kalküls sich ringelten”, so wird seine “Religion am En<strong>de</strong><br />

langweilig wie je<strong>de</strong> an<strong>de</strong>re”, so wird er “Feind <strong>de</strong>r Freiheit”, “Despot und gekrönte<br />

40


Selbstsucht”, und so wird <strong>de</strong>r “große Kaiser”, “stockblind für je<strong>de</strong> Erscheinung”, worin sich<br />

die Zukunft ankündigt.<br />

Das Bild <strong>de</strong>s Volkskaisers, an <strong>de</strong>n sich anekdotische Züge heften, wur<strong>de</strong> weiter in<br />

Balla<strong>de</strong> (H. Heine, Die Grenadiere, 1827; Frhr. v. Zedlitz, Die nächtliche Heerschau; F.v. Gandy,<br />

Kaiserlie<strong>de</strong>r, 1835) in Erzählung (W. Hauff, Das Bild <strong>de</strong>s Kaisers, 1828) und im Roman (F. Stolle,<br />

Napoleon in Ägypten, 1813, Elba und Waterloo, 1838–1844) verbreitet.<br />

Die Gestalt <strong>de</strong>s französischen “empereur” war bald sieghafter General, bald grimmiger<br />

Unterdrücker o<strong>de</strong>r einsamer Träumer. Die Dramatiker haben aber einerseits wegen<br />

Rücksicht auf die Zensur, an<strong>de</strong>rerseits wegen <strong>de</strong>s mangeln<strong>de</strong>n Abstan<strong>de</strong>s, <strong>de</strong>n Kaiser nur in<br />

historischer Verkleidung o<strong>de</strong>r Verschlüsselung darzustellen gewagt (Z. Werner, Attila, 1808;<br />

A. Müllner, Yngurd, 1817; F. Grillparzer, König Ottokars Glück und En<strong>de</strong>, 1825).<br />

Die erste wesentliche Dramatisierung <strong>de</strong>s Napoleon Schicksals gelang in Grabbes<br />

Napoleon o<strong>de</strong>r die hun<strong>de</strong>rt Tage (1881).<br />

Hebbel verzichtete nach langem Durch<strong>de</strong>nken <strong>de</strong>s Stoffes auf eine Gestaltung; er<br />

glaubte nicht, <strong>de</strong>m Stoff einen “i<strong>de</strong>ellen Gehalt” einimpfen zu können.<br />

Nietzsche sah in Napoleon eine Verkörperung seines Übermenschen - I<strong>de</strong>als; K.<br />

Bleibtreu zeigt in <strong>de</strong>r Tragödie Der Übermensch (1896) Napoleons glücks - tragen<strong>de</strong>s<br />

Geheimnis: seine Verbindung mit <strong>Jos</strong>éphine; die Trennung von ihr wird <strong>de</strong>m Kaiser die<br />

Wen<strong>de</strong> seiner Laufbahn bringen.<br />

Der Übermensch Napoleon präsentiert sich bei R.Voss in <strong>de</strong>m Drama Wehe <strong>de</strong>m<br />

Besiegten (1888) als sentimentaler Schwärmer, als tragischer, in <strong>de</strong>n Gegensatz von<br />

politischem Genie und leiten<strong>de</strong>m Menschen aufgespaltener Dul<strong>de</strong>r bei E. Ludwig (1906) und<br />

als seelenvoller bei C. Hauptmann in <strong>de</strong>r Dramen Bürger Bonaparte; Kaiser Napoleon (1911).<br />

Das Bild <strong>de</strong>s legendären französischen Kaisers, die dominante Figur im Werk Heinrich<br />

Heines, enthält eine Vielfältigkeit von Eigenschaften: von einem wahren Wertmassstab für<br />

die Kontemporaneität zu einem “Despoten” und einem “Feind <strong>de</strong>r Freiheit”. Am Anfang<br />

war er “je<strong>de</strong>r Zoll ein Gott”, er war <strong>de</strong>r “teure Prometheus”, einer <strong>de</strong>r “Großen dieser Er<strong>de</strong>”,<br />

<strong>de</strong>r Gulliver in unsriger “Liliput”-Welt, “<strong>de</strong>r große Kaiser”, “<strong>de</strong>r Riese unseres<br />

Jahrhun<strong>de</strong>rts”, <strong>de</strong>r “Mann, worin diese Zeit so leuchtend sich abspiegelt, daß wir dadurch<br />

fast geblen<strong>de</strong>t wer<strong>de</strong>n” und <strong>de</strong>r Mann <strong>de</strong>ssen Namen “ein Losungswort unter <strong>de</strong>n Völkern”<br />

gewor<strong>de</strong>n ist. Er war <strong>de</strong>r “sterben<strong>de</strong> Löwe”, wobei ein Gegner zum “preußischen Esel” wird.<br />

Auf <strong>de</strong>r an<strong>de</strong>ren Seite aber, H. Essig sieht in Napoleon nur einen Stellvertreter <strong>de</strong>s<br />

Teufels in seinem Drama Napoleons Aufstieg (1912). 1926 fand B.Blum das Böse nicht in<br />

Napoleons Charakter, son<strong>de</strong>rn in seinen Wirkungen, und 13 Jahre später stellt ihn uns A.<br />

Zweig in Bonaparte in Jaffa als Verräter an <strong>de</strong>n I<strong>de</strong>en <strong>de</strong>r Französischen Revolution. So ist es<br />

leicht eine Enti<strong>de</strong>alisierung <strong>de</strong>r Gestalt im 20. Jahrhun<strong>de</strong>rt zu erkennen, und Napoleon wird<br />

- wie gezeigt - als ein Unterdrücker und Räuber <strong>de</strong>r menschlichen Freiheit und ein<br />

Verhöhner <strong>de</strong>r sittlichen Werte charakterisiert.<br />

Die privaten menschlichen Züge <strong>de</strong>s großen Mannes wer<strong>de</strong>n ebenfalls gezeigt,<br />

beson<strong>de</strong>rs in K. Biesenthals Stern <strong>de</strong>s Korsen (1890), H. Bohrs <strong>Jos</strong>efine (1898), R.H. Bartschs<br />

Wenn Majestäten lieben (1949) und K. Bartzs Benimm dich, Paulette (1952); die Gestalt wur<strong>de</strong><br />

aber auch ironisch umspielt bei W. Hasenclever (Napoleon greift ein, 1929), G. Kaiser (Napoleon<br />

in New Orleans, 1941) und H. Menzel (Noch einmal Napoleon ?, 1943).<br />

Das Napoleon - Epos bil<strong>de</strong>t eine reiche, unerschöpfbare Inspirationsquelle für eine<br />

große Zahl von <strong>de</strong>n Schriftstellern <strong>de</strong>utscher, wie auch französischer, italienischer,<br />

polnischer und russischer Zunge. Die Weltliteratur - man darf es sagen - ist viel reicher<br />

gewor<strong>de</strong>n nach dieser Napoleon - Ära und vielleicht wird Name Napoleon noch lange Zeit<br />

an von nun an in Schriften vieler Län<strong>de</strong>r erscheinen. Man kann heutzutage ruhig behaupten,<br />

dass die Zahl <strong>de</strong>r Werke, in <strong>de</strong>nen Napoleon als Vor<strong>de</strong>rgrunds-, Rand- o<strong>de</strong>r Neben- und<br />

Hintergrundsfigur auftritt, kaum erstellbar ist.<br />

Und wenn wir doch die positiven beziehungsweise die negativen Bezüge auf die<br />

41


Persönlichkeit Napoleons in <strong>de</strong>r ganzen <strong>de</strong>utschen Literatur auf Waageschalen setzen<br />

wür<strong>de</strong>n, dürfte man ruhig behaupten, dass man <strong>de</strong>n Ersteren von umfassen<strong>de</strong>n Größen - nur<br />

viel zu wenig entgegensetzen könnte, dass man die ersteren positiven Bezüge kaum<br />

aufwiegen kann.<br />

Referenzen:<br />

Frenzel, E. (1970). Stoffe <strong>de</strong>r Weltliteratur, Stuttgart:Alfred Kröner Verlag.<br />

Castelot, A. (1970). Napoleon Bonaparte, Bucureşti: Editura Politică.<br />

Pigeard, A. (2000). L' armée <strong>de</strong> Napoléon : 1800 - 1815 organisation et vie quotidienne, Paris: Tallandier.<br />

Broers, M. (1996). Europe un<strong>de</strong>r Napoleon, 1799 – 1815, London: Arnold.<br />

Tarle, (1964). Napoleon, Bucureşti: Editura pentru Literatură Universală.<br />

Goethe, J. W. (1962). “Kampagne in Frankreich 1792“, in Goethes Werke, Band 27, München: Deutscher<br />

Taschenbuch Verlag.<br />

Carlyle, T. (1921). Napoleon und Cromwell, Freilassing: Panonia Verlag.<br />

Descotes, M. (1967). L'obsession <strong>de</strong> Napoléon dans le 'Cromwell' <strong>de</strong> Victor Hugo, Paris: Minard.<br />

Fuerst, R. (1926). Heinrich Heines Leben, Werke und Briefe, Leipzig: Tempel-Verlag.<br />

Heine, H. 1972). Heinrich Heine - Werke und Briefe, 10 Bän<strong>de</strong>r, Verlag Berlin, Weimar.<br />

Heine, H. (Hrsg. Walzel, O.), (1972). Heinrich Heines Sämtliche Werke, in zehn Bän<strong>de</strong>n, Insel-Verlag,<br />

Leipzig.<br />

Abstract<br />

This work intends to display one of Napoleon’s pictures in the German literature. The reason<br />

un<strong>de</strong>rlying our choice is accounted for by Napoleon’s all-pervasive personality in what has come to<br />

be known as the Napoleonic and post-Napoleonic era. We could say that for writers as well as their<br />

literary en<strong>de</strong>avours, Napoleon was an obsession that they tried to dispose of yet, return over and<br />

over again. No matter how excessive it may sound, Napoleon’s controversial personality is certain<br />

to have had a great impact upon the social or<strong>de</strong>r in Europe, in his time as well as ever after,<br />

implying the political and the socio-cultural environment, the world literature being, in fact,<br />

highly in<strong>de</strong>bted to his life experience as a great emperor.<br />

Résumé<br />

Ce papier a l'intention <strong>de</strong> présenter l‘image <strong>de</strong> Napoleon dans la littérature alleman<strong>de</strong>. Nous<br />

traitons ici l‘image <strong>de</strong> Napoleon parce qu'il nous apparaît une figure dominante dans la littérature<br />

entière <strong>de</strong>s temps <strong>de</strong> Napoleon et après lui. On pourrait dire, cette figure est une obsession dont les<br />

auteurs sortent et auquel ils reviennent à maintes reprises. Pourtant, cela peut sembler comme un<br />

peu excessif. Quand même, grâce à nombreux refferences sur la personnalité <strong>de</strong> Napoleon et<br />

l'impact <strong>de</strong> Napoleon sur l'ordre social européen entier (avec la relation implicite sur la politique<br />

et l'environement socio-culturel), est certain que la littérature mondiale entière est hautement<br />

en<strong>de</strong>tté "à l'empereur" et à les événements <strong>de</strong> sa vie.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Lucrarea <strong>de</strong> faţă intenţionează să prezinte imaginea lui Napoleon în literatura germană. Tratăm<br />

aici imaginea lui Napoleon <strong>de</strong>oarece aceasta apare ca o figură dominantă în întreaga literatură<br />

napoleoniană şi post-napoleoniană. S-ar putea spune că această figură este o reală obsesie <strong>de</strong> la care<br />

autorii pornesc şi la care se reîntorc permanent. Desigur, acest lucru ar putea suna puţin exagerat.<br />

Cu toate acestea, datorită numeroaselor referinţe la personalitatea lui Napoleon precum şi<br />

impactului produs <strong>de</strong> acesta asupra întregii ordini sociale (cu referire implicită la mediul politic şi<br />

socio-cultural), rămâne cert faptul că întreaga literatură mondială îi este datoare „împăratului“<br />

precum şi vieţii acestuia.<br />

42


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 43-46<br />

IRONISATION DE LA FICTION ET THEMATISATION<br />

DES<br />

REFERENCES LITTERAIRES<br />

Doinita Milea<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Lire un <strong>text</strong>e littéraire par rapport à un genre littéraire ou à un autre <strong>text</strong>e qu’on peut<br />

ou qu’on pourra reconnaître, a pour fonction essentielle <strong>de</strong> soutenir et d’orienter l’acte <strong>de</strong><br />

lecture par <strong>de</strong>s régularités structurales ou thématiques, qui laissent peu <strong>de</strong> liberté au lecteur<br />

,,modèle’’. Les étu<strong>de</strong>s critiques mettent en évi<strong>de</strong>nce les efforts <strong>de</strong>s écrivains pour mettre en<br />

évi<strong>de</strong>nce les effets <strong>de</strong> l’inter<strong>text</strong>ualité qui puissent offrir à un public dont l’horizon d’attente<br />

a été touché, la séduction du plaisir <strong>de</strong> reconnaître les figures <strong>de</strong>s héros, <strong>de</strong>s thèmes ou <strong>de</strong>s<br />

stratégies issus du dialogue avec les anciennes lectures. Umberto Eco dans La mystérieuse<br />

flamme <strong>de</strong> la reine Loana, 2005, semble vouloir expliquer son <strong>text</strong>e puisque le syntagme<br />

„roman illustré” désigne en général les productions romanesques <strong>de</strong>stinés aux enfants,<br />

ban<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong>ssinées, histoires illustrées, mais Eco envoie le lecteur à l'univers romanesque, ainsi<br />

qu’il l’avait déjà fait en 1992 , en Diario minimo, quand il avait commenté ses stratégies<br />

d’écriture dans la préface , comme une clé <strong>de</strong> lecture pour le lecteur qui en aurait besoin.<br />

La <strong>de</strong>marche comparatiste permet la mise en relation, dans l’acte <strong>de</strong> lecture, et le<br />

dépassement du <strong>text</strong>e en faveur <strong>de</strong>s modèles qui fonctionnent comme <strong>de</strong>s archi<strong>text</strong>es pour<br />

les attentes et les compétences génériques. Les métho<strong>de</strong>s qui visent la superposition <strong>de</strong>s<br />

<strong>text</strong>es, l’exploitation <strong>de</strong>s principes <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es secon<strong>de</strong>s, <strong>de</strong> la parodie et <strong>de</strong> la pastiches, <strong>de</strong>s<br />

invariants et <strong>de</strong>s stéréotypes, a permis un changement <strong>de</strong> la réception et <strong>de</strong> l’intérpretation<br />

<strong>de</strong> l’espace littéraire.<br />

Les romans métafictionnels <strong>de</strong> David Lodge, les dialogues inter<strong>text</strong>uels <strong>de</strong> John Fowles<br />

(The French Lieutenant's Woman ,Magus), les colages littéraires inter<strong>text</strong>uels <strong>de</strong> Salman<br />

Rushdie (Haroun and The Sea of Stories), les livres d’un téoricien tel Umberto Eco( Le Nom <strong>de</strong> la<br />

Rose),fonctionnent par la reconnaisance <strong>de</strong>s co<strong>de</strong>s littéraires, au XXe siècle,tout comme<br />

Orlando furioso au XVIe siècle ou Madame Bovary au XIXe siècle.<br />

Les formes évoluent dans le temps, les thèmes et le goût du public aussi, <strong>de</strong> nouvelles<br />

œuvres synthétisent ces transformations pour générer <strong>de</strong> nouvelles formes. Des parodistes<br />

comme Cervantes exploitent cette procédure qui transforme les <strong>text</strong>es du roman <strong>de</strong><br />

chevalerie par la réalité quotidienne, donnant naissance à Don Quichotte. Rabelais, dans son<br />

Gargantua et Pantagruel propose un dialogue explicite avec les <strong>text</strong>es et les clichés <strong>de</strong><br />

l’Antiquité, ainsi qu’avec les espaces <strong>de</strong> la réalité sociale et politique du temps, supposés,<br />

reconnaissables par ses lecteurs. Le contraste héroï-comique est fondé sur une structure<br />

imitative, manière qui produit Le Télémaque travesti, parodie du roman pédagogique <strong>de</strong><br />

Fénelon. Au Moyen Âge, aux stratégies parodiques qui opèrent dans le Roman <strong>de</strong> Renart,<br />

parodie du mon<strong>de</strong> chevaleresque et courtois, on ajoute l’allégorie, tout comme par<br />

l’allégorie, en Espagne, au XVIe siècle, Cervantes parodie les romans <strong>de</strong> chevalerie du<br />

Moyen Âge, et leurs clichés ; En France, au XVIIe siècle, la mo<strong>de</strong> du burlesque offre en usant<br />

ces stratégies une parodie, tel le Virgile travesti <strong>de</strong> Scarron. La parodie, dans ces cas, pourrait<br />

être le signe qu'une forme ou qu'une convention est en train <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>venir usée. Dans Tristram<br />

43


Shandy, Sterne transmet au lecteur la conscience <strong>de</strong>s clichés <strong>de</strong> la forme romanesque, par un<br />

renvoi explicite aux conventions <strong>de</strong> ce genre, donnant naissance à une autre forme narrative,<br />

qu'on appelle aujourd'hui ,,métafiction’’, ou la narration est présentée comme un artifice<br />

démonstratif. En fait, le métaroman, parfois, reprend et commente ses propres thèmes et<br />

motifs, thèmes et motifs communs à maints <strong>text</strong>es, comme est le cas d’Alain Robbe-Grillet(<br />

La Reprise),qui propose ses thèmes à variations: le thème <strong>de</strong> l’errance dans les rues (et dans le<br />

labyrinthe), le thème <strong>de</strong> la pièce, <strong>de</strong> maisons où le récit prend naissance, toiles, dont les<br />

personnages semblent traverser la vie réelle en réunissant le passé au présent et aboutissant à<br />

l’effacement complet <strong>de</strong>s traces <strong>de</strong> chronologie. À mesure que l’histoire avance, on a le<br />

sentiment <strong>de</strong> plusieurs déjà-vu, qui dépasse ses <strong>text</strong>es, en opérant les stratégies<br />

inter<strong>text</strong>uelles: la montée dans le train et le compartiment rappellent Michel Butor (l’incipit<br />

<strong>de</strong> la Modification); les <strong>de</strong>ux personnages masculins i<strong>de</strong>ntiques évoluent selon la formule <strong>de</strong><br />

Poe <strong>de</strong> William Wilson; l’atmosphère du compartiment <strong>de</strong> train évoque la sale du procès <strong>de</strong> K,<br />

l’obsession <strong>de</strong>s yeux <strong>de</strong> poupée et les frayeurs <strong>de</strong> l’enfance déplacées dans ce mon<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong><br />

l’adulte; les femmes – poupée redisent L’homme <strong>de</strong> sable, commenté par Freud. D’autres<br />

séquences renvoient explicitement à l’univers proustien, commenté par Freud, “ une tasse<br />

d’infusion <strong>de</strong> tilleul ‘’, ,, le baiser inespéré <strong>de</strong> la mère’’, le baiser dont le petit garçon a besoin<br />

comme <strong>de</strong> l’air pour retrouver son calme. L’adolescente – sœur, petite fille, fille qui nourrit<br />

les rêveries érotiques, renvoie explicitement par <strong>de</strong>s reprises obsessives sexuelles à Lolita <strong>de</strong><br />

Nabokov. Les cauchemars où le narrateur reconnaît les thèmes récurrents <strong>de</strong>s rêves qu’il fait<br />

dès l’enfance: <strong>de</strong>s toilettes introuvables pendant une recherché déroutante et inquiétante,<br />

l’escalier en colimaçon auquel il manque <strong>de</strong>s marches, peuplent ces jeux <strong>text</strong>uels, comme si<br />

au narrateur étendu sur le canapé du psychanalyste et parlant <strong>de</strong> ses obsessions, on<br />

corrigerait et annoterait les relations. Les couvertures extérieures offrent plusieurs miroirs<br />

dans lesquels le roman peut se voir (au-<strong>de</strong>là du résume sommaire présenté par l’auteur<br />

comme le schéma d’une histoire d’espionnage et <strong>de</strong> souvenir nostalgiques. Les chroniques<br />

<strong>de</strong> signal <strong>de</strong> l’édition roumaine y voient soit ,,une reprise” <strong>de</strong> certains thèmes – fantasmes<br />

<strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es <strong>de</strong> l’écrivain (le double, l’inceste, Œdipe, l’érotisme) soit un grand roman qui défie<br />

l’idée que le Nouveau Roman et le mouvement Tel Quel auraient tué la littérature française.<br />

Dans l’antiroman peut apparaître une transformation <strong>text</strong>uelle à fonction ludique, si l’on<br />

prend en compte, d’une part le choix littéraire (transformation, fonction ludique) <strong>de</strong> l’auteur<br />

dans la création d’un tel roman, d’autre part, la dimension métadiégétique où<br />

la transformation ludique repérée par le lecteur est une rupture <strong>de</strong> l’illusion fictionnelle<br />

voulue et exhibée par le parodiste. La dimension méta<strong>text</strong>uelle <strong>de</strong> la parodie a été mise en<br />

<strong>text</strong>e par les romanciers dans les pays anglo-saxons, afin <strong>de</strong> rendre compte <strong>de</strong>s pratiques<br />

parodiques mo<strong>de</strong>rnistes (Joyce) et post-mo<strong>de</strong>rnes (J. Fowles, J. Barth).<br />

Dans la pratique, on distingue la parodie du pastiche, bien que le mécanisme ait un<br />

coté commun, se referant au fait que tant le pastiche que la parodie produisent <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es<br />

issus <strong>de</strong>s transformations d'un original. La différence consiste dans l’effet particulier du<br />

décalage comique du <strong>text</strong>e dérivé par rapport au <strong>text</strong>e base. L'imitation parodique était<br />

souvent considérée vulgaire, au Moyen Age ou à la Renaissance, parce qu'elle ne montrait<br />

pas <strong>de</strong> respect envers ses modèles, n'hésitant pas à utiliser <strong>de</strong>s procédés comiques assez<br />

grossiers (tel étant le cas <strong>de</strong> Rabelais). Les pastiches, en revanche, imposent une compétence<br />

culturelle, d’autant plus que l'imitation <strong>de</strong>s classiques, à travers les époques, à eu souvent<br />

une fin pédagogique, travaillant sur l'amplification <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>e, la transposition d'un style dans<br />

un autre, ou la réécriture d'un <strong>text</strong>e versifié en prose. Dans ces cas, les exercices qui tombent<br />

sur les pastiches sélectionnent les <strong>text</strong>es et les auteurs célèbres, dont l'écriture es particulière,<br />

comme est le cas <strong>de</strong>s démonstration <strong>de</strong> Prévert dans son poème Cortèges, ou <strong>de</strong> la<br />

présentation <strong>de</strong> la vie idyllique <strong>de</strong> bergers chez Cervantes, autant <strong>de</strong> traits pertinents,<br />

reconnaissables. En parlant du dialogisme et du plurilinguisme propres au roman, Bakhtine<br />

(Du discours romanesque p. 83), définit la parodie comme un type particulier <strong>de</strong> stylisation<br />

44


qui fait partie intégrante <strong>de</strong> l’écriture romanesque, la stylisation parodique. Selon Bakhtine,<br />

les discours <strong>de</strong>s personnages caricaturaux, satirique et comique, ainsi que <strong>de</strong>s jargons<br />

professionnels, comme discours littéraires, entrent dans le champ <strong>de</strong> la parodie, d’où sa<br />

conception sur le carnavalesque dans le discours du roman, <strong>de</strong> Rabelais à Dostoïevski.<br />

Dans Palimpsestes, G. Genette propose une classification <strong>de</strong>s pratiques qui mettent en<br />

relation <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es, qu’il appelle ,,hyper<strong>text</strong>uelles’’, dont la parodie n’est qu’un cas<br />

particulier. Les critères analysés par Genette sont <strong>de</strong> types structuraux, mais il prend en<br />

compte aussi l’intention ou l’effet, qui peut être ludique, satirique ou sérieuse, et la différence<br />

entre une transformation et une imitation. La parodie est, dans ces termes, une<br />

transformation <strong>text</strong>uelle à fonction ludique (Genette 1982 : 40, Détournement <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>e à<br />

transformation minimale, Transformation ludique d’un <strong>text</strong>e singulier, Genette 1982 : 202).<br />

Genette décrit et étudie ces transformations à partir du Télémaque travesti <strong>de</strong> Marivaux, 1714.<br />

(Une analyse similaire appartient à Daniel Sangsue, dans son essai sur la parodie, 1982).<br />

Linda Hutcheon parle <strong>de</strong> la parodie (Theory of Parody, 1986), en analysant les stratégies<br />

postmo<strong>de</strong>rnes. Dans la parodie, le terme relation est important, parce qu’il rappelle que la<br />

parodie repose sur la relation d'une oeuvre base à une oeuvre secon<strong>de</strong>, dérivée, et qu'elle<br />

n'existe que lorsque cette relation est reconnue par le lecteur (ou le spectateur), car le genre<br />

se trouve également au théâtre. Au-<strong>de</strong>là <strong>de</strong> tout indice <strong>text</strong>uel ou <strong>de</strong> toute source générique,<br />

souvent difficiles à i<strong>de</strong>ntifier, la parodie, notamment celle théâtrale, se définit par un espace<br />

où se jouent les polémiques <strong>de</strong> l’actualité. Les pièces <strong>de</strong> Molière sont remplies <strong>de</strong> parodies<br />

ponctuelles où l’auteur se moque du jargon <strong>de</strong>s mé<strong>de</strong>cins, <strong>de</strong>s femmes savantes, <strong>de</strong>s<br />

précieuses. Chapelle, Racine et Boileau parodient le Cid <strong>de</strong> Corneille (le Chapelain décoiffé,<br />

1665) et Adrien-Thomas Perdou <strong>de</strong> Subligny, acteur, écrivain et dramaturge du XVIIe siècle,<br />

parodie Andromaque <strong>de</strong> Racine (la Folle Querelle, 1668). Au XVIIIe siècle, Voltaire utilise le<br />

genre dans ses pamphlets. Pangloss, dans son Candi<strong>de</strong> (1759), est une parodie <strong>de</strong> philosophe<br />

optimiste. Les parodies <strong>de</strong> drames <strong>de</strong> Victor Hugo apparaissent au siècle suivant: par<br />

exemple, celle d’Hernani réalisée par le vau<strong>de</strong>villiste Augustin Théodore <strong>de</strong> Lauzanne<br />

(Harnali ou la Contrainte par cor) est bien connue.<br />

Les œuvres <strong>de</strong> Laurence Sterne, suivent les techniques romanesques pour dialoguer<br />

par la parodie et la pastiche, les <strong>text</strong>es <strong>de</strong> voyages cachent la satire chez Jonathan Swift, et<br />

James Joyce,propose par Ulysse (1922) une parodie allégorique <strong>de</strong> l’épopée grecque, trouvant<br />

un écho au XXe siècle chez Samuel Beckett et Harold Pinter (par absur<strong>de</strong> et par la dérision).<br />

La transformation parodique répond, chaque fois, à <strong>de</strong> nouveaux horizons d’attente,<br />

par rapport à <strong>de</strong>s conventions d’écriture qui commencent à vieillir, et par cela, elle<br />

s’apparente aux fêtes carnavalesques qui reprennent une figure déjà usée. La parodie,<br />

postmo<strong>de</strong>rne, dont parle Linda Hutcheon, est à la fois un hommage respectueux et ironique<br />

à la tradition. C'est ce qu'ont fait Fowles, Barth, Borges, Nabokov, pour lesquels la parodie<br />

est un acte d'incorporation.<br />

John Fowles, dans The French Lieutenant's Woman, romancier narrateur, juxtapose les<br />

conventions du roman victorien et du roman mo<strong>de</strong>rne, pour détruire la classique illusion<br />

mimétique d'authenticité, le jeu <strong>de</strong>s conventions,la réorganisation <strong>de</strong> ces conventions<br />

littéraires étant doublée par une reconstruction, qui laisse au lecteur la liberté <strong>de</strong> choisir une<br />

variante <strong>de</strong> l’organisation du sujet, à travers les conventions qu’il aime. La pratique littéraire<br />

<strong>de</strong> la réécriture postmo<strong>de</strong>rne, ou la littérature du second <strong>de</strong>gré, selon la formule déjà<br />

classique <strong>de</strong> Genette, supposent un <strong>text</strong>e <strong>de</strong> base qui s’ouvre dans un nouveau <strong>text</strong>e par les<br />

jeux allusives qui s’appuient sur les procédés <strong>de</strong> l’inter<strong>text</strong>ualité, du palimpseste<br />

(superposition <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>es), et, évi<strong>de</strong>ment, la métafiction, comme stratégie qui mette en<br />

évi<strong>de</strong>nce les modèles, délestés <strong>de</strong> leur sens premier, et leur transplantation. Comme tout<br />

<strong>text</strong>e littéraire, une transformation réclame également un lecteur, mais un collaborateur<br />

particulier. En d'autres termes, outre la reconnaissance <strong>de</strong>s co<strong>de</strong>s littéraires usuels d’un<br />

genre, le lecteur doit aussi reconnaître que ce qu'il est en train <strong>de</strong> lire est un <strong>text</strong>e dérivé, qu’il<br />

45


soit parodie ou autre type, et qu’il doit également accepter le pacte <strong>de</strong> lecture, pour s’en<br />

réjouir.<br />

Bibliographie<br />

Aron, P. (2005). Histoire du pastiche, Paris : Presses universitaires <strong>de</strong> France.<br />

Bakhtine, M. (1978). Du discours romanesque, dans Esthétique et théorie du roman, Paris : Gallimard.<br />

Compagnon, A. (1979). La secon<strong>de</strong> main, ou le travail <strong>de</strong> la citation, Paris: Seuil.<br />

Genette, G. (1982). Palimpsestes. La littérature au second <strong>de</strong>gré, Paris: Seuil.<br />

Hutcheon, L. (1986). A Theory of Parody, London: Methuen.<br />

Sangsue, D. (1994). La Parodie, Paris: Hachette Supérieur.<br />

Tomachevski, B. (1965). Thématique, dans Théorie <strong>de</strong> la littérature, <strong>text</strong>es <strong>de</strong>s formalistes russes réunis,<br />

présentés et traduits par T. Todorov, Paris: Seuil.<br />

Abstract<br />

As literature has evolved along the centuries, literary conventions have played their crucial role in<br />

the <strong>de</strong>velopment of new literary mo<strong>de</strong>ls accepted through the perspective of innovation. The<br />

intensification of the parodic exploitation of literary forms, the parody itself is a strategy which<br />

eventually culminates in Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnism, where the author may choose to emphasize the<br />

“literarity” of the illusion created by the <strong>text</strong>, making use of a certain type of value minimization.<br />

Against the <strong>text</strong> background there will always be examples of irony, the main rhetorical<br />

mechanism which draws the rea<strong>de</strong>r’s attention to the possibility of actualization, which in its<br />

essence, is a kind of process, neither parody nor irony being able to function as such, but creating<br />

actions and strategies inten<strong>de</strong>d for the rea<strong>de</strong>r to interpret and assess the <strong>text</strong>s according to the<br />

author’s intention.<br />

Résumé<br />

Les conventions littéraires au cours <strong>de</strong> l'évolution littéraire ont leur rôle crucial dans le<br />

développement <strong>de</strong> nouveaux mo<strong>de</strong>s littéraires, par leur rapport avec le désir d’innovation.<br />

L'intensification <strong>de</strong> l’exploitation parodique <strong>de</strong>s formes littéraires, stratégie déjà usée elle-même,<br />

culmine avec le Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnisme où l'auteur peut choisir <strong>de</strong> mettre en relief la ,,littérarité’’ <strong>de</strong><br />

l'illusion provoquée par son <strong>text</strong>e, en usant d'un certain type <strong>de</strong> dévalorisation. À l'arrière-plan <strong>de</strong><br />

son <strong>text</strong>e sera, toujours, l'ironie –principal mécanisme rhétorique qui attire l'attention du lecteur<br />

sur cette actualisation, qui est en elle-même, aussi, une sorte <strong>de</strong> procédé d'actualisation; ni la<br />

parodie ni l'ironie ne peuvent pas fonctionner comme telle, mais en donnant naissance à <strong>de</strong>s<br />

actions, à <strong>de</strong>s stratégies <strong>de</strong>stinées à permettre au lecteur d'interpréter et d’évaluer, en relation,<br />

<strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es, peut- être selon l’intention <strong>de</strong> l’auteur.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Convenţiile literare <strong>de</strong>-a lungul evoluţiei literare îşi au rolul crucial în <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea noilor mo<strong>de</strong>le<br />

literare, acceptate prin prisma dorinţei <strong>de</strong> inovare. Intensificarea exploatării parodice a formelor<br />

literare, ea însăşi o strategie <strong>de</strong>ja culminează cu Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnismul, un<strong>de</strong> autorul poate alege<br />

punerea în relief a “literarităţii” iluziei provocate <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>, utilizând un anume tip <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>valorizare.<br />

In planul secund al <strong>text</strong>ului se va afla tot<strong>de</strong>auna ironia, principalul mecanism retoric, care atrage<br />

atenţia cititorului asupra acestei actualizări, care este, în esenţă, un fel <strong>de</strong> proce<strong>de</strong>u <strong>de</strong> actualizare;<br />

nici parodia nici ironia nu pot funcţiona ca atare, ci dând naştere acţiunilor, strategiilor <strong>de</strong>stinate<br />

să permită lectorului să interpreteze şi să evalueze <strong>text</strong>ele conform intenţiei autorului.<br />

46


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 47-52<br />

47<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

SOME THEORETICAL CONSIDERATIONS ON IMAGOLOGY<br />

Ioana Mohor-Ivan and Michaela Praisler<br />

Since the nineteenth century, originating from the German concept of a “psychology of<br />

the peoples”, there has been a long-standing interest in “national characters”. For the most<br />

part, this interest has been essentialist, stemming from the belief that “nations” were discrete<br />

and distinguishable groups, each characterised by its own character that could be analysed<br />

from that “nation’s” cultural activity. In the course of the twentieth century, the essentialist<br />

implications of “national characteristics” have attracted criticism, and, especially in the field<br />

of Comparative Literature, they have come to be studied as subjective terms, un<strong>de</strong>rstood as<br />

attitu<strong>de</strong>s and perceptions that affect cultural and social praxis. In the 1950s, imagology<br />

crystallised as a specialization in Comparative Literature in France, and has since gained<br />

currency among scholars and journalists interested in studying the discursively constructed<br />

nature of many social and cultural values, as a means of counter-acting re-emergent<br />

nationalisms.<br />

Imagology (imago=image + logos=word, account, study) may be <strong>de</strong>fined as the study<br />

of intercultural relations in terms of mutual perceptions, images and self-images, i.e. the<br />

ways in which perceived national / ethnic / racial / cultural characters and i<strong>de</strong>ntities – both<br />

one’s own and that of others–are expressed in a wi<strong>de</strong> range of discourses, including<br />

literature, film and the media. Because stress is laid on perception and not on the “truth” or<br />

accuracy of an image, the aim of imagology is to un<strong>de</strong>rstand the structures of images and<br />

<strong>de</strong>monstrate their conventional nature, by focusing on the intersection between linguistic<br />

(aesthetic / rhetorical) and historical (i<strong>de</strong>ological / socio-cultural) aspects of discourse<br />

(Moyle, 2004: 9).<br />

In recognizing the i<strong>de</strong>ological character of images and drawing attention to their sociocultural<br />

differences and similarities, imagology consi<strong>de</strong>rs this mo<strong>de</strong> of reciprocal<br />

characterization as pivotal in un<strong>de</strong>rstanding national perception and representation in terms<br />

of the self-other dichotomy, which also un<strong>de</strong>rlies the dialectic of i<strong>de</strong>ntity and alterity<br />

(Voestermans 1991: 219). As the i<strong>de</strong>ntity of a human <strong>de</strong>velops along the line of<br />

differentiation between (what is consi<strong>de</strong>red to be) the ‘self’ and everything which is not the<br />

self, the two are thus mutually <strong>de</strong>pendable, investing each other with meaning. The same<br />

dialectic characterises the articulation of cultural and national i<strong>de</strong>ntities, because<br />

“all human cultures articulate, situate themselves by categorizing the world […], a<br />

predicative act [which] involves a distinction between that which is allowed into the<br />

sphere of culture and that which is exclu<strong>de</strong>d” (Corbey and Leerssen 1991: vi).<br />

“Otherness” is thus created as both the contrastive as well as the cognitive background<br />

against which a cultural or national i<strong>de</strong>ntity is circumscribed.<br />

As its name asserts, image is the main working concept in the field. On the one hand,<br />

image is un<strong>de</strong>rstood as communication, especially visual communication or presentation; on<br />

the other hand, image is un<strong>de</strong>rstood as a “mental picture” or i<strong>de</strong>a. Imagology has adopted


the latter meaning, whereby image is “the mental or discursive representation or reputation<br />

of a person, group, ethnicity or ‘nation’” (Leerssen 2003: 342.) In this, it resembles a cognitive<br />

“knowledge structure” or schema that controls our opinion and behaviour towards the<br />

“other”. A fundamental distinction is ma<strong>de</strong> between auto-image (or ‘self-image’) and heteroimage:<br />

the first one refers to a characterological reputation current within and shared by a<br />

group, the latter to the opinion that others have about a group’s purported character. Apart<br />

from these, imagemes, a term coined by Joep Leerssen, would refer to ambivalent images<br />

that can be applied to different kinds of situations (Leerssen, 2000). If images change, they do<br />

so not because the character of the nation changes, but because the attitu<strong>de</strong> towards the<br />

nation changes, as cultural discontinuities and differences (in the form of languages,<br />

mentalities, everyday habits, and religions) trigger positive or negative judgements and<br />

attitu<strong>de</strong>s.<br />

When an image remains constant <strong>de</strong>spite historical changes, it turns into a stereotype<br />

or cliché (Schnei<strong>de</strong>r, 2005). According to a dictionary <strong>de</strong>finition, a stereotype is “a<br />

standardized mental picture that is held in common by members of a group and that<br />

represents an oversimplified opinion, prejudiced attitu<strong>de</strong>, or uncritical judgement” (Webster<br />

1996: 1394) about a person or an entire group of people. In the absence of ‘the total picture’ of<br />

an environment which is “too big, too fleeting for direct acquaintance” (Lippman 1922: 16),<br />

we build up ‘intellectual images’ that create simplified representations, categories or values<br />

which help us orient through and make sense of the world. In addition to this, stereotypes<br />

also play an important role in i<strong>de</strong>ntity building, because if an individual’s sense of self is<br />

closely related to the group to which he or she belongs – which may extend from school<br />

affiliation to race and nationality -, i<strong>de</strong>ntifying with this ‘in-group’ means internalizing its<br />

own stereotypes. As such, the same as in the case of “image”, stereotypes may be classified<br />

into auto-stereotypes (evolved at ‘in-group’ level) and hetero-stereotypes (relating to ‘outgroups’,<br />

i.e. the other groups to which the individual does not belong or i<strong>de</strong>ntify with.) The<br />

dialectic of the two is often based on contrastive stereotyping, because the ten<strong>de</strong>ncy is to<br />

assign negative characteristics to the out-group in or<strong>de</strong>r to create positive auto-stereotypes.<br />

National stereotypes, which involve the assignation of specific characteristics to members of<br />

a given nation, exhibit the same binary nature, often occurring in the oppositional pairs of<br />

auto- versus hetero-stereotypes, or positive versus negative ones. Because national<br />

stereotypes transcend the individual, they may be modified by changes in the group<br />

experience or the con<strong>text</strong> of intergroup relations ranging from conflict to alliances. When<br />

economic and political rivalry characterizes the relations between two countries, there is a<br />

marked negativity in hetero-stereotyping, which gives rise to xenophobia. The reverse,<br />

when positive terms are employed to characterize a national group, leads to exoticism or<br />

xenophilia.<br />

Though closely related to the concept of stereotype, the term cliché does not always<br />

connote the moral and metaphysical implications of the latter, referring rather to stylistic<br />

turns of phrase, images or gestures that have nothing to do with the expression of racism or<br />

ethnocentrism, nor do they give rise to prejudice.<br />

Originally a judicial term, prejudice has become another key concept in imagology,<br />

referring to “any preconceived and unsupported opinion and attitu<strong>de</strong> that influences our<br />

perception, <strong>de</strong>scription and judgement of others” (Beller 2003: 404). Though in recent<br />

literature, prejudice and stereotype tend to be used interchangeably, “stereotypes are beliefs<br />

or opinions about attributes of a social group or members, whereas prejudice is<br />

conceptualized as a negative intergroup attitu<strong>de</strong>” (Moyle 2004: 22; Stroebe and Insko 1989:<br />

8). As such, prejudice plays an important part in hetero-stereotyping, being a key to<br />

<strong>de</strong>ciphering intergroup attitu<strong>de</strong>s and relations.<br />

In point of the methodology that a critical study of cultural representations and of<br />

images of national i<strong>de</strong>ntity presupposes, critics agree that the imagological approach blends<br />

48


different aims in an integrative type of analysis, sharing thus its concerns with anthropology,<br />

cultural studies and literary criticism.<br />

� In common with Cultural Anthropology, imagology starts from the premise that<br />

groups and cultures differ. One mo<strong>de</strong>l for assessing differences among national<br />

cultures consi<strong>de</strong>rs that four aspects (namely, power distance; collectivism/<br />

individualism; femininity / masculinity; uncertainty avoidance) variously combine to<br />

differently mark mentalities within a given group (Hofste<strong>de</strong>, 1991, Gavriliu, 2002). The<br />

specific question that an imagologist asks relates then to how these differences are<br />

treated in mutual imagery.<br />

� In common with the field of Cultural Studies, imagology views culture as dynamic, a<br />

process through which a particular group of people constructs or <strong>de</strong>constructs a series<br />

of maps of meanings to make sense of everyday practices and experience (Mohor-Ivan,<br />

2004: 4). Given that an image is one means of “mapping” experience, an imagologist<br />

would be interested in surveying the representational terrain of a given culture,<br />

investigating the form and function of the image within its discursive con<strong>text</strong> and<br />

signalling changes in the perception of both in- and out-groups as markers of<br />

historical/political/social relativity in inter-cultural relations.<br />

� Given its literary ancestry, imagology works primarily on “imagined discourse”, i.e.<br />

discourse that lies outsi<strong>de</strong> the area of verifiable report statements (Leerssen 2003: 28).<br />

While the literary <strong>text</strong> is a primary resource to investigate the formation, perpetuation<br />

and dissemination of images, other more recent “poetically-ruled and fictionalnarrative<br />

media” – such as film or some genres of journalism – which “often work[s]<br />

on the presupposition of a suspension of disbelief and some (at least aesthetic)<br />

appreciative credit among the audience” (Leerssen 2003: 26) can be searched into for<br />

patterns of national characterization.<br />

In analysing such “imagined discourse”, Leerssen (2003: 26-30) consi<strong>de</strong>rs that other<br />

methodological assumptions are likely to be at work. According to his survey of the history<br />

and method of the field:<br />

� Imagology adheres to a theory of cultural or national stereotypes, concerning itself<br />

with representations as <strong>text</strong>ual strategies and as discourse, with referentiality<br />

contained within a <strong>text</strong>ual and inter<strong>text</strong>ual frame and not vis-à-vis empirical reality.<br />

� Imagology acknowledges the subjectivity of its sources and takes it into account in the<br />

analysis of the dynamics between auto- and hetero-images, by placing it in the<br />

perspectival con<strong>text</strong> of the representing <strong>text</strong> or discourse. Moreover, such images,<br />

usually categorized in national terms, do not reflect empirical real-world collectives,<br />

but possible i<strong>de</strong>ntifications for such groups.<br />

� Imagology consi<strong>de</strong>rs that images work effectively in the cultural and communicative<br />

field because they are tropes, commonplaces turned familiar by repetition and<br />

resemblance. As such, one must uncover the tradition of a given trope by establishing<br />

its inter<strong>text</strong>. The trope becomes thus doubly con<strong>text</strong>ualized: within a background<br />

tradition, which is echoed, reinforced or negated in the <strong>text</strong> of its occurrence, and<br />

within the latter itself, by analysing the given <strong>text</strong>-based function of the image.<br />

� Imagology is also interested in con<strong>text</strong>ualizing the image in its socio-cultural con<strong>text</strong>,<br />

by resorting to a pragmatic-functionalist perspective through which it aims to<br />

investigate the way in which the rhetoric and <strong>de</strong>ployment of stereotypes is geared<br />

towards a target audience, or the critical reception and the impact that a certain image<br />

has.<br />

� Imagology goes beyond the self-other dichotomy that plays an important role in<br />

i<strong>de</strong>ntity formation when it focuses on the role played by auto-images, which thematise<br />

the filiations between past and present through historical remembrance and cultural<br />

49


memory, in the maintenance of a sense of national i<strong>de</strong>ntity.<br />

� Nevertheless, imagology remains a comparative enterprise, addressing cross-national<br />

relations by drawing attention to the fact that any image is constructed in accordance<br />

to a differential principle which restricts i<strong>de</strong>ntity to particularism. When studied as a<br />

multicultural phenomenon, dichotomic coordinates like those established between the<br />

pragmatic North vs. the sensuous South, the backward periphery vs. the mo<strong>de</strong>rn<br />

centre, or the masculine West vs. the feminine East become nationally unspecific,<br />

helping us realize that i<strong>de</strong>ntity should <strong>de</strong>fine one as part of, and not in<br />

contradistinction to, humanity as a whole.<br />

As such, the following are meant as practical gui<strong>de</strong>lines for the integrative type of analysis<br />

that the critical study of our mental images of national character (expressed in terms of the<br />

Other / Self dichotomy) presupposes.<br />

� I<strong>de</strong>ntify the type of <strong>text</strong> chosen for analysis. The distinction between fictional (e.g.<br />

literary works and feature films) and factual (e.g. newspaper articles and<br />

documentaries) <strong>text</strong>s is important in establishing “the <strong>de</strong>gree of referential reliability of<br />

the reality communicated by the <strong>text</strong>” (Gavriliu, 2002: 101).<br />

� I<strong>de</strong>ntify the author of the <strong>text</strong> and the audience s/he is addressing. Are they members<br />

of the same in-group, or are they differentiated along gen<strong>de</strong>r, class, i<strong>de</strong>ological, ethnic,<br />

etc. criteria? This helps clarify the position that the author and her/his <strong>text</strong> take in<br />

relation to the target audience: e.g. solidarity/disaffiliation/discord.<br />

� I<strong>de</strong>ntify the type of images constructed by the <strong>text</strong> in terms of the distinction<br />

between auto- and hetero-images. This distinction is useful in assessing both the <strong>text</strong>based<br />

function of an image (how the author handles the self-other dialectic in her / his<br />

<strong>text</strong>) and its extra-<strong>text</strong>ual one (what the author wants to achieve by employing a given<br />

image) (Moyle, 2004: 11). It may be further employed to distinguish between the force<br />

lines un<strong>de</strong>rlying the respective cultural groups, which “account for the how and the why<br />

of a certain representation” (Gavriliu, 2002: 6) of the self vs. the Other in Hofste<strong>de</strong>’s<br />

mo<strong>de</strong>l (1991).<br />

� Focus on the <strong>text</strong>’s hetero-images. How is alterity constructed by the <strong>text</strong>?<br />

o Isolate the linguistic/visual elements which help circumscribe the Other (e.g.<br />

consi<strong>de</strong>r the distribution of lexical/auditory/visual signs in terms of the rate of<br />

occurrence of certain units, clusters.)<br />

o Assess the terms in which Otherness is articulated (national, ethnic, gen<strong>de</strong>r, etc.)<br />

o I<strong>de</strong>ntify the un<strong>de</strong>rlying attitu<strong>de</strong>s (e.g. xenophilia, tolerance, cosmopolitanism vs.<br />

xenophobia, ethnocentrism) which lead to positive or negative attribution of<br />

characteristics to the Other. Such valorisation is also indicative of attitu<strong>de</strong>s such<br />

as: assimilation, i.e. the appropriation of the Other by turning it into the familiar,<br />

or rejection, i.e. the exclusion of the Other “into utopia, dystopia or irreducible<br />

marginalisation” (Gavriliu 2002: 7).<br />

o Consi<strong>de</strong>r the extent to which hetero-images are recognisable as stereotypes.<br />

Because stereotypes are inter<strong>text</strong>ual constructs, i.e. the referential signification<br />

process takes place not between <strong>text</strong> and reality, but between <strong>text</strong> and <strong>text</strong><br />

(Leerssen 1998), establish their <strong>text</strong>ual tradition. Refer to the function that<br />

stereotypes play in the <strong>text</strong> at hand: e.g. a starting point for characterisation;<br />

ironic markers; i<strong>de</strong>ntifiers for alterity; invested with symbolic value; used to ‘go<br />

against the grain’ (Moyle 2004:11). This helps establish the role played by<br />

stereotypes either in sustaining tradition (e.g. reinforcing myths of otherness or<br />

prejudices) or, by contrary, in un<strong>de</strong>rmining it.<br />

o I<strong>de</strong>ntify the dichotomic coordinates which un<strong>de</strong>rlie the representation of the<br />

Other. Phenotypical features, gestures, speech (e.g. foreign vocabulary or<br />

onomastic preferences marked by caricatural intentions) may be employed to<br />

50


cast characters as statements of alterity, triggering oppositions as those<br />

established between self / other; civilian / barbarian; human / beastly; good /<br />

evil; superior / inferior (Gavriliu, 2002: 101, Mohor-Ivan, 2004: 19). Indicators of<br />

place and time may similarly point to contrasts like: North / South, West/ East,<br />

urban / pastoral, centre / margin, which further connote oppositions such as<br />

progress / primitivism; pragmatic / spiritual; individualist / collectivist; prosaic<br />

/ idyllic, <strong>de</strong>velopment / backwardness, or<strong>de</strong>r / chaos (Leerssen 1988, Mohor-<br />

Ivan, 2004: 86.) Such structural i<strong>de</strong>ntifications may reveal the extent to which<br />

alterity is exclu<strong>de</strong>d, ascribed a negative role as a manifestation of disor<strong>de</strong>r and<br />

cultural inadaptability in the out-group or the emitting culture, or, by contrary,<br />

conceived in more congenial terms, appropriated and inclu<strong>de</strong>d into the patterns<br />

of the in-group or the receiving culture. Moreover, they may help discern<br />

whether alterity is represented as continuous and homogeneous, similar to other<br />

instances of Otherness, discontinuous and contradictory, able thus to become<br />

fluid and incorporate the Self.<br />

� Corroborate the investigation of the form and function of images within the <strong>text</strong><br />

with a macro-con<strong>text</strong>ual analysis. Placing an image in its cultural and historical<br />

con<strong>text</strong> is indicative of political, economic, or diplomatic circumstances that condition<br />

the apparition of the <strong>text</strong> (Gavriliu, 2002: 102). As images shift with changing<br />

con<strong>text</strong>ual circumstances, the i<strong>de</strong>ntification of the cultural line forces that govern a<br />

certain period may explain why a particular representation is favoured over a range of<br />

possible alternatives. It also ensures a clarification of the referential frame, as well as of<br />

the cultural values and presuppositions that both author and audience involve in the<br />

communication process in or<strong>de</strong>r to enco<strong>de</strong>/<strong>de</strong>co<strong>de</strong> a given image. Finally, disclosing<br />

the properties of the con<strong>text</strong> that makes an image available as a pattern of i<strong>de</strong>ntification<br />

for a group of people may prompt a better un<strong>de</strong>rstanding of the difference between<br />

“an ‘image’ and objective information” (Leerssen 1988), by explaining its role as a<br />

subjective construct which influences and is influenced by the cultural, historical and<br />

social praxis.<br />

Though a specialism rooted in the field of Comparative Literary Study, this technical<br />

neologism referred to as imagology in many languages has come to transcend the field of<br />

literary analysis and to provi<strong>de</strong> “a viable and fruitful approach to neighbouring specialisms<br />

(from cultural studies to postcolonial studies, and from social psychology and anthropology<br />

to art history)” (Beller 2003, xv). Because it shares the interests in i<strong>de</strong>ntity constructs and<br />

cultural stereotypes with so many disciplines within the wi<strong>de</strong>r and interdisciplinary area of<br />

human and social studies, the task of pinpointing the outlines of the field would remain an<br />

open-en<strong>de</strong>d one, as the on-going dialogue between imagology and its neighbours can only<br />

enrich both theoretical premises and practical research in the study of different forms of<br />

cultural representation.<br />

References<br />

Beller, M., Leerssen, J. (eds). (2003). IMAGOLOGY: a Handbook on the Literary Representation of National<br />

Characters, Amsterdam: Rodopi.<br />

Corbey, R., Leerssen, J. (1991). “Studying Alterity: Backgrounds and Perspectives” in Alterity, I<strong>de</strong>ntity,<br />

Image: Selves and others in society and scholarship. Amsterdam: Rodopi, vi-xviii .<br />

Gavriliu, E. (2002). Theory and Practice of Imagology. Experiencing the Other in Anglo-Romanian Cultural<br />

Encounters, Galaţi: Editura Fundaţiei Universitare “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>”.<br />

Hofste<strong>de</strong>, G. (1991). Cultures and Organisations. Intercultural Cooperation and Its Importance for Survival.<br />

Software of the Mind. London: Harper Collins Publishers.<br />

Leerssen, J. (2003). “Imagology: History and Method” in Beller, M., Leerssen, J. (eds). IMAGOLOGY: a<br />

Handbook on the Literary Representation of National Characters, Amsterdam: Rodopi, 17-32.<br />

51


Leerssen, Joep (2000) “The Rhetoric of National Character: A Programmatic Survey.” in Poetics Today,<br />

Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics.<br />

Leerssen, J. (1998). National I<strong>de</strong>ntity and National Stereotype, retrieved from http://cf.hum.uva.nl/<br />

images/info/leers.html<br />

Mohor-Ivan, I. (2004). Representations of Irishness: Culture, Theatre and Brian Friel’s Revisionist Stage,<br />

Bucuresti: EDP.<br />

Moyle, L. M. (2004). An Imagological Survey of Britain and the British and Germany and the Germans in<br />

German and British Cartoons and Caricatures: 1945-2000. Retrieved from http:// elib.ub.uniosnabrueck.<strong>de</strong>/publications/diss/E-Diss389_thesis.pdf<br />

Schnei<strong>de</strong>r, D. J. (2005). The Psychology of Stereotyping, New York: The Guildford Press.<br />

Stroebe, W., Insko, C. (1989). “Stereotype, Prejudice and Discrimination: Changing Conceptions in<br />

Theory and Research” in Stereotype and Prejudice. Changing Conceptions, New York: Spinger (3-34)<br />

Voestermans, P. (1991). “Alterity/I<strong>de</strong>ntity: A Deficient Image of Culture” in Alterity, I<strong>de</strong>ntity, Image:<br />

Selves and Others in Society and Scholarship. Amsterdam: Rodopi, 219-50.<br />

Abstract<br />

The paper attempts to facilitate research in different forms of cultural representations by supplying<br />

a basic outline of imagology, a technical neologism which, though rooted in Comparative Literary<br />

Studies, has increasingly come to be positioned in the wi<strong>de</strong>r and interdisciplinary area of cultural<br />

and social studies. As such, after some preliminary consi<strong>de</strong>rations on the history, <strong>de</strong>finition and<br />

basic assumptions un<strong>de</strong>rlying the field of image studies, the paper enlists and briefly explains its<br />

basic concepts, to conclu<strong>de</strong> with both theoretical and practical gui<strong>de</strong>lines for the integrative type of<br />

analysis that the critical study of our mental images of national character (expressed in terms of<br />

the Other/Self dichotomy) presupposes.<br />

Résumé<br />

Cet ouvrage se propose <strong>de</strong> faciliter l’analyse <strong>de</strong> divers aspects <strong>de</strong>s représentations culturelles et<br />

offre un bref exposé sur l’imagologie. Bien qu’émergeant <strong>de</strong>s étu<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> littérature comparée,<br />

l’imagologie est <strong>de</strong> plus en plus souvent incluse dans le domaine plus large et interdisciplinaire <strong>de</strong>s<br />

étu<strong>de</strong>s sociales et culturelles. Ainsi, après quelques considérations préliminaires sur l’histoire, la<br />

définition et les prémisses fondamentales <strong>de</strong>s étu<strong>de</strong>s d’images, l’ouvrage indique et explique<br />

brièvement les concepts principaux <strong>de</strong> l’imagologie et s’achève par un gui<strong>de</strong> qui inclus <strong>de</strong>s aspects<br />

théoriques et pratiques pour l’analyse intégrative que l’étu<strong>de</strong> critique <strong>de</strong> nos images mentales du<br />

caractère national (exprimé en termes dichotomiques par l’opposition Moi/ L’Autre) implique.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Lucrarea îşi propune să faciliteze analiza diverselor reprezentări culturale, prezentând, succinct,<br />

principalele direcţii <strong>de</strong> cercetare ale imagologiei. Avându-şi originea în domeniul literaturii<br />

comparate, imagologia este din ce în ce mai <strong>de</strong>s inclusă în sfera <strong>de</strong> interes mai largă şi<br />

interdisciplinară caracteristică studiilor sociale şi culturale. Aşadar, după o introducere privind<br />

istoricul, <strong>de</strong>finiţia şi premisele care se află la baza studiului imaginilor, lucrarea trece în revistă şi<br />

explică pe scurt conceptele sale fundamentale. În ultima parte sunt avansate o serie <strong>de</strong> consi<strong>de</strong>raţii<br />

teoretice dar şi practice asupra modalităţilor <strong>de</strong> explorare, din perspectiva critică, ale<br />

reprezentărilor i<strong>de</strong>ntitare asociate unui caracter naţional.<br />

52


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 53-55<br />

CULTURAL DECONSTRUCTIONS OF<br />

TRANSLATED LITERATURE<br />

Lidia Mihaela Necula<br />

53<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Merely translating literal meaning from one language to another can prove difficult.<br />

However, translating literature that is written into a certain source language and that is<br />

naturally and culturally enco<strong>de</strong>d into it is, in some ways, an unattainable venture.<br />

Literature is an art that exploits words as its tool, as confined to the language, and so to<br />

the culture in which they exist: one cannot have one without the other: language is culture.<br />

Consequently, translating a culturally construed piece of art work removes it from what it is.<br />

Translation is the process of changing something into what it is not so that it will be itself -<br />

but for another audience, in another time.<br />

Language is culture, and hence, to translate literature often means to inappropriately<br />

translate culture. As cultural interpreters, translators are the first to <strong>de</strong>ci<strong>de</strong> what gives<br />

literature impact in its native language, and then find some analogous way to convert that<br />

(adapting and altering) into the inten<strong>de</strong>d language. According to Bassnet (1989), much of the<br />

outcome of cultural interpreters <strong>de</strong>pends on how they un<strong>de</strong>rstand and value not only<br />

aspects of the original work but also the work itself as a whole in its original language.<br />

It is known that <strong>de</strong>construction challenges limits of language, writing and reading by<br />

pointing how the <strong>de</strong>finitions of the very terms used to discuss concepts set boundaries for<br />

the specific theories they <strong>de</strong>scribe. Therefore, while not offering a specific cultural translation<br />

theory of its own, <strong>de</strong>construction does use translation often both to raise questions regarding<br />

the nature of language and being-in-language / culture, as well as to suggest that in the<br />

process of translating <strong>text</strong>s, one can come as close as possible to that elusive notion or<br />

experience of (cultural) différence, which un<strong>de</strong>rlies their approach. Both Roland Barthes and<br />

Jacques Derrida (Culler, 1979) started out in the belief that structuralist methodology could<br />

explain and examine the whole range of cause and effect through language and culture<br />

implicitly.<br />

What transpires from <strong>de</strong>constructionist translation theory, of course, is the renewed<br />

pre-eminence of the critic, not only as the almost divinely intuitive cultural interpreter of the<br />

literary work but also as an artist himself.<br />

It takes art to talk about art (Lodge, 1966), that is, art cannot be paraphrased or<br />

translated into any other form. Besi<strong>de</strong>s, Barthes’ view that it is the rea<strong>de</strong>r and not the author<br />

who finds meaning in a <strong>text</strong> leads logically to the conclusion that it is the translator / critic /<br />

rea<strong>de</strong>r that acquires the cultural meaning of a given work. The <strong>de</strong>constructionist cultural<br />

interpreter and critic feel and <strong>de</strong>scribe their feelings but there is no objective standard<br />

measurement with which to state that their feelings are true or illusory. And in the end, the<br />

cultural translator is left to <strong>de</strong>lineate true from illusory feelings.<br />

The originality of the initial <strong>text</strong> is called into question and most importantly, the<br />

meaning of a <strong>text</strong> is reconsi<strong>de</strong>red and silenced: the process of cultural conversion resists<br />

systems of categorization which separate source <strong>text</strong> from target <strong>text</strong> or language from


meaning and <strong>de</strong>nies the existence of un<strong>de</strong>rlying forms in<strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nt of culture. (Holeton,<br />

1992).<br />

In English through Translations (2004), Croitoru mentions that in translating literary<br />

<strong>text</strong>s, both translation theories, on the one hand, and translation criticism, on the other, have<br />

to consi<strong>de</strong>r a criterion for the analysis of the ST and TT, covering both extralinguistic and<br />

linguistic factors that are very important in interpreting and translating the <strong>text</strong>. Due to the<br />

fact that among the most important coordinates of literary translation, intentionality<br />

<strong>de</strong>termines the translator’s choices, the author’s intention being as important as the recipient<br />

that <strong>de</strong>fines the communicative situation and the function of the <strong>text</strong>, Derrida’s translation<br />

theory according to which one thinks less in terms of copying or reproducing, and more in<br />

terms of how languages relate to each other seems to apply to the culture conversion<br />

phenomenon of translating / translated literature.<br />

Clearly, there are many drawbacks to face with when translating literature because the<br />

material is actually a sample of the culture ren<strong>de</strong>red through the language of that source <strong>text</strong><br />

that, most often than not, does not have a correspon<strong>de</strong>nt into the cultural labels of the target<br />

<strong>text</strong>. For most of the cases these cultural conversions are so different from the original <strong>text</strong><br />

that the new translated <strong>text</strong> writes back its translator as a cultural construal: the final result is<br />

a différent <strong>text</strong>, a culturally re-created original <strong>text</strong> subjected to a translational individuality<br />

principle and as such, basically an unrepeated event.<br />

In a wi<strong>de</strong>r sense, this re-creation of the SLT in the TL by different means, reminds of R.<br />

Jakobson’s likeness in difference. The translators may have a greater or lesser <strong>de</strong>gree of<br />

competence, but their work also reflects an inevitable element of subjectivity or style which<br />

can be traced through certain lexical usages and syntactic forms, <strong>de</strong>velopment of<br />

mannerisms or a certain approach to translating, i.e. different reactions to the same <strong>text</strong> or to<br />

the contact with reality. In general, during such a cultural conversion it is impossible to<br />

observe one fundamental translation principle, namely, that the translation should<br />

accurately reflect the meaning of the original <strong>text</strong>s and nothing should be ad<strong>de</strong>d or removed<br />

arbitrarily, though occasionally part of the meaning can be transposed.<br />

A (cultural) recreation of the SLT would impose an interpretation of the author’s<br />

universe (the <strong>de</strong>notations and the connotations of the TL and the meaning they convey) as<br />

well as a categorization of the author’s universe in the TL system.<br />

In Con<strong>text</strong>s in Translating (2001), Nida distinguishes between the referential or cognitive<br />

meaning of translation, related to the extralinguistic object in its cultural con<strong>text</strong>, and the<br />

emotive meaning, related to the subjective reactions. A very important aspect in translating,<br />

interpreting and analyzing literature from a cultural standpoint is that the specific flavor of<br />

the works, the genius of the language, and the richness of the culture prevents translation<br />

operators from analyzing the specific source <strong>text</strong> characteristics, and leads to a conclusion of<br />

cultural untranslatability. In most cases, untranslatability is somehow supplemented for by<br />

invented and / or re-created constructions that would fit into the cultural background of the<br />

SL because culture is a specific collection of features which need examining in each<br />

translation situation.<br />

Besi<strong>de</strong>s, <strong>de</strong>construction and translation prove to be inexorably interconnected,<br />

intimating that the process of translation, that elusive impossible presence Derrida refers to<br />

as cultural différence, may be visible: cultural interpreters are challenged to think and<br />

rethink every moment a translation solution is posed, an item named, an i<strong>de</strong>ntity fixed or a<br />

sentence inscribed. With each naming gesture the cultural interpreter might feel compelled<br />

to provi<strong>de</strong> explanations for each solution chosen. Thus, the process of cultural conversion of<br />

literary <strong>text</strong>s offers a mo<strong>de</strong> of differing / <strong>de</strong>ferring that subverts mo<strong>de</strong>s of traditional<br />

thinking. By applying the <strong>de</strong>constructive translation method to literary <strong>text</strong>s it is possible to<br />

separate source <strong>text</strong> from target <strong>text</strong> or language from meaning: eventually, the discourse of<br />

the <strong>text</strong> reveals the <strong>de</strong>/re-structured cultural discontinuities as brought together un<strong>de</strong>r the<br />

54


cover of a unified, ahistorical, transcen<strong>de</strong>ntal, original <strong>text</strong>. In addition (im)possible<br />

meanings are returned to words, but covered up by the nature of the evolution of the<br />

discourse.<br />

Cultural equivalence is a fluid and relative concept, for it has the notion of difference<br />

inscribed in it, alongsi<strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntity (Rosaldo, 1992). Thus, a process of cultural conversion<br />

rejects the <strong>de</strong>finition of translation as transporting, reproducing, representing or<br />

communicating the meaning of the original: cultural translation/ projection is viewed as one<br />

instance in which language can be seen as always in the process of modifying the original<br />

<strong>text</strong>, of <strong>de</strong>ferring and displacing for ever any possibility of grasping that which the original<br />

<strong>text</strong> <strong>de</strong>sired to name.<br />

To conclu<strong>de</strong>, different approaches to culturally translated literature may have a<br />

positive or a negative feedback, i.e. the TT resulted might be original in its treatment of the<br />

translation and thus tend to break down the power of the transcen<strong>de</strong>ntal signified and free<br />

the field from evaluating translations in terms of their proximity to pure cultural<br />

equivalence.<br />

References<br />

Bassnet, S. (1989). “Translation, Tradition, Transmission” in Beyond Translation, New Comparison, 8<br />

(Autumn).<br />

Croitoru, E. (2004). English Through Translations, Galati: Editura Fundatiei Universitare ‘<strong>Dunarea</strong> <strong>de</strong><br />

<strong>Jos</strong>’.<br />

Culler, J. (1979). Structuralism and Science, From Lévi-Strauss to Derrida, London: Oxford University<br />

Press.<br />

Holeton, R. (ed.) (1992). Encountering Cultures. Reading and Writing in a Changing World, New Jersey:<br />

Prentice Hall.<br />

Lodge, D. (1966). The Language of Fiction, London: Routledge and Kegan Paul.<br />

Nida, E. (2001). Con<strong>text</strong>s in Translating, Amsterdam and Phila<strong>de</strong>lphia: John Benjamins Publishing<br />

Company.<br />

Rosaldo, R. (1992). “Culture and Truth: The Erosion of Classic Norms” in Encountering Cultures,<br />

Reading and Writing in a Changing World, Holeton, R. (ed.), New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Abstract<br />

The article aims at investigating the translation of literature from un<strong>de</strong>r a cultural lens, with<br />

particular emphasis on <strong>de</strong>constructionist translation theories, according to which not only do<br />

languages (source and target) relate to each other but also they apply to and are mediated towards<br />

an entire culture(al) conversion phenomenon.<br />

Résumé<br />

L’article se propose d’investiguer la traduction <strong>de</strong> la littérature d’une perspective culturelle, tout<br />

en s’appuyant sur <strong>de</strong>s théories <strong>de</strong> traduction déconstructivistes dont le principe fondamental est<br />

que les langues (source et cible) se trouvent dans une relation <strong>de</strong> réciprocité.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Articolul investighează procesele <strong>de</strong> traducere ale literaturii dintr-o perspectivă culturală,<br />

acordând atenţie <strong>de</strong>osebită teoriilor <strong>de</strong>constructiviste <strong>de</strong> traducere conform cărora limbile (sursă şi<br />

ţintă) nu doar relaţionează ci se şi pretează unui fenomen şi sunt mediate către un fenomen <strong>de</strong><br />

conversie culturală.<br />

55


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 56-60<br />

ON IDENTITY, ALTERITY AND HYBRIDITY WITH<br />

ENGLISH EPONYMS IN CHEMISTRY<br />

Floriana Popescu and Carmen Opriţ-Maftei<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Introduction<br />

Lexicographical approaches to English eponyms may be found in the form of<br />

dictionaries, encyclopedia, pocket gui<strong>de</strong>s and handbooks, most of them <strong>de</strong>scribing medical<br />

eponyms. Since eponymization has also been active in other sciences whose terminologies<br />

may probably be <strong>de</strong>dicated specialized dictionaries or glossaries in the future, the current<br />

paper focuses on one category of such eponyms ‘in waiting’ for an a<strong>de</strong>quate lexicographic<br />

explanatory volume, i.e., the eponyms in chemistry (chemical eponyms from now on).<br />

Defined as overlapping three meanings (in McArthur 1996: 350), an eponym refers<br />

either to (a) “a personal name from which a word has been <strong>de</strong>rived”, or to (b) “the person<br />

whose name is so used” (also eponymist, in the recent literature on eponyms) or to (c) “the<br />

word so <strong>de</strong>rived” (the recent terminology has suggested the use of eponymism for this<br />

meaning). For the last thirty years, English eponyms have interested linguists (Hellweg 1995,<br />

Crystal 1995, Crystal 2007), lexicographers (Manser 1996, Manser 2005), medical doctors<br />

(Matteson and Woywodt 2006, Whitworth 2007), and specialists in ethics (Cubelli and Sala<br />

2008).<br />

That eponymization tends to become a consi<strong>de</strong>rably productive word creating process<br />

is obvious in the case of LSP. Nevertheless, little has been stated in this regard in the<br />

lexicological literature.<br />

In addition, specialized terminologies of sciences (mathematics, physics and chemistry)<br />

abound in eponyms (most of them became operative in the 19 th and 20 th centuries).<br />

Specialized eponyms were observed to be either peculiar to one science or to be shared by<br />

two or all of the three sciences (viz., Boolean geometry is useful both in mathematics and<br />

physics). Despite the eponym field-specific high frequency of occurrence, none of these<br />

sciences has benefitted from the compiling of a<strong>de</strong>quate lexicographic instruments to <strong>de</strong>scribe<br />

them.<br />

The current interpretive perspective will consi<strong>de</strong>r the nationality of the eponymist<br />

whose name was recategorized into a common noun or an element in a set phrase to be used<br />

in the vocabulary of chemistry, for we think that speaking in terms of i<strong>de</strong>ntity or alterity with<br />

respect to the eponymist ensures the hybridity 1 of the English chemical eponyms. The paper<br />

is the result of joint research carried out on the basis of a long-term research project<br />

un<strong>de</strong>rtaken by the two authors and which has materialized into a lengthy series of<br />

conference reports and publications (27 studies and articles on specific-field eponyms).<br />

1. A terminological framework<br />

The three key terms un<strong>de</strong>rlying our linguistic en<strong>de</strong>avour, i<strong>de</strong>ntity, alterity and hybridity,<br />

56


originate in cultural studies, which at a quick glance would seem improper to our research<br />

background. Nevertheless, language not only “… gives meaning to material objects and<br />

social practices that are brought into view and ma<strong>de</strong> intelligible to us”, but it is equally “the<br />

medium for the formation and transfer of values, meanings and forms of knowledge” and<br />

“…the privileged medium in which […] meanings are […] communicated” (Barker 2005: 88).<br />

Hence, our inspiration in attributing them a linguistic bias.<br />

Paraphrasing Barker (2005: vii) who assigns the following three meanings to hybridity,<br />

we shall admit that i<strong>de</strong>ntity as well as alterity may and will, in our current interpretation,<br />

stand for “(a) discursive formations, (b) frameworks for intercultural communication” and<br />

“(c) agenda for research”, i.e., linguistic research, in our case. Historically un<strong>de</strong>rstood, all the<br />

three concepts have contributed to the <strong>de</strong>velopment of vocabularies, specialist terminologies<br />

inclu<strong>de</strong>d.<br />

Defined as “… the affirmation of those who we are by contrasting nearly every element<br />

of our way of life with that of the others” (Voestermans 1991: 220), in what follows, i<strong>de</strong>ntity<br />

will apply to eponyms of English extraction, for irrespective of the geographical varieties of<br />

English (be it British or American), scientific English shows but fuzzy boundaries.<br />

Alterity, which “came to be broadly <strong>de</strong>fined as discourse on the otherness of people,<br />

particularly outsi<strong>de</strong> one’s domestic ken” (Voestermans 1991: 220), will refer to all those<br />

eponymisms originating in other cultures but which were adopted by English as well.<br />

“At its core, hybridity involves the mixing together of previously discrete cultural<br />

elements to create new meanings and i<strong>de</strong>ntities” (Barker 2004: 89). We share Kraidy’s (2005:<br />

1) opinion that “hybridization is one of the emblematic notions of our era […] which<br />

captures the spirit of the time”. Although most frequently, hybridity refers to culture, as we<br />

use it from now on, it relates to language, in general and to field-specific vocabularies in<br />

particular.<br />

We aim to show that eponymy is transcultural and it etymologically reveals three main<br />

classes of eponymisms, viz., those originating in the names of famous native eponymists, or<br />

in the names of those coming from other cultures or in several types of associations between<br />

eponymists of the otherness and those of the native scientific background.<br />

2. Materials and methods<br />

To make a comprehensive inventory of chemical eponyms, four English volumes<br />

(Holtzclaw and Robinson, 1988a, Holtzclaw and Robinson, 1988b, Pauling, 1964, Chang,<br />

1984) were scanned and a list of such terms was drawn which resulted in a corpus of fieldspecific<br />

items to inclu<strong>de</strong> over 400 illustrations.<br />

They were etymologically classified to comply with the key words of the current<br />

approach. The classification consi<strong>de</strong>red the structure of eponyms as an element of particular<br />

interest. This is due to the fact that in the case of set phrases their structure is always the<br />

same, i.e., chemists will always use the Moseley diagram, the Parkes process or the rule of<br />

Dulong and Petit and never in any other word sequence. It is worthwhile pointing to the<br />

practicality of the corpus which was not <strong>de</strong>signed for this research exclusively. In addition to<br />

its being useful for an intercultural analysis, our multipurpose corpus of chemical eponyms<br />

will serve for lexicological, lexicographical and translational research, teaching and<br />

evaluating purposes.<br />

3. Findings<br />

The investigation of the chemical eponyms showed common structural features,<br />

irrespective of their originating in English or other languages. Personal names may be used<br />

as one-word terms or as combinations including one or more personal names and at least<br />

57


one common word, most frequently, a noun.<br />

Our linguistic analysis revealed eponyms which come from British and American<br />

eponymists to suggest i<strong>de</strong>ntity. Out of a rich number of examples several are mentioned<br />

here: brookite (


expressed by personal names without any <strong>de</strong>rivational ornaments and which also preserve<br />

their capital initial (i.e., London force < Fritz London, who first explained the intermolecular<br />

force, in Holtzclaw and Robinson, 1988a: 288) and those which behave as the base for the<br />

process of suffixation with -ite (to <strong>de</strong>note minerals) and -(i)um (to <strong>de</strong>note chemical elements).<br />

Structurally, the eponyms which point to the presence of the ‘other’ in the English<br />

chemical terminology <strong>de</strong>velop the same two types of pattern, i.e., (elements of the)<br />

<strong>de</strong>termination (system) and suffixation, whose particularity lies in the loss of capital initials.<br />

Determiners may refer to simple nouns, as in the Arrhenius equation (Pauling 1964: 499), or<br />

in compound structures as in the Arrhenius reaction-rate (


signed by Woywodt and Matteson and entitled “Should Eponyms Be Abandoned? Yes”, in British<br />

Medical Journal, 335, 424 and the latter presented in the bibliography below.<br />

Bibliography<br />

Barker, C. 2004 The Sage Dictionary of Cultural Studies, London: Sage Publications Ltd.<br />

Barker, C., 2005 Cultural Studies: Theory and Practice, Oxford: Al<strong>de</strong>n Press Ltd.<br />

Chang, R. 1984, Chemistry, New York: Random House<br />

Crystal, D. 1995, The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language, Cambridge: Cambridge University<br />

Press.<br />

Cubelli, R., Sala, S.D. (2008). Eponyms to Forget, in Cortex, 44, 9, 1137 – 8<br />

Hellweg, P. 1995. The Wordsworth Book of Intriguing Words, Hertfordshire: Wordsworth Edition Ltd.<br />

Holtzclaw, H.F. jr., Robinson, R.W. 1988a. General Chemistry, Lexington: D.C. Heath and Company<br />

Holtzclaw, H.F. jr., Robinson, R.W., 1988b. College Chemistry, Lexington: D.C. Heath and Company<br />

Kraidy, M. 2005, Hybridity or the Cultural Logic of Globalization, Phila<strong>de</strong>lphia: Temple University<br />

Press<br />

Manser, M. 1996. The Wordsworth Dictionary of Eponyms, Hertfordshire: Wordsworth Reference<br />

Manser, M. 2005. Chambers Dictionary of Eponyms, Chambers Harrap Publishers<br />

Matteson, E.L, Woywodt, A. 2006. Eponymophilia in Rheumatology, in Rheumatology, 45, 1328 – 1330.<br />

McArthur, T. (ed.) 1996. The Oxford Companion to the English Language, Oxford: Oxford University Press<br />

Pauling, L. 1964. College Chemistry, San Francisco and London: W.H. Freeman and Company<br />

Voestermans, P., 1991, Alterity/i<strong>de</strong>ntity: A Deficient Image of Culture, in Corbey, R., Leerssen, J.<br />

(eds.), Alterity, I<strong>de</strong>ntity, Image: Selves and Others in Society and Scholarship, Amsterdam: Rodopi, 219-<br />

50.<br />

Whitworth, J. 2007. Should Eponyms Be Abandoned? No, in British Medical Journal, 335, 425<br />

Abstract<br />

The problem of eponyms has been constantly investigated against the background of English for<br />

specific purposes for several years. This paper continues the series of field-specific observations and<br />

presents a few remarks regarding the presence of the ‘other’ as compared to the presence of the<br />

‘national i<strong>de</strong>ntity’ in the vocabulary of chemistry.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Problema eponimelor, amplasate pe fundalul limbii engleze pentru scopuri specifice a fost cercetată<br />

în mod constant pe o perioadă <strong>de</strong> câţiva ani. Lucrarea <strong>de</strong> faţă continuă seria observaţiilor privind<br />

domenii specifice şi prezintă unele remarci privind prezenţa alterităţii comparativ cu prezenţa<br />

‘i<strong>de</strong>ntităţii’ naţionale în vocabularul specific domeniului chimiei.<br />

Résumé<br />

Le problème <strong>de</strong>s éponymes a été constamment investigué entre les frontières <strong>de</strong> l’anglais sur<br />

objectifs spécifiques <strong>de</strong>puis quelques années. Ce papier continue la série <strong>de</strong>s observations sur la<br />

terminologie propre à un objectif spécifique et présente quelques remarques sur la présence <strong>de</strong><br />

l’altérité en comparaison avec l’élément d’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale dans le vocabulaire <strong>de</strong> la chimie.<br />

60


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 61-65<br />

STYLISTIC FOCUS ON E.M. FORSTER<br />

Daniela Şorcaru<br />

61<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Foster is noted for his use of symbolism as a technique in his novels, and he has been<br />

criticized for his attachment to mysticism. The characters of Mrs. Wilcox and Mrs. Moore in<br />

A Passage to India have a mystical link with the past and a striking ability to connect with<br />

people from beyond their own circles.<br />

Although he always remained to some extent an Edwardian, E. M. Forster embodied<br />

more <strong>full</strong>y than any other imaginative writer of his generation a mo<strong>de</strong>rn gay-liberation<br />

perspective.<br />

Forster’s homosexuality manifested itself in an erotic preference for foreigners and for<br />

men of the lower social classes. Reflecting an appreciation of the natural vitality he<br />

connected with working-class men and ambivalence about his own over-civilized<br />

temperament, this preference helps account for his ten<strong>de</strong>ncy to romanticize the lower classes<br />

and for his sensitivity to the injustices of the class system at home and to the effects of<br />

imperialism abroad.<br />

Perhaps because of his erotic preference for working-class men, Forster was also<br />

<strong>de</strong>eply affected by the belief that homosexuality could serve a positive social function by<br />

helping to bridge the barriers that separate the classes.<br />

Forster’s acute consciousness of gay oppression, as epitomized in the persecution of<br />

Wil<strong>de</strong>, haunted his imagination throughout his life, fueling his anger at social and political<br />

injustices of all kinds.<br />

But notwithstanding his difficulties in making a sexual adjustment and <strong>de</strong>spite recent<br />

attempts to characterize his attitu<strong>de</strong> toward homosexuality as guilt-rid<strong>de</strong>n and self-loathing,<br />

the fact is that Forster never felt shame for his sexual orientation.<br />

What he did feel were a sense of wariness and vulnerability and that sensation of<br />

standing ‘at a slight angle to the universe’ that he <strong>de</strong>tected in the poetry of C. P. Cavafy.<br />

Forster’s sensitivity to the pervasive homophobia of his age probably accounts for that tinge<br />

of sadness so characteristic of the Forsterian voice. His fiction embodies a consistent system<br />

of values centered on issues of self-realization, individualism, and responsiveness to life,<br />

nature, and the unseen.<br />

Forster began writing A Passage to India in 1913, just after his first visit to India. The<br />

novel was not revised and completed, however, until well after his second stay in India, in<br />

1921, when he served as secretary to the Maharajah of Dewas State Senior. Published in 1924,<br />

A Passage to India examines the racial misun<strong>de</strong>rstandings and cultural hypocrisies that<br />

characterized the complex interactions between Indians and the English toward the end of<br />

the British occupation of India.<br />

A Passage to India was the last in a string of Forster’s novels in which his craft<br />

improved markedly with each new work. After the novel’s publication, however, Forster<br />

never again attained the level of craft or the <strong>de</strong>pth of observation that characterized his early<br />

work.


With a view to analyzing E. M. Forster’s role as a precursor of the stream-ofconsciousness<br />

linguistic techniques at <strong>text</strong> level, we embark upon a parallel task, namely that<br />

of proving that the pleating of stylistic functions in literary discourse creates a complex<br />

network of linguistic <strong>de</strong>vices, no matter the perspective at the core of the analysis.<br />

Text 1. “So the leave-taking began. Every one was cross or wretched. It was as if irritation<br />

exu<strong>de</strong>d from the very soil. Could one have been so pretty on a Scotch moor or an Italian<br />

alp? Fielding won<strong>de</strong>red afterwards. There seemed no reserve of tranquility to draw upon<br />

India. Either none, or else tranquility swallowed up everything, as it appeared to do for<br />

Professor Godbole. Here was Aziz all shoddy and odious, Mrs. Moore and Miss Quested<br />

both silly, and he himself and Heaslop both <strong>de</strong>corous on the surface, but <strong>de</strong>testable<br />

really, and <strong>de</strong>testing each other.<br />

‘Good-bye, Mr. Fielding, and thank you so much. …What lovely College buildings!’<br />

‘Good-bye, Mrs. Moore.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Mr. Fielding. Such an interesting afternoon. …’<br />

‘Good-bye, Miss Quested.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Dr. Aziz.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Mrs. Moore.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Dr. Aziz.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Miss Quested.’” (Forster, 1991:67)<br />

The vocabulary of Text 1 observes the canon of formal discourse, not only at the level of<br />

individual words, but also at that of collocations specific to formal English. The absence of<br />

any intrusions of the informal results in clear un<strong>de</strong>rstanding on the part of the rea<strong>de</strong>r,<br />

whereas the stylistic effect created is that of ‘nice and proper’ language that is meant to<br />

characterize both the situation at hand and the characters.<br />

The nouns in the <strong>text</strong>, whose scarcity is to be noted, as they yield frequency to<br />

adjectives in this excerpt, reveal a stylistic interplay between the concrete and the abstract.<br />

Such a linguistic <strong>de</strong>vice serves the stylistic function of supporting the i<strong>de</strong>a of tension at <strong>text</strong><br />

level: irritation, soil, moor, alp, reserve, tranquility, College, buildings, surface.<br />

The i<strong>de</strong>a of tension is enhanced and characterized by the large number of adjectives<br />

employed with a view to creating a stylistic play upon reality and appearance. Thus, they<br />

qualify reality as hid<strong>de</strong>n and appearance as out in the open, a type of antonymic social<br />

prejudice that all characters tolerate, e.g. cross, wretched, pretty, shoddy, odious, silly, <strong>de</strong>corous,<br />

<strong>de</strong>testable, lovely, interesting.<br />

Enhancing this gap between truth and social mask, the adverbs in the <strong>text</strong> mostly make<br />

up superlatives, meant to draw the rea<strong>de</strong>r’s attention to the exaggeration of appearance, e.g.<br />

very , so, Such, with only two intrusions of space and time, e.g. afterwards, Here.<br />

Moreover, the verbs in the fragment obey the same interplay of reality and appearance,<br />

as seemed and appeared are contrasted to verbs <strong>de</strong>noting actions (physical or verbal), e.g.<br />

began, to draw, swallowed up, to do, thank. The transition is ren<strong>de</strong>red by such ‘intermediating’<br />

verbs as those <strong>de</strong>noting states or mental processes, e.g. was, exu<strong>de</strong>d, Could have been, won<strong>de</strong>red.<br />

The sentence structure seems to obey a tension towards end of tension axis, as the<br />

beginning of the excerpt is ma<strong>de</strong> up of simple, short sentences, e.g.<br />

So the leave-taking began. Every one was cross or wretched. It was as if irritation exu<strong>de</strong>d<br />

from the very soil. Could one have been so pretty on a Scotch moor or an Italian alp?<br />

Fielding won<strong>de</strong>red afterwards. There seemed no reserve of tranquility to draw upon<br />

India,<br />

that evolve into longer, compound and complex sentences as the tension dissipates<br />

with the leave-taking, e.g.<br />

62


Either none, or else tranquility swallowed up everything, as it appeared to do for<br />

Professor Godbole. Here was Aziz all shoddy and odious, Mrs. Moore and Miss Quested<br />

both silly, and he himself and Heaslop both <strong>de</strong>corous on the surface, but <strong>de</strong>testable<br />

really, and <strong>de</strong>testing each other.<br />

The repetitive use of Good-bye may be interpreted as stylistically summing up and<br />

marking the moment when tension diminishes and disappears, as well as completing the<br />

formal dimension of the language employed when associated with elliptical sentences that<br />

are characteristic of formal social conversation, e.g. […] thank you so much. … What lovely<br />

College buildings! Such an interesting afternoon. …<br />

Text 2. “‘[…] I have had twenty-five years’ experience of this country’ – he paused, and<br />

‘twenty-five years’ seemed to fill the waiting-room with their staleness and ungenerosity<br />

– ‘and during those twenty-five years I have never known anything but disaster result<br />

when English people and Indians attempt to be intimate socially. Intercourse, yes.<br />

Courtesy, by all means. Intimacy – never, never. The whole weight of my authority is<br />

against it. I have been in charge at Chandrapore for six years, and if everything has gone<br />

smoothly, if there has been mutual respect and esteem, it is because both peoples kept to<br />

this simple rule. New-comers set our traditions asi<strong>de</strong>, and in an instant what you see<br />

happens, the work of years is undone and the good name of my District ruined for a<br />

generation. I – I – can’t see the end of this day’s work, Mr. Fielding. You, who are imbued<br />

with mo<strong>de</strong>rn i<strong>de</strong>as – no doubt you can. I wish I had never lived to see its beginning, I<br />

know that. That a lady, that a young lady, engaged to my most valued subordinate – that<br />

she – an English girl fresh from England – that I should have lived – –’” (pp. 147-148)<br />

Text 2 continues the same cultural clash that permeates the entire novel, but it <strong>de</strong>velops<br />

the perspective of the accuser, as it consists in a plea of the ‘ruler’ against the ‘ruled’. The<br />

vocabulary in this case is blatantly formal, obeying and exaggerating the norms of high<br />

society members being appalled at the behaviour of the lower classes or ‘savages’ in foreign<br />

lands.<br />

The power of the accuser’s beliefs permeates all linguistic levels of the <strong>text</strong>,<br />

manipulating language into stylistically supporting the i<strong>de</strong>as expressed by artful pleating of<br />

stylistic functions of language. The clash of two cultures that are very different is to be seen<br />

in the dominance of nouns marked [+ABSTRACT], e.g. years, experience, country, staleness,<br />

ungenerosity, disaster, Intercourse, Courtesy, Intimacy, weight, authority, respect, esteem, rule,<br />

traditions, instant, work, name, generation, i<strong>de</strong>as. The few intrusions of nouns marked<br />

[+CONCRETE] seem to merely support the battle of i<strong>de</strong>as by appointing concrete entities to<br />

keep the ‘combat’ going, e.g. waiting-room, people, New-comers, District, lady, subordinate, girl.<br />

In their turn, the adjectives unfold a similar axis of i<strong>de</strong>as, an axis that may be regar<strong>de</strong>d<br />

as threefold, namely the accuser <strong>de</strong>fining a) himself and the culture he stands for, <strong>de</strong>eply<br />

<strong>de</strong>pendant on tradition, e.g. whole, mutual, simple, good; b) the change that comes with people<br />

who are open-min<strong>de</strong>d to embrace social <strong>de</strong>velopment, e.g. imbued, mo<strong>de</strong>rn; c) the innocent<br />

victim, still part of the accuser’s culture, e.g. young, valued, fresh. As it can be easily noticed,<br />

all adjectives serve a clear stylistic function, that of qualifying characters and what they<br />

symbolize in the complex background of the novel.<br />

Consi<strong>de</strong>ring the fact that there are only four adverbs present in the fragment, e.g.<br />

never, socially, smoothly, asi<strong>de</strong>, mention must be ma<strong>de</strong> that their scarcity seems to be ma<strong>de</strong> up<br />

for by the repetitive use of never (4 instances), which may semantically express the accuser’s<br />

refusal to accept the situation at hand or to reconsi<strong>de</strong>r the angle of analysis of the respective<br />

situation.<br />

Similar to the previous <strong>text</strong>, the great variety of verbs, as well as their consi<strong>de</strong>rable<br />

number, account for the stylistic impression of actual conversation taking place, of<br />

63


conversation dynamics, of discourse vitality, e.g. have had, paused, seemed, to fill, have never<br />

known, result, attempt, to be, is, have been, has gone, has been, kept, set, see, happens, ruined, can’t<br />

see, can, wish, had never lived, to see, know, should have lived.<br />

The formality and appropriateness of long sentences in discourse is disrupted<br />

strategically by elliptical sentences, meant to dramatize what is being said at the moment the<br />

disruption occurs. Such stylistic manipulation of language is obvious in:<br />

‘I have had twenty-five years’ experience of this country’–he paused, and ‘twenty-five<br />

years’ seemed to fill the waiting-room with their staleness and ungenerosity–‘and during<br />

those twenty-five years I have never known anything but disaster result when English<br />

people and Indians attempt to be intimate socially. Intercourse, yes. Courtesy, by all<br />

means. Intimacy–never, never. The whole weight of my authority is against it. I have<br />

been in charge at Chandrapore for six years, and if everything has gone smoothly, if there<br />

has been mutual respect and esteem, it is because both peoples kept to this simple rule.’<br />

The same stylistic effect is created by breaking the canon of well-formed sentences,<br />

with a view to expressing the speaker’s indignation consi<strong>de</strong>ring the present state of affairs,<br />

e.g.<br />

‘New-comers set our traditions asi<strong>de</strong>, and in an instant what you see happens, the work<br />

of years is undone and the good name of my District ruined for a generation. I – I – can’t<br />

see the end of this day’s work, Mr. Fielding. You, who are imbued with mo<strong>de</strong>rn i<strong>de</strong>as –<br />

no doubt you can. I wish I had never lived to see its beginning, I know that. That a lady,<br />

that a young lady, engaged to my most valued subordinate –that she– an English girl<br />

fresh from England–that I should have lived – –’<br />

The <strong>text</strong> is thus clearly subjective at all levels and the i<strong>de</strong>as and the concepts expressed<br />

are, at all times, supported by artful pleating of stylistic functions of language.<br />

When consi<strong>de</strong>ring the stylistic peculiarities of the <strong>text</strong>s analyzed, we cannot <strong>de</strong>ny<br />

Forster his rightful place as one of the precursors of the stream-of-consciousness. His clever<br />

combining tradition and innovation resulted in high-quality prose that already displays<br />

(violent or less violent) disruptions of the formality of the vocabulary used, of the strict rules<br />

of morphology, syntax, semantics and logics, as already proved in the passages discussed.<br />

References<br />

Forster, E. M. (1991). A Passage to India, London: David Campbell Publishers Ltd.<br />

Abstract<br />

E. M. Forster’s discourse in A Passage to India may be accepted as subjective at all levels; the<br />

i<strong>de</strong>as and the concepts are always supported by the mastery assembling of the stylistic functions of<br />

language. Taking into consi<strong>de</strong>ration the stylistic particularities of the <strong>text</strong>s in focus, Forster’s<br />

being a forerunner of the stream-of-consciousness can hardly be <strong>de</strong>nied. His witty juxtaposition of<br />

tradition and innovation resulted in a high quality prose which already reveals (more or less<br />

violent) discrepancies regarding the formality of the vocabulary, the strict rules of morphology,<br />

syntax, semantics and logic, as the analysis of excerpts shows it.<br />

Résumé<br />

Le discours d’E. M. Forster dans A Passage to India peut être regardé comme étant subjectif à tous<br />

les niveaux; les idées et les concepts exprimés sont toujours supportés <strong>de</strong> l’assemblage artistique<br />

<strong>de</strong>s fonctions stylistiques du langage. En considérant les particularités stylistiques <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es à<br />

analyser, nous ne pouvons nier la place méritée <strong>de</strong> Forster comme l’un <strong>de</strong>s précurseurs du<br />

“stream-of-consciousness.” Ses combinaisons intelligentes <strong>de</strong> tradition et innovation ont produit<br />

64


une prose <strong>de</strong> haute qualité qui montre déjà les discor<strong>de</strong>s (plus or moins violentes) <strong>de</strong> la formalité<br />

du vocabulaire utilisé, <strong>de</strong>s règles stricts <strong>de</strong> la morphologie, <strong>de</strong> la syntaxe, <strong>de</strong> la sémantique et <strong>de</strong> la<br />

logique, comme les fragments investigués prouveront.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Discursul lui E. M. Forster în romanul A Passage to India poate fi privit ca subiectiv, la orice<br />

nivel ; i<strong>de</strong>ile şi conceptele exprimate sunt tot<strong>de</strong>auna consolidate <strong>de</strong> îmbinarea artistică a funcţiilor<br />

stilistice ale limbajului. Având în ve<strong>de</strong>re particularităţile stilistice ale <strong>text</strong>elor analizate, nu putem<br />

nega locul meritat <strong>de</strong> Forster, ca precursor al scrierilor marcate <strong>de</strong> tendinţele curentului “streamof-consciousness”<br />

sau al fluxului conştiinţei. Alăturarea inteligentă a tradiţiei şi a inovaţiei au<br />

creat o proză <strong>de</strong> înaltă calitate care arată <strong>de</strong>ja discrepanţe (mai mult sau mai puţin violente) ale<br />

vocabularului utilizat, ale regulilor stricte ale morfologiei, sintaxei, semanticii şi logicii, aşa cum<br />

<strong>de</strong>monstrează fragmentele analizate.<br />

65


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 66-71<br />

EXISTENTIAL CHALLENGES.<br />

A SORESCU-LARKIN INTERCULTURAL CASE<br />

Daniela Ţuchel<br />

66<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

1. Introduction<br />

Postmo<strong>de</strong>rn man needs ‘metaknowledge’ – knowledge acquired through the<br />

inferential mo<strong>de</strong>. The following is a free transposition of Nora Iuga’s (2005) statement at the<br />

Neptun International Festival (“Zile şi Nopţi <strong>de</strong> Literatură”) in September 2005. She says: let<br />

us think of the stubbornness of a writer in search of a perfect match between written<br />

expression and the form of the thought not yet taught to speak out. Just imagine the<br />

economy. Anything useless would be left out, every ‘noise’ would be retired, every ‘că’,<br />

‘cum’, ‘care’, ‘căci’, ‘acum’, ‘atunci’, and so forth. We might be floating, continually ellipting<br />

and spinning out a language pierced like a lace. Rea<strong>de</strong>rs would be enabled to pull through a<br />

coloured string off their own silence. It could be unimaginably beautiful! (“Dar ce să facă un<br />

scriitor care se încăpăţînează să scrie, nu cum se vorbeşte, ci cum se gîn<strong>de</strong>şte: să scrii ca întrun<br />

amor perfect cînd forma scrisă a gîndului s-ar suprapune total peste forma gîndului care<br />

n-a învăţat încă să vorbească. Vă daţi seama ce economie s-ar face? Am elimina tot ce e <strong>de</strong><br />

prisos, am scoate la pensie toţi paraziţii care ne bruiază emisia, pe ‘că’ şi pe ‘cum’ şi pe ‘care’<br />

şi pe ‘căci’ şi pe ‘acum’ şi pe ‘atunci’ şi cîte altele; am pluti într-o elipsă continuă – o limbă cu<br />

găurele ca o dantelă prin care orice cititor îşi poate trasa panglica colorată a propriei tăceri.<br />

Nici nu vă daţi seama cît ar putea fi <strong>de</strong> frumos!”)<br />

The present paper has left behind history and traces contemporary stories and<br />

i<strong>de</strong>ntities born out of compactness and not expansion, out of lacunar economy and not of<br />

periphrastic, reiterated, appositely or appositionally functional pieces.<br />

By means of the parallel addressed in this article, we will try to manage a “site” in the<br />

spirit of Christopher Tindale from whom we quote (2004: 3):<br />

“As a ‘site’, the argumentative situation is a nongeographical space, located in and<br />

created by discourse. We inhabit such spaces with different facility, some of us with ease,<br />

others with discomfort. Yet they are crucial to our self-un<strong>de</strong>rstanding and our<br />

un<strong>de</strong>rstanding of others.”<br />

So much for the operation preliminary to un<strong>de</strong>rstanding and interpreting space. In<br />

time, the basic operation suggested by the <strong>text</strong> of the two poems reproduced below is<br />

syncopation in a cognitive sense. That means to say that the experience reduces the number of<br />

events in the temporal string. Marin Sorescu chooses to represent one’s last biographical<br />

stage by the emergence of the spi<strong>de</strong>r’s web, of the bodily weakness and of the soul’s<br />

separation – an evolutionary <strong>de</strong>velopment compressed to three moments of observation.<br />

Philip Larkin has a time-line of two longer and one shorter mid-positioned spans recording<br />

processes: of darkness setting in, of a sheet slowly drawn over and of hands loa<strong>de</strong>d down.<br />

These notable process occurrences are compressed by syncopation. Now let us consi<strong>de</strong>r the


poetic material:<br />

M(arin) S(orescu) Scară la cer<br />

1 Un fir <strong>de</strong> păianjen<br />

2 Atîrnă <strong>de</strong> tavan,<br />

3 Exact <strong>de</strong>asupra patului meu.<br />

4 In fiecare zi observ<br />

5 Cum se lasă tot mai jos.<br />

6 Mi se trimite şi<br />

7 Scara la cer - zic,<br />

8 Mi se aruncă <strong>de</strong> sus.<br />

9 Deşi am slăbit îngrozitor <strong>de</strong> mult,<br />

10 Sînt doar fantoma celui ce am fost,<br />

11 Mă gîn<strong>de</strong>sc că trupul meu<br />

12 Este totuşi prea greu<br />

13 Pentru scara asta <strong>de</strong>licată.<br />

14 – Suflete, ia-o tu înainte,<br />

15 Pîş! Pîş!<br />

P(hilip) L(arkin) Going<br />

1 There is an evening coming in<br />

2 Across the fields, one never seen before,<br />

3 That lights no lamps.<br />

4 Silken it seems at a distance, yet<br />

5 When it is drawn over the knees and breast<br />

6 It brings no comfort.<br />

7 Where has the tree gone, that locked<br />

8 Earth to the sky? What is un<strong>de</strong>r my hands,<br />

9 That I cannot feel?<br />

10 What loads my hands down?<br />

2. Cognition as unfol<strong>de</strong>d in these poems<br />

We are asking ourselves what recovery of non-explicit material occurs in Marin<br />

Sorescu (MS) and Philip Larkin (PL). The shared topic is the passage from closed systems<br />

(extinction closes upon itself and is studied here as covertness) to open systems, heading<br />

upward (MS) or heading downward (PL), while the linguistic stuff will be shown to<br />

outwardly bloom into hosts of meanings. An almost limitless number of presuppositions,<br />

entailments and implicatures spring up in pragmatic ways.<br />

On an experiential basis, the poems explored here make use of metaphors groun<strong>de</strong>d<br />

in the nature of one’s everyday interactions with the world. The process which operates as a<br />

vital relation is called ‘compression’ in cognitivism (Evans 2007: 30). Let us expand: an outer<br />

space relation in a distinct input space is ‘shortened’. The connection between counterparts<br />

67


gets tighter in the process, but this is also contained in the cognitive meaning of ‘vitality’, a<br />

<strong>de</strong>scription with which connectors occur across input spaces and manage the projection onto<br />

a blen<strong>de</strong>d space. In the two poems about extinction, scaled time and syncopated time are the<br />

effects of time compression. When time in the outer space is compressed in the latter variant<br />

– see MS’s case – a sequential scanning will serve the mentioned poet towards distinguishing<br />

between temporal and atemporal relations in the end. The bias shown by PL, instead, is<br />

towards summary scanning, giving rise to a static scene in a unified final whole. As for<br />

conceptualized <strong>de</strong>ath, MS applies the reverse of the relation between vertical elevation and<br />

quantity (going ‘up’ is less, contradicting the typical view that ‘up’ is ‘more of it’), whereas<br />

PL applies vertical <strong>de</strong>scent-and-quantity in reverse (doing ‘down’ is more than ever<br />

anticipated). And this estimation of quantities <strong>de</strong>velops against a qualitative truth: verticality<br />

is a movement upwards which points to divinity, whereas the downward movement leads<br />

the way to darkness (in sus spre Dumnezeu, in jos spre tenebre).<br />

The study of the two poems can persua<strong>de</strong> the stu<strong>de</strong>nt that a ‘cognitive environment’<br />

signaled by Sperber and Wilson (1986) is by necessity created when audiences assess<br />

arguments and make their judgements (it is our position now, as rea<strong>de</strong>rs of MS and PL). We<br />

may share a physical environment, but our differences are obvious: we represent the world<br />

differently. Our perceptual and inferential abilities vary. We have different sets of memories.<br />

We possess different belief structures, and so on. Thus, a Romanian’s cognitive environment<br />

would be different from an Englishman’s. What is manifest to one is not manifest to the<br />

other. What phenomena are in our visual field at a particular time may be the same even<br />

though we may not notice them all. In consequence of Sperber and Wilson’s <strong>de</strong>monstration,<br />

we can discard the catchwords ‘mutual knowledge’ or ‘shared information’ and use instead<br />

the reference to a shared – or not shared – cognitive environment. Thinking of two distinct<br />

persons, Tindale (2004: 22) says: “Insofar as their cognitive environments intersect, then that<br />

intersection is itself a cognitive environment.” Nevertheless, the analysis below will reveal<br />

that for our large communities of Romanians and Britons, respectively, there is no overlap of<br />

cognitive environments.<br />

Both <strong>text</strong>s display logical sequentiality while opposed action takes place: one self<br />

unwraps (MS) and the other wraps up (PL). The same feeling – sadness – is coupled with<br />

opposed emotion: relief (MS) and puzzlement (PL). The passage we have already allu<strong>de</strong>d to<br />

bears contrary but not contradictory conclusive experiences: SEEING IS KNOWING (line 4 ff<br />

in MS) versus NOT SEEING IS NOT KNOWING (line 3 ff in PL). Hence, the foreseeable<br />

differentiation in foregrounding <strong>de</strong>vices. MS makes salient the gradability of situations as<br />

often as he can, being shocked with (a ten<strong>de</strong>ncy towards) extremes in lines 5, 9, 12, whereas<br />

PL works out nothing gradable as long as his semantic <strong>de</strong>scription stagnates around a zero<br />

of the level recording neither an excess nor a <strong>de</strong>ficit. We will further point out that the zero<br />

of negation prevails with him.<br />

In ancient Greek ‘allegoria’ means ‘other speaking’ and <strong>de</strong>notes figurative language,<br />

something other than what one says. Do we have an allegory (one and the same) in the two<br />

poems? We answer in the affirmative. MS writes about a man lying on his back. The plot is<br />

that a spi<strong>de</strong>r comes and a soul goes, goes up in all probability. In PL the evening comes and a<br />

lying man goes down, or simply goes, according to the title. In MS, the allegory<br />

accommodates a symbol, the lad<strong>de</strong>r. In PL, the allegory is set up between the man, the tree<br />

and Earth, while ‘evening’ is an abstract personification at first, only to melt next into an<br />

allegorical object, the silken sheet. Allegories in the past centuries were suitably turned into<br />

representations in painting. We believe the most ekphrastic components visualising for us<br />

the poetic situation are the lad<strong>de</strong>r and whatever that is which is being drawn over knees and<br />

breast, perhaps a shroud. Again within the allegory, if the concept of ‘symbol’ carries a<br />

quasi-religious revelation of the Infinite, the most eligible candidates for it are the spi<strong>de</strong>r’s<br />

thread in MS and the tree in PL. And this interplay of figures can be prolonged. Ultimately,<br />

68


we need to quote an opinion (Crisp, 2005: 329) in which ‘terms’ should be read ‘figures of<br />

speech’: “It is not unusual for terms to display instabilities and reversals of meaning in a<br />

period of semantic change” - and we seem to be spanning such a period now.<br />

If we make a cognitive claim upon these poems, we can start from an explanation<br />

envisaging some everyday form of embodied experience, such as climbing a lad<strong>de</strong>r to get<br />

rescued or to get a reward, and also the experience of making oneself comfortable un<strong>de</strong>r a<br />

blanket. The moment metaphorical thinking is activated, the projection of the source domain,<br />

more experientially accessible, occurs onto the target domain. If we consi<strong>de</strong>r, however, that<br />

the allegorical meaning is foregroun<strong>de</strong>d rather than the symbolic and the metaphorical,<br />

allegory in the light of human cognition opens up a challenging perspective which probably<br />

accounts for the ‘revival’ of allegory in present-day culture.<br />

3. Ancillary grammar<br />

To us, MS saliently handles the dash and the exclamation mark. The former occurs<br />

once for introducing the rephrasing intention (line 7) and the second time for setting up the<br />

possibility of the double (see Pârvu, 2005: 47) in line 14, with a cognizing I-subject evincing<br />

the split self: the body-like-a-shadow addressing the soul-like-an-alter-ego. The exclamatory<br />

punctuation in line 15 clashes with the hushing message of the onomatopoeia, yet manages<br />

to suggest the passionate drive animating the self. In PL, there is a synecdochically split<br />

body: knees and breast (line 5) and then hands (lines 8 and 10) in a more intimate fusion with<br />

the self being accompanied by the possessive <strong>de</strong>terminative. Both MS and PL place in focus<br />

their last stanzas through their diminished size to two lines and one line, respectively. It is<br />

also worth noting that both poems allow the blank which is silence to reign supreme at the<br />

end.<br />

Additionally, ‘mi se trimite’(line 6) and ‘mi se aruncă’ (line 8) in MS are the Romanian<br />

instances of reflexivity with the zero-agent to be found in English too with ‘it is drawn’ in PL<br />

(line 5). They all represent an option for pointing to a taboo, in a situation in which it is<br />

inappropriate to give a name to the one who saves you or to the one who protectively covers<br />

you.<br />

Another grammatical comment is that in MS the zero article for ‘scară’ in the title<br />

stands out when compared to the same noun with <strong>de</strong>finite <strong>de</strong>termination in lines 7 and 13. It<br />

could be the progression from something unknown and abstract to the familiarity given by<br />

the mentioned daily observations. This progression is recor<strong>de</strong>d in PL in the treatment of the<br />

noun ‘evening’, from the in<strong>de</strong>finite <strong>de</strong>scription of the routine phenomenon (line 1) to<br />

uniqueness of manifestation (line 2). Then we should note that the present tense encroaches<br />

into past time territory in MS and equally in PL. The <strong>de</strong>ictic zero-level of here-and-now<br />

confer a permanent and spatially unlimited perspective to the experience. The vocative (MS,<br />

line 14) is functional in splitting the individuality of the experiencer, while the unanswered<br />

self-turned questions in PL (lines 8, 9, 10) set up a split ego as well. In MS, two cases of<br />

incongruent positioning (lines 6 and 7 with the items ‘şi’ and ‘zic’) are indicative of extreme<br />

emotion which prolongs its <strong>de</strong>familiarizing syntactic jumbling of the clauses constituting<br />

lines 9, 10 and 11. In PL, the frequency of negative patterns (lines 2, 3, 6, 9), only one of them<br />

being verbal negation, can trigger an interpretation going through Zero in the direction<br />

shown by Laurence Horn (1989), namely to take negation as a positive assertion about the<br />

existence of a relevant difference. The first form of negation is a rejection of external entities.<br />

Horn says that the fifth form of negation (known as ‘scalar negation’) is the first form, after<br />

all, but it must necessarily be <strong>de</strong>tached, that is used against an absent entity. Since a<br />

recognized absence only exists in contrast to a recalled presence, such a form of negation is<br />

necessarily <strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nt upon memory. Memory enables what is present to shift attention to a<br />

stimulus that is not present. In reacting to absence, what was previously ground must now<br />

69


e interpreted as figure. ‘Evening’, ‘lamps’ and ‘comfort’ are now figure in cognitivism, by<br />

the si<strong>de</strong> of another effect they bring about, a renewed ability to symbolize in PL. It is actually<br />

their very role in negative patterns that helped increase their power as symbols.<br />

In processing the information supplied by grammar arrangements in the two poems,<br />

we find that through those grammar <strong>de</strong>vices the announcement of a few gaps happens, at<br />

the same time with a focalized intensity of thought peculiar to the subjectivity of the genre.<br />

Conclusions<br />

MS and PL have a novel way of using the adversarial or contentious aspect of<br />

arguments which are important to an un<strong>de</strong>rstanding of their poetry.<br />

Most of the implicatures are found to explore not so much time as the relation<br />

between space and body. Wavering between positions within a space is an issue of power,<br />

and also of scale, not to mention the issue of interiority and exteriority. Hence, the interesting<br />

experience of i<strong>de</strong>ntification through one viewer being ma<strong>de</strong> to go out of himself.<br />

Eventually, the major distinction between MS and PL is that the former <strong>de</strong>ci<strong>de</strong>s on a<br />

course of action and the latter cannot do so because he finds out that knowledge and proof<br />

are lacking in what he is concerned.<br />

We can recast the i<strong>de</strong>a of dialogue (present sub<strong>text</strong>ually in these poems) as a<br />

conventional situation when two parties reason together for some purpose. The actuality of<br />

the poems puts forward only arguments by one party. Thus, we are faced with a one-si<strong>de</strong>d<br />

argumentation in a natural-language setting, a practical and applied task that will make<br />

legitimate any response as <strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d by informal logic.<br />

For his invisible respon<strong>de</strong>nt in both cases, the questioner resorts to different kinds of<br />

sophistical arguments. In MS’s case, the argumentum ad misericordiam (an appeal to<br />

sympathy) is generated by the wretched situation of a sufferer losing bodyweight. To this,<br />

the argumentum ad populum draws upon the popular opinion that the weightless soul should<br />

perform the action of rising to heaven because people say that this is the right thing to do.<br />

On the other hand, PL has a sophistical way of pressing presumptions ahead in an<br />

aggressive tactic of many questions – what is known as “the fallacy of complex question” so<br />

that “any direct answer will trap a respon<strong>de</strong>nt into damaging concessions” (Walton, 1998:<br />

26). In PL’s case, it appears that the questions themselves can be fallacies due to the fact that<br />

the questions contain presumptions that, in a subtle manner, implicate conclusions tripping<br />

up the respon<strong>de</strong>nt. By pressing the i<strong>de</strong>a of dying as ‘going down into the ground’, the<br />

answer is contained in the question, but may not be the commitment of a respon<strong>de</strong>nt<br />

resembling, for instance, MS.<br />

We cannot conclu<strong>de</strong> without remembering the cautious tone of David Crystal (1992:<br />

386) when assessing that too many zeros or absences in an analysis weaken its plausibility.<br />

We must hope that our paper has not been excessive in that respect.<br />

We tried to get a grasp on the two poets’ insight in terms of purpose versus play,<br />

hierarchy versus anarchy, presence versus absence, epistemology versus ontology. This<br />

strategy of approach may yield the objectivised differences in the poets’ cultural<br />

backgrounds, instead of pon<strong>de</strong>ring about the genuineness of their personal grasp. PL poses<br />

questions that cannot be easily answered. MS takes an orientation that is appealing because it<br />

discharges us of the duty to give answers. We are all philosophers by dabbling, the argument<br />

of God awaiting us may impress us or may fail to do so. Truth is nee<strong>de</strong>d, but the notion of<br />

truth is not at all a perspicuous one.<br />

References<br />

Crisp, P. (2005). “Allegory and symbol – a fundamental opposition?” in Language and Literature. Vol.<br />

70


14, no. 4 / November. Sage Publications.<br />

Crystal, D. (1992). A Dictionary of Linguistics and Phonetics. Blackwell Publishers.<br />

Evans, V. (2007). A Glossary of Cognitive Linguistics. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press Ltd.<br />

Horn, L. (1989). Natural History of Negation. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.<br />

Iuga, N. (2005). “Dacă inspiri numai ce expiri, mori”, in România literară nr. 39/5-11 oct., p. 3.<br />

Pârvu, S. (coord.) (2005). Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnism. Iaşi: Institutul European.<br />

Sperber D. & D. Wilson (1986). Relevance. Communication and Cognition. Cambridge, MA: Harvard<br />

University Press.<br />

Tindale, C. W. (2004). Rhetorical Argumentation. Sage Publications, Inc.<br />

Walton, D. (1998). The New Dialectic. Conversational Con<strong>text</strong>s of Argument. Toronto, Buffalo, London:<br />

University of Toronto Press.<br />

Abstract<br />

This intercultural study is backed up by current competing motivations in discourse, such<br />

as economy, clarity, routinization or expressivity. The analysis is hinged on arguments<br />

about non-geographical space, time compression, metaphysical extinction in two cognitive<br />

environments: one distinctly Romanian and the other one distinctly British.<br />

Résumé<br />

Cette approche, soutenue par <strong>de</strong>s thèmes d’interculturalité, invoque <strong>de</strong>s motivations<br />

discursives qui concurrent pour assurer les principes <strong>de</strong> l’économie, <strong>de</strong> la clarté <strong>de</strong><br />

l’expression, <strong>de</strong> l’expressivité du message et <strong>de</strong> son aspect quotidien. On présente <strong>de</strong>s<br />

arguments en ce qui concerne l’espace qui dépasse la géographie, le temps comprimé,<br />

l’extinction métaphysique. Le tout est généré par <strong>de</strong>s milieux cognitifs distincts, l’espace<br />

roumain et l’espace britannique.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Abordarea <strong>de</strong> faţă, susţinută <strong>de</strong> teme ale interculturalităţii, invocă motivaţii discursive ce<br />

concură pentru a asigura principial economia exprimării şi claritatea ei, expresivitatea<br />

mesajului şi formularea lui rutinieră. Se aduc argumente în legătură cu spaţiul<br />

transgresând geografia, timpul comprimat, extincţia metafizică, totul fiind generat <strong>de</strong> medii<br />

cognitiv distincte, unul românesc şi celălalt britanic.<br />

71


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 72-77<br />

LA DIMENSION INTERCULTURELLE DE L’HUMOUR<br />

- PISTES PEDAGOGIQUES -<br />

Angelica Vâlcu<br />

Tentative <strong>de</strong> définir l’humour.<br />

72<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Selon l’Encyclopédie libre Wikipedia, l’humour pourrait être défini comme “une forme<br />

d’expression permettant <strong>de</strong> dégager certains aspects cocasses ou insolites <strong>de</strong> la réalité,<br />

<strong>de</strong>stinée généralement à provoquer le rire, soit en se moquant <strong>de</strong>s autres, soit en se moquant<br />

<strong>de</strong> ses semblables ou <strong>de</strong> soi-même (autodérision).” 1<br />

L’humour est un moyen d’expression qui vise la vérité sans la nommer, étant en même<br />

temps la meilleure possibilité <strong>de</strong> s’exprimer lorsqu’il est impossible <strong>de</strong> le faire d’une autre<br />

manière. L’humour est une forme d’esprit qui se cache sous un air sérieux, pleine d’ironie et<br />

d’imprévu, et qui consiste à dégager les aspects plaisants <strong>de</strong> la réalité avec un certain<br />

détachement.<br />

Dans son essai sur l’humour, Robert Escarpit 2 donne une définition <strong>de</strong> l’humour à<br />

partir <strong>de</strong> la théorie humorale d'Hippocrate <strong>de</strong> Cos et <strong>de</strong> Galien. La notion d’humour apparaît<br />

dans la littérature avec Ben Jonson (Anglais d’origine), qui définit “le sens of humour”<br />

comme une “conscience intuitive mais luci<strong>de</strong> et délibérément souriante <strong>de</strong> son propre<br />

personnage caractériel au milieu d'autres personnages” 3. L’humour serait, selon Escarpit, un<br />

état d’esprit et un comportement qui fonctionne “par un arrêt <strong>de</strong>s jugements affectif, moral<br />

et philosophique” et qui se concrétise sous la forme d’une interruption (en trois phases) <strong>de</strong>s<br />

évi<strong>de</strong>nces:<br />

a) la confrontation soudaine entre l’évi<strong>de</strong>nt et l’absur<strong>de</strong>;<br />

b) suspension volontaire <strong>de</strong> l'évi<strong>de</strong>nt, tout en continuant à adopter un raisonnement<br />

formellement logique;<br />

c) rôle important <strong>de</strong> la réception et <strong>de</strong>s paramètres culturels.<br />

Ces trois phases forment un tronc commun avec le fantastique considéré comme un écart par<br />

rapport au vraisemblable.<br />

À partir <strong>de</strong> l’ouvrage <strong>de</strong> T. Todorov 4, Said Laqabi 5, dans sa thèse <strong>de</strong> doctorat “Aspects<br />

<strong>de</strong> l’ironie dans la littérature maghrébine d’expression française <strong>de</strong>s années quatre-vingts ” soutenue<br />

à l’Université Paris XIII en 1996, considère que l’humour se définit par un certain côté<br />

comique dont le grand trait distinctif consiste dans l’ancrage idiomatique et culturel.<br />

Par le biais <strong>de</strong> l’humour comme forme supérieure <strong>de</strong> l’ironie, on peut dire avec plus <strong>de</strong><br />

force ce qui est saisi d’une manière moins ferme, d’une manière traditionnelle ou stéréotypée<br />

“Elle [l’ironie] déjoue donc un ensemble <strong>de</strong> conventions <strong>de</strong> lecture et <strong>de</strong> communication,<br />

pour permettre la transmission du singulier. D'une part, elle met à distance le proche et<br />

permet <strong>de</strong> le voir, en lui donnant forme. D'autre part, elle bloque le passé d'attentes et<br />

ouvre un moment d'inspiration dans l'auditeur, comme un présent absolu. ” 6<br />

Le <strong>text</strong>e humoristique est un phénomène, par excellence, culturel et son interprétation


prétend la référence à un cadre d’expériences commun aux <strong>de</strong>ux interlocuteurs.<br />

Il est assez difficile <strong>de</strong> découvrir la signification d’un <strong>text</strong>e humoristique. «La<br />

traduction», l’explication <strong>de</strong>s mots et <strong>de</strong>s référents ne récupère pas entièrement le sens du<br />

<strong>text</strong>e en question<br />

“les intentions <strong>de</strong> l’auteur et les données du <strong>text</strong>e se mêlent en général à un ensemble <strong>de</strong><br />

connotations ou <strong>de</strong> références incluant l’histoire, la politique, les attitu<strong>de</strong>s, les mo<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong><br />

vie, les traditions, la littérature, la science, et toutes sortes <strong>de</strong> domaines dans lesquels les<br />

locuteurs natifs sont immergés en permanence et qui varient <strong>de</strong> contrée à contrée, donc<br />

<strong>de</strong> langue à langue dans la mesure où la géographie et la linguistique sont solidaire. ” 7<br />

Par leur thématique, les différents genres <strong>de</strong> l’humour, blague, anecdote, satire, etc.<br />

cherchent à raffermir et réaffirmer l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité du groupe, la spécificité du groupe et donnent<br />

les preuves <strong>de</strong> leur vouloir <strong>de</strong> vivre ensemble:<br />

“La pratique la plus répandue est alors le choix d'un bouc émissaire qui donne à chacun la<br />

vision péjorative <strong>de</strong> l'autre, <strong>de</strong> celui qui n'est pas partie intégrante <strong>de</strong> la collectivité<br />

revendiquée. L'i<strong>de</strong>ntité mise en exergue varie selon les blagues, elle peut être<br />

professionnelle, sexuelle, régionale, nationale, ethnique, religieuse... ” 8<br />

II. Culture et interculture dans l’enseignement du FLE.<br />

Le concept <strong>de</strong> culture peut être défini comme une manière <strong>de</strong> penser et d’être, plus<br />

précisément comme “un ensemble <strong>de</strong> significations, valeurs et croyances <strong>de</strong> nature collective<br />

et dotées d’une certaine durabilité qui caractérisent un groupe d’individus sur une base<br />

nationale, ethnique ou autre et orientent leurs conduites. ” 9<br />

Marie-Thérèse Claes 10, dans l’article cité ci-<strong>de</strong>ssous, définit la culture comme un<br />

système <strong>de</strong> significations partagées: lorsque les significations différent, <strong>de</strong>s ambigüités<br />

apparaissent. L’auteure mentionnée donne l’exemple du mot «mariage» tel qu’il est perçu<br />

dans différentes cultures: les Américains du Nord associent le mot mariage à l’idée d’amour<br />

et <strong>de</strong> partenariat, les Japonais l’associent à la confiance et même au compromis, aux<br />

restrictions, aux obligations, tandis que les Français associent le mariage à l’amour, à la<br />

passion et au sexe. Les associations dont parle M. Th. Claes démontrent le fait que chacun<br />

d’entre nous dispose d’un dictionnaire mental structuré d’une manière particulière et que<br />

dans ce dictionnaire se trouvent <strong>de</strong>s mots disponibles à n’importe quel stimulus extérieur.<br />

Le socioculturel est une composante essentielle - à coté <strong>de</strong>s composantes linguistiques,<br />

paralinguistiques, sociolinguistiques, référentielles, discursives - <strong>de</strong> la compétence <strong>de</strong><br />

communication. L’enseignement <strong>de</strong>s langues étrangères favorise usuellement la composante<br />

linguistique au détriment <strong>de</strong>s autres composantes et surtout, <strong>de</strong>s composantes<br />

sociolinguistique et socioculturelle. Or, on le sait très bien: ces <strong>de</strong>rnières <strong>de</strong>ux composantes<br />

constituent la dimension interculturelle <strong>de</strong> la compétence <strong>de</strong> communication et représentent<br />

un phénomène essentiel dans ce mon<strong>de</strong> interculturel et globalisé <strong>de</strong> plusieurs points <strong>de</strong> vue.<br />

La conscientisation <strong>de</strong> l’existence <strong>de</strong>s différences inter-cultures est <strong>de</strong> plus en plus<br />

obligatoire.<br />

La compétence interculturelle n’est pas l’aptitu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> décrire la culture <strong>de</strong> l’Autre<br />

comme discipline d’étu<strong>de</strong> mais la capacité <strong>de</strong> se mo<strong>de</strong>ler en modifiant justement ses propres<br />

critères et ses repères.<br />

73


III. Le décodage <strong>de</strong> l’image i<strong>de</strong>ntitaire.<br />

L’image i<strong>de</strong>ntitaire <strong>de</strong>s Français qui circule dans les manuels <strong>de</strong> FLE, découle <strong>de</strong><br />

l’imaginaire patrimonial 11 engendré par un con<strong>text</strong>e, une histoire, etc. Ces images peuvent<br />

être produites soit par les sociétés elles-mêmes (autoreprésentation / stéréotype) ou par le<br />

regard <strong>de</strong>s autres (hétéro représentation / stéréotype). Les stéréotypes <strong>de</strong>s manuels et <strong>de</strong>s<br />

imaginaires collectifs s’alimentent réciproquement. Par exemple, les blagues sont en même<br />

temps vecteurs et témoins <strong>de</strong> ces images et permettent <strong>de</strong> comprendre pourquoi un<br />

stéréotype peut être vrai (ou non).<br />

L’image i<strong>de</strong>ntitaire <strong>de</strong>s Français est associée, dans beaucoup <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>es étudiés en classe<br />

<strong>de</strong> FLE, à <strong>de</strong>ux emblèmes: le premier, le drapeau tricolore qui permet d’i<strong>de</strong>ntifier la France<br />

comme unité nationale, et le second, le coq gaulois qui n’est pas un symbole officiel <strong>de</strong> l’Etat<br />

mais le symbole <strong>de</strong> la prédilection pour représenter la France et les Français. Le coq gaulois<br />

accentue “un trait typiquement français, à savoir la fierté nationale, pour ne pas dire l’arrogance”.<br />

(Goethe Institut).<br />

Les Français sont un peuple fier. Ils s’enorgueillissent <strong>de</strong>s nombreux succès que<br />

comporte leur histoire et <strong>de</strong> leurs contributions au mon<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> la culture. Leurs dirigeants<br />

les plus importants ont toujours compris l’importance que revêtait la fierté et l’estime <strong>de</strong><br />

soi pour le Français moyen. De Gaulle, en particulier, a très bien su jouer <strong>de</strong> cette fibre. Il<br />

a su les flatter, les cajoler, les motiver, et partant obtenir qu’ils coopèrent et obéissent.<br />

(Pu Zhihong 2008 : 161) 12<br />

Prenons ces <strong>de</strong>ux blagues 13 qui pourraient figurer dans un chapitre du manuel <strong>de</strong> FLE,<br />

chapitre <strong>de</strong>stiné à l’étu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> la culture et <strong>de</strong> la civilisation françaises. On y peut distinguer<br />

quelques traits qui caractérisent les Français, tels que: la fierté l’orgueil même l’arrogance.<br />

a) Comment fait un Français pour se suici<strong>de</strong>r ?<br />

- Il se tire une balle à 15 centimètres au-<strong>de</strong>ssus <strong>de</strong> la tête en plein dans son complexe<br />

<strong>de</strong> supériorité.......<br />

b) Comment appelle-t-on quelqu'un qui parle trois langues ? - Un trilingue..<br />

Comment appelle-t-on quelqu'un qui parle <strong>de</strong>ux langues ? - Un bilingue.<br />

Comment appelle-t-on quelqu'un qui ne parle qu'une langue ? - Un Français.<br />

A une premiere analyse <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es ci-<strong>de</strong>ssus nous nous rendons compte que<br />

l’apprenant roumain se trouve face à une représentation, disons négative, <strong>de</strong> l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité <strong>de</strong><br />

l’Autre, du Français. Mais, selon Nathalie Auger «plus on se côtoie, moins les stéréotypes<br />

émergent.» 14 Cela veut dire que plus les rencontres sont fréquentes plus les stéréotypes sont<br />

éliminés (nous comprenons par rencontre non seulement la rencontre face à face <strong>de</strong>s jeunes<br />

<strong>de</strong> nationalités différentes mais aussi celle par le biais <strong>de</strong>s livres, <strong>de</strong> la presse, etc.).<br />

“Lorsqu’un message quitte la culture dans laquelle il était codé, il contient le sens<br />

donné par le co<strong>de</strong>ur... Quand un message atteint la culture où il doit être décodé, il subit<br />

une transformation dans laquelle l’influence <strong>de</strong> la culture décodante <strong>de</strong>vient une partie<br />

<strong>de</strong> la signification du message. Le contenu du message d’origine est modifié durant la<br />

phase du décodage <strong>de</strong> la communication interculturelle, car le répertoire culturellement<br />

différent <strong>de</strong>s comportements et <strong>de</strong>s significations communicationnelles possédé par le<br />

déco<strong>de</strong>ur ne contient pas les mêmes significations culturelles possédées par le co<strong>de</strong>ur. » 15<br />

Dans l’enseignement / apprentissage d’une langue - culture étrangère, l’étu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s<br />

documents authentiques a une importance particulière car les énoncés <strong>de</strong> l’énonciateur-<br />

auteur permettent, le plus souvent, <strong>de</strong> légitimer les marques valorisantes et/ou<br />

74


dévalorisantes que l’auteur met en discours (il s’agit d’une autoreprésentation <strong>de</strong> l’Autre).<br />

Nous considérons le terme Autre dans sa double acception: d’opposition et <strong>de</strong> similitu<strong>de</strong>.<br />

Pour qu’une i<strong>de</strong>ntité se réalise, elle doit avoir en vue cette double dimension <strong>de</strong> l’Autre.<br />

Les spécialistes en didactique <strong>de</strong>s langues soutiennent que le discours pédagogique,<br />

quel que soit son contenu, prétend la vérité. Le stéréotype, sous pré<strong>text</strong>e <strong>de</strong> vérité du<br />

discours, peut être infiltré n’importe où dans la séquence didactique, non seulement dans le<br />

cours <strong>de</strong> civilisation. Il s’agit <strong>de</strong> la création <strong>de</strong>s séquences dialogiques qui mettent en<br />

situation divers actes <strong>de</strong> parole, <strong>de</strong> l’analyse <strong>de</strong>s documents authentiques, (écrits par <strong>de</strong>s<br />

Français à <strong>de</strong>s fins non didactiques) qui peuvent enchaîner <strong>de</strong>s stéréotypes.<br />

En ce qui concerne les stratégies pédagogiques que nous pouvons mettre en œuvre<br />

pour que nos étudiants prennent conscience <strong>de</strong>s modèles <strong>de</strong> la culture d’arrivée, plusieurs<br />

voies peuvent être envisagées selon une méthodologie progressive. Nous n’en citons que<br />

quelques unes: le travail sur les stéréotypes, le travail sur la comparaison et troisièmement,<br />

les cheminements thématiques. Le problème majeur qui peut intervenir dans tous ces types<br />

<strong>de</strong> stratégies est celui du risque du préjugé. Pour l’éviter, il faut savoir “comment approcher<br />

une culture étrangère et évaluer les écarts <strong>de</strong> façon dépassionnée sans être aveuglé par nos<br />

références et jugements <strong>de</strong> valeur” 16. Dans leur démarche <strong>de</strong> découvrir les réalités <strong>de</strong> la<br />

culture française nos apprenants suivront diverses étapes: l’observation <strong>de</strong> la réalité,<br />

l’analyse <strong>de</strong> la réalité et la transformation <strong>de</strong> la réalité.<br />

Conclusion.<br />

La connaissance <strong>de</strong> la culture <strong>de</strong> l’Autre est essentielle pour la compréhension, le<br />

décodage d’un <strong>text</strong>e/discours en langue étrangère. Dans la didactique <strong>de</strong>s langues-cultures,<br />

discerner les valeurs d’une culture ai<strong>de</strong> à discerner ce qu’on accepte comme beau, bon et<br />

juste et ce qui ne l’est pas. La connaissance <strong>de</strong>s valeurs culturelles permet <strong>de</strong> relativiser ses<br />

aprioris car la rencontre avec une autre culture offre <strong>de</strong>s images et <strong>de</strong>s situations multiples<br />

qui sont absorbées dans la représentation unifiante et la construction <strong>de</strong> l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité <strong>de</strong><br />

l’individu.<br />

Notes<br />

1. http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Humour<br />

2. Escarpit R. 1981, L’Humour, Paris - P.U.F. Que sais-je ?- n° 877 -<br />

3. I<strong>de</strong>m p. 26<br />

4. Todorov T. 1970, Introduction à la littérature fantastique, Paris – Seuil, apud note 5, p. 28<br />

5. Laqabi, Said, « Aspects <strong>de</strong> l’ironie dans la littérature maghrébine d’expression française <strong>de</strong>s années quatrevingts<br />

» communication soutenue à l’Université Paris XIII en 1996, (voir l’adresse Internet<br />

http://www.google.fr/search?q=Said+Laqabi&sourceid=navclient-ff&ie=UTF-8&rlz= 1B2GGFB_en<br />

RO216RO217, p 27)<br />

6. Marie De Gandt, (2001). «Poétique <strong>de</strong> l'ironie», in Pierre Schoentjes, Poétique <strong>de</strong> l'ironie, Paris, coll.<br />

Points/Essais-Inédits, 2001, 347, adresse Internet : http://www.fabula.org/revue/cr/180.php, site<br />

consulté le 15 oct. 2009<br />

7. Anne Marie Laurian, CNSR, France, «Humour et traduction au contact <strong>de</strong>s cultures», Méta, vol. 34,<br />

n.1, 1989, 5-14, http://id.erudit.org/i<strong>de</strong>rudit/003418ar<br />

8. Mercier, Arnaud, Laboratoire Communication et Politique, CNRS, Paris/Université <strong>de</strong> Nice,<br />

Introduction, «Pouvoirs <strong>de</strong> la dérision, dérision <strong>de</strong>s pouvoirs», Hermès 29, 2001, 12<br />

9. Faure, Guy, Olivier et Rubin, 1993, «Approcher la dimension interculturelle en négociation<br />

internationale», http://www.philippepierre.com/_media/negociation_internationale_et_dimension_<br />

interculturelle_rfg.pdf, site consulté le 2 octobre 2009<br />

10.<br />

Claes, Marie-Thérèse, «La dimension interculturelle dans l’enseignement du français langue <strong>de</strong><br />

spécialité», www.francparler.org/articles/interculturel_claes.doc, site consulté le 15 sept.2009<br />

75


11. Debyser F. apud N. Auger, Auger, N., «Du stéréotype à la compréhension <strong>de</strong> la relation<br />

interculturelle : autour <strong>de</strong>s manuels <strong>de</strong> FLE en usage dans l’Union Européenne», communication<br />

soutenue au Colloque organisé à Paris le 4 et 5 novembre 2005 par le Forum <strong>de</strong>s langues<br />

européennes, http://www.forum<strong>de</strong>slangues.net/forum/manifF.htm, site consulté le 15 sept.2009<br />

12. Pu Zhihong, Université Sun Yat-sen <strong>de</strong> Chine, «L’implicite culturel et sa place dans l’enseignement<br />

d’une langue étrangère», Synergies, Chine, n. 3, 2008, 161-167<br />

13. http://sireli.canalblog.com/archives/2006/08/29/2565753.html<br />

14 . Auger, N., «Du stéréotype à la compréhension <strong>de</strong> la relation interculturelle : autour <strong>de</strong>s manuels <strong>de</strong><br />

FLE en usage dans l’Union Européenne», communication soutenue au Colloque organisé à Paris le<br />

4 et 5 novembre 2005 par le Forum <strong>de</strong>s langues européennes, http://www .forum <strong>de</strong>s langues .net<br />

/forum/manifF.htm, site consulté le 15 sept.2009<br />

15. Hall, E.T, p. 197, apud Martineau, Emmanuelle, Maîtrise F.L.E UFR <strong>de</strong> Nantes, «Les stéréotypes<br />

franco-allemands dans la caricature», http://pagespersoorange.fr/chevrel/dossiers/martineau.htm, site<br />

consulté le 2 décembre 2009<br />

16. http://www.auf.org/docs/1/pol-ling-edu-2003-07.pdf, site consulté le 2 décembre 2009<br />

Bibliographie<br />

Bre<strong>de</strong>ndiek, M. (2000). “ Le développement <strong>de</strong> la reconstruction <strong>de</strong> l’autre culturel. Vers la réflexion<br />

anthropologique <strong>de</strong> l’autrui dans l’interculturel”, in M.Bre<strong>de</strong>ndiek et B. Krewer : La dynamique <strong>de</strong> la<br />

reconstruction <strong>de</strong> l’autre culturel dans les situations <strong>de</strong> coopération interculturelle. Université <strong>de</strong> la Sarre,<br />

2000, apud Thomas, M., - Mémoire DESS P.A.I., “Acquérir une compétence interculturelle. Des<br />

processus d’apprentissages interculturels au quotidien“ http://www.mediationinterculturelle.com,<br />

p. 30<br />

Mercier, A. (2001). Laboratoire Communication et Politique, CNRS, Paris/Université <strong>de</strong> Nice,<br />

Introduction, «Pouvoirs <strong>de</strong> la dérision, dérision <strong>de</strong>s pouvoirs”, Hermès, 29<br />

http://humour-blague.com/blague/belge.php<br />

www.francparler.org/articles/interculturel_claes.doc<br />

Thomas, M., - Mémoire DESS P.A.I., “Acquérir une compétence interculturelle. Des processus<br />

d’apprentissages interculturels au quotidien” http://www.mediation-interculturelle.com, p.37,<br />

site consulté le 2 oct. 2009<br />

http://sireli.canalblog.com/archives/2006/08/29/2565753.html<br />

* * * * (2000). Conseil <strong>de</strong> l’Europe/Conseil <strong>de</strong> la Coopération Culturelle, Un Cadre européen commun <strong>de</strong><br />

référence pour les langues: apprendre, enseigner, évaluer, Paris : Didier 2000.<br />

Abstract<br />

The mastering of a foreign language involves, in addition to language knowledge, in-<strong>de</strong>pth<br />

knowledge of the socio-cultural aspects of the community speaking the respective language.<br />

Starting from <strong>de</strong> Saussure’s Theory, this traingle may be assimilated to the semiotic triangle<br />

signifier, signified, referent in the process of generating humour and stating that the signifier<br />

would represent the linguistic si<strong>de</strong> of the humorous turn, the signified would be the concept and<br />

the hid<strong>de</strong>n meaning of the turn, while the referent would be the socio-cultural con<strong>text</strong> which<br />

brings about the humorous turn. This approach focuses on the relationship between the humorous<br />

<strong>text</strong> and the socio-cultural referents which <strong>de</strong>termine the <strong>de</strong>coding of the image of alterity in this<br />

type of <strong>text</strong>.<br />

Résumé<br />

La maitrise d’une langue étrangère exige, sauf la connaissance <strong>de</strong> la langue, une très bonne<br />

connaissance <strong>de</strong>s aspects socio-culturels <strong>de</strong> la communauté qui parle cette langue. A partir <strong>de</strong> la<br />

théorie <strong>de</strong> Saussure sur le triangle sémiotique signifiant, signifié, référent, on peut assimiler ce<br />

triangle à la genèse <strong>de</strong> l’humour et affirmer que le signifiant serait le côté linguistique <strong>de</strong> la<br />

76


tournure humoristique, le signifié serait le concept et le sens caché <strong>de</strong> la tournure tandis que le<br />

référent serait le con<strong>text</strong>e socioculturel qui fait naitre la tournure humoristique.<br />

Notre communication vise à étudier la relation entre le <strong>text</strong>e humoristique et les référents<br />

socioculturels qui déterminent le décodage <strong>de</strong> l’image <strong>de</strong> l’Autre dans ce type <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>e.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Stăpânirea unei limbi străine impune, în afara cunoştinţelor <strong>de</strong> limbă, o bună cunoaştere a<br />

aspectelor socio-culturale ale comunităţii care vorbeşte această limbă. Pornind <strong>de</strong> la teoria lui <strong>de</strong><br />

Saussure privind triunghiul semiotic semnificant, semnificat, referent, se poate asimila acest<br />

triunghi, genezei umorului şi se poate afirma semnificantul ar reprezenta latura lingvistică a<br />

turnurii umoristice, semnificatul ar fi conceptul şi sensul ascuns al turnurii în timp ce referentul ar<br />

putea reprezenta con<strong>text</strong>ul socio-cultural care produce turnura umoristică.<br />

Lucrarea <strong>de</strong> faţă îşi propune studierea relaţiei dintre <strong>text</strong>ul umoristic şi referenţii socio-culturali<br />

care <strong>de</strong>termină <strong>de</strong>codarea imaginii alterităţii în acest tip <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>.<br />

77


Annals of the “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, Language and Literature. New Series. Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009. ISSN 1221-4647<br />

Book reviews editor: Gabriela Iuliana COLIPCĂ<br />

BALKANISTICA. VOLUME 17<br />

Edited by Donald L. Dyer<br />

Published for the South East European Studies Association<br />

The University of Mississippi, 2004, 196 p.<br />

Ce nouveau volume <strong>de</strong> Balkanistica, dont la publication a été<br />

différée juste pour qu’elle coïnci<strong>de</strong> avec la célébration du<br />

trentième anniversaire <strong>de</strong> ce projet – actuellement soutenu par<br />

l’Association pour les Étu<strong>de</strong>s sur l’Europe <strong>de</strong> Sud-Est, a été mis à la<br />

disposition <strong>de</strong>s spécialistes qui s’y intéressent à l’ocassion <strong>de</strong> la<br />

Quatorzième Conférence Biennale <strong>de</strong> Linguistique, Littérature et<br />

Folklore <strong>de</strong>s Peuples Balkaniques et Slaves Sud-Européens,<br />

organisée par l’Université Oxford <strong>de</strong> Mississippi, du 14 au 17<br />

avril 2005. Ayant l’intention première <strong>de</strong> mettre en relief le<br />

progrès considérable dans ce domaine d’étu<strong>de</strong>, l’éditeur<br />

Donald L. Dyer a inclu dans le volume <strong>de</strong>s articles ainsi que<br />

<strong>de</strong>s compte-rendus <strong>de</strong> plusieurs livres portant sur <strong>de</strong> divers<br />

sujets, jugés en quelque sorte représentatifs <strong>de</strong>s<br />

métamorphoses <strong>de</strong>s cultures <strong>de</strong>s régions sud-européennes<br />

dans un climat historique, social et politique très mouvementé.<br />

La série <strong>de</strong>s articles commence par une étu<strong>de</strong> intitulée Bulgaria’s Divi<strong>de</strong>d Minds ? On<br />

Zhelyu Zhelev’s “Conformist Dissent” (Les esprits divisés <strong>de</strong> la Bulgarie ? Sur la «dissi<strong>de</strong>nce<br />

conformiste» <strong>de</strong> Zhelyu Zhelev) que <strong>Jos</strong>ette Baer <strong>de</strong> l’Université Washington <strong>de</strong> Seattle dédie aux<br />

thèses philosophiques du premier prési<strong>de</strong>nt démocratiquement élu <strong>de</strong> la Bulgarie. Pour<br />

démontrer que la politique <strong>de</strong> Zhelev a été pronfondément liée à sa conception essentiellement<br />

phénoménologique, l’auteur se concentre surtout – tel que le titre l’indique – sur l’analyse du<br />

concept <strong>de</strong> «dissi<strong>de</strong>nce conformiste» et cherche à établir d’étroites connexions entre la théorie<br />

<strong>de</strong> l’in<strong>de</strong>structibilité <strong>de</strong> l’individu que Zhelev développe dans son livre L’Homme et ses<br />

personnalités (Man and His Personalities), et la relation entre les intellectuels et le pouvoir d’État<br />

dans la Bulgarie socialiste <strong>de</strong>s années 1970 et 1980. Relevant plutôt du subjectivisme <strong>de</strong><br />

Hei<strong>de</strong>gger que <strong>de</strong> l’idée <strong>de</strong> résponsabilité universelle <strong>de</strong> Patocka, l’in<strong>de</strong>structibilité en tant que<br />

facette capitale <strong>de</strong> l’individualité semble être au cœur <strong>de</strong> la conception <strong>de</strong> contestation<br />

politique <strong>de</strong> Zhelev, qui est totallement différente <strong>de</strong> celle du dissi<strong>de</strong>nt tchèque Vaclav Havel,<br />

encourageant la critique ouverte du régime politique, mais s’avérant représentatif pour le type<br />

traditionnel <strong>de</strong> réaction critique et pourtant passive <strong>de</strong>s intellectuels bulgares. Le cas <strong>de</strong><br />

Zhelev, avec sa trajectoire dans la vie culturelle du régime <strong>de</strong> Zhivkov, que présente la secon<strong>de</strong><br />

partie <strong>de</strong> l’article, témoigne ainsi, dans une certaine mesure, <strong>de</strong>s caractéristiques <strong>de</strong> toute une<br />

classe d’intelligentsia bulgare à qui l’évolution <strong>de</strong> la politique culturelle menée en Bulgarie<br />

pendant presqu’un siècle, et surtout à l’époque socialiste, a appris à joindre la conformité à la<br />

dissi<strong>de</strong>nce, mais qui, dès que le con<strong>text</strong>e politique le lui a permis, a ouvertement exprimé <strong>de</strong>s<br />

idées libérales «in<strong>de</strong>structibles» et a pu se manifester librement sur la scène politique du<br />

nouveau régime démocratique.<br />

Bien qu’il traite <strong>de</strong>s aspects <strong>de</strong> la même sphère <strong>de</strong>s relations entre le régime politique et<br />

la vie culturelle, inévitablement influencée par l’idéologie que le pouvoir lui impose, l’article<br />

suivant, Language and I<strong>de</strong>ology in the Print Media of Post-Soviet Moldova (Langage et idéologie dans<br />

la presse écrite <strong>de</strong> la Moldova post-soviétique), par Matthew H. Ciscel <strong>de</strong> l’Université Centrale <strong>de</strong><br />

Connecticut, propose un autre type d’approche et un autre espace culturel en tant qu’objet<br />

78


d’étu<strong>de</strong>. Il s’agit <strong>de</strong>s conséquences <strong>de</strong>s multiples orientations politiques et idéologiques qui se<br />

manifestent dans la Moldova post-soviétique sur la perception <strong>de</strong> l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale et<br />

linguistique telle qu’elle se reflète dans les médias moldaves et principalement dans trois<br />

journaux <strong>de</strong> Chişinău publiés en roumain, Ţara (Le Pays), Săptămâna (La Semaine) et Comunistul<br />

(Le Communiste). Une présentation détaillée <strong>de</strong>s moments historiques qui ont marqué<br />

définitivement les relations entre la République <strong>de</strong> Moldova, la Roumanie et le pouvoir<br />

soviétique et qui ont conduit implicitement à la crise actuelle d’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale et<br />

linguistique dans la région, suivie par la discussion et la re-définition <strong>de</strong>s termes-clefs <strong>de</strong><br />

l’étu<strong>de</strong> – langage, pouvoir, idéologie et nation – en partant <strong>de</strong>s théories déjà consacrées <strong>de</strong><br />

Bakhtin, Bourdieu, Woolard, etc., assure le cadre théorique nécessaire pour l’analyse<br />

minutieuse du discours <strong>de</strong>s trois journaux qui semble jouer encore un rôle essentiel dans la<br />

dynamique du processus <strong>de</strong> négociation <strong>de</strong> l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale. Ainsi, on démontre que les<br />

médias, qui portent simultanément les traces linguistiques <strong>de</strong> plusieurs idéologies (proroumaine<br />

extrémiste, modérée et pro-russe soutenant la soi-disante idéntité distinctement<br />

moldave), reflètent et, en même temps, encouragent l’instabilité du climat politique, social et<br />

culturel.<br />

On continue avec un bref article, i nëmur ‘poor, (ac)cursed,’ Geg nâmë ‘curse’ (i nëmur<br />

‘pauvre, maudit’, l’Albanais nâmë ‘malédiction’), dans lequel Eric P. Hamp <strong>de</strong> l’Université <strong>de</strong><br />

Chicago se donne pour but <strong>de</strong> démêler, par une rigoureuse analyse lexicologique, le sens du<br />

mot albanais nâmë (malédiction/ pauvreté)<br />

L’éditeur invite aussi les lecteurs explorer, avec Christopher Lamont <strong>de</strong> l’Université <strong>de</strong><br />

Mississippi, l’impact du nationalisme sur la vie politique et l’opinion publique croates dans<br />

une étu<strong>de</strong> qui se place plutôt à la limite entre les étu<strong>de</strong>s culturelles et purement historiques (A<br />

New Croatian Right : Nationalist Political Parties and Contemporary Croatian Politics – Une nouvelle<br />

droite croate : les partis politiques nationalistes et la politique croate contemporaine). Une présentation<br />

du système <strong>de</strong>s partis politiques <strong>de</strong> la Croatie indépendante sert <strong>de</strong> préambule à l’analyse <strong>de</strong>s<br />

éléments nationalistes dans la politique <strong>de</strong>s partis <strong>de</strong> droite (parmi lesquels le plus important<br />

et le plus large serait l’Union Démocratique Croate HDZ) et <strong>de</strong> la façon dont ceux-ci ont<br />

contribué, en plus ou moins large mesure, à leur succès dans les scrutins nationaux.<br />

Interprétant les données statistiques qui indiquent l’ascension ou, au contraire, la baisse <strong>de</strong> la<br />

popularité <strong>de</strong> certains partis aux yeux <strong>de</strong> l’électorat croate, Christophe Lamont semble arriver<br />

toujours à la même conclusion : que la politique et la transition vers un régime démocratique<br />

en Croatie continuent à être marquées par <strong>de</strong>s tensions (vu la mémoire <strong>de</strong>s crimes <strong>de</strong> guerre, la<br />

situation <strong>de</strong>s réfugiés, l’échec du gouvernement dans les négociations avec l’Union<br />

Européenne et l’OTAN) qui peuvent, à la longue, provoquer l’émergence d’une nouvelle<br />

vague <strong>de</strong> nationalisme au début du XXI siècle.<br />

Les <strong>de</strong>ux <strong>de</strong>rniers articles mettent en discussion les problèmes <strong>de</strong> la politique<br />

contemporaine à grand impact sur la vie sociale et culturelle <strong>de</strong>s nations sud-européennes<br />

après la chute <strong>de</strong>s régimes communistes. L’article Archival Gleanings on Russian Tra<strong>de</strong> and<br />

Consulates in the Near East (En glanant <strong>de</strong>s données <strong>de</strong>s archives concernant le commerce et les<br />

consulats russes au Proche-Orient) <strong>de</strong> Theophilus C. Prousis <strong>de</strong> l’Université <strong>de</strong> la Flori<strong>de</strong> du<br />

Nord est issu <strong>de</strong> l’intérêt <strong>de</strong> l’auteur pour l’étu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> la politique à multiple facettes <strong>de</strong> l’Empire<br />

Russe au XIXe siècle à l’égard <strong>de</strong>s peuples et <strong>de</strong>s régions <strong>de</strong> l’ancient Empire ottoman, dont le<br />

but principal était d’étendre l’influence tsariste vers le sud, <strong>de</strong> renouer avec le mon<strong>de</strong><br />

orthodoxe dans les Balkans et d’encourager le développement du commerce dans la Mer Noire<br />

et la Méditerranée. En fait, le but <strong>de</strong> cet article n’est pas <strong>de</strong> simplement décrire <strong>de</strong>s faits<br />

historiques, mais plutôt d’informer tous ceux qui s’intéressent à ce sujet, surtout les spécialistes<br />

occi<strong>de</strong>ntaux, concernant les nouvelles possibilités <strong>de</strong> recherche qui se sont présentées dès<br />

qu’on a permis l’accès aux Archives <strong>de</strong>s Affaires Étrangères <strong>de</strong> l’Empire Russe (AVPRI) <strong>de</strong><br />

Moscou. Selon Prousis, étudier <strong>de</strong>s archives si vastes et riches en informations permettrait au<br />

moins d’éclairer d’un jour nouveau la complexité <strong>de</strong> la politique impériale et l’interaction <strong>de</strong><br />

79


l’empire avec les peuples du Proche-Orient.<br />

La série d’articles se clôt par une vaste étu<strong>de</strong> purement linguistique, bien structurée,<br />

intitulée Expressivity and a Pragmatic Constraint on Object Reduplication in Bulgarian (L’expressivité<br />

et une contrainte pragmatique imposée au redoublement <strong>de</strong> l’objet en bulgare), dans laquelle Ivelina<br />

Tchizmarova <strong>de</strong> l’Université d’État <strong>de</strong> Ball essaie <strong>de</strong> mettre en évi<strong>de</strong>nce les fonctions<br />

pragmatiques qu’on attache au phénomène du redoublement <strong>de</strong> l’objet (RO) dans la langue<br />

bulgare. Des détails extraits <strong>de</strong> la littérature <strong>de</strong> spécialité concernant cette particularité <strong>de</strong> la<br />

syntaxe bulgaire et la fonction pragmatique que les linguistes lui ont traditionnellement<br />

attachée, c’est-à-dire exprimer un sens d’actualité, précè<strong>de</strong>nt une analyse originale qui peut<br />

relever encore d’autres fonctions, mais aussi <strong>de</strong>s contraintes pragmatiques dans le cas du RO.<br />

Son argument <strong>de</strong> base, toujours bien soutenu par <strong>de</strong>s exemples, est celui selon lequel le RO<br />

peut servir comme marque d’expressivité, par sa capacité <strong>de</strong> refléter l’attitu<strong>de</strong> et les émotions<br />

<strong>de</strong> celui qui parle envers le(s) référent(s), ou comme indicateur du <strong>de</strong>gré d’importance attachée<br />

à une certaine information dans le processus <strong>de</strong> communication. On montre <strong>de</strong> la sorte que la<br />

fonction expressive du RO est implicitement liée à une contrainte pragmatique à l’égard du<br />

statut et <strong>de</strong> la précision <strong>de</strong> l’information et on ouvre la voie à d’autres investigations plus<br />

détaillées sur le RO et ses fonctions pragmatiques en bulgare.<br />

La secon<strong>de</strong> partie du volume est composée <strong>de</strong> compte-rendus, détaillés parfois sous<br />

forme d’articles. Les sujets que les livres présentés développent sont aussi (sinon encore plus)<br />

variés que ceux <strong>de</strong>s articles déjà mentionnés. Certains traitent <strong>de</strong>s effets <strong>de</strong>s régimes politiques<br />

et <strong>de</strong>s changements dans la société sur l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale (et non seulement), surtout dans les<br />

régions qui, à l’époque post-soviétique et post-communiste, ont été le théâtre <strong>de</strong> guerre entre<br />

<strong>de</strong> diverses ethnies telles que les Serbes et les Croates <strong>de</strong> l’ancienne Yougoslavie. Il y a, parmi<br />

ceux-ci, <strong>de</strong>s ouvrages d’anthropologie politique qui se concentrent sur les <strong>de</strong>rnières<br />

transformations <strong>de</strong> la vie <strong>de</strong> ces peuples comme, par exemple, Politics of I<strong>de</strong>ntity in Serbia (Des<br />

opinions politiques sur l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité en Serbie) par Ivan Čolović. Des étu<strong>de</strong>s diachroniques <strong>de</strong>s<br />

relations inter-ethniques comme Kosovo : Background to a War (Kosovo: Théâtre <strong>de</strong> guerre) par<br />

Stephen Schwartz, History of the Serbs in Croatia and Slavonia 1848-1914 (L’Histoire <strong>de</strong>s Serbes <strong>de</strong><br />

Croatie et <strong>de</strong> Slovénie) et Biskup Strosmejer u svetlu novih izvora - ‘Bishop Strossmayer in Light of New<br />

Sources’ (L’évêque Strossmayer redécouvert à la lumière <strong>de</strong> nouvelles sources) par Vasilje Dj. Krestić<br />

et la collection d’essais <strong>de</strong> Milorad Ekmečić, Dijalog prošlosti i sadašnjosti: Zbornik radova –<br />

‘Dialogue of the Past with the Present : Collected Studies’ (Dialogues du passé avec le présent : une<br />

collection d’étu<strong>de</strong>s) s’y ajoutent. D’autres ouvrages analysent <strong>de</strong> multiples points <strong>de</strong> vue <strong>de</strong>s<br />

réalités historiques et sociales d’autres espaces. Celui <strong>de</strong> Theophilus C. Prousis continue et<br />

développe le même sujet introduit dans l’article présenté ci-<strong>de</strong>ssus, c’est-à-dire l’investigation,<br />

à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s documents recueillis dans <strong>de</strong>s collections et <strong>de</strong>s archives, <strong>de</strong>s relations entre les<br />

<strong>de</strong>ux empires russe et ottoman dans le Levant (Russian-Ottoman Relations in the Levant : The<br />

Dashkov Archive – Les relations russo-ottomanes dans le Levant : Les Archives Dashkov). Concerné<br />

par une partie seulement <strong>de</strong> l’espace géographique à peine nommé, le volume <strong>de</strong> Nikolai<br />

Todorov, Society, the City and Industry in the Balkans, 15th-19th Centuries (La société, la ville et<br />

l’industrie dans les Balkans, les 15 e-19 e siècles) relève d’une manière diachronique sélective<br />

plusieurs moments importants du développement <strong>de</strong> la civilisation urbaine <strong>de</strong>s Balkans. Les<br />

étu<strong>de</strong>s d’ethnographie n’y manquent pas non plus: l’une combine avec succès l’approche<br />

ethnographique à l’antropologie pour souligner particulièrement les conséquences <strong>de</strong>s<br />

changements <strong>de</strong>s relations entre les <strong>de</strong>ux sexes pour les femmes albanaises (Women Who<br />

Become Men: Albanian Sworn Virgins – Des Femmes qui <strong>de</strong>viennent <strong>de</strong>s hommes: Celles qui ont fait<br />

serment <strong>de</strong> rester vierges par Antonia Young). La secon<strong>de</strong>, qui se présente en fait sous la forme<br />

d’une collection d’essais édités par Ruth Man<strong>de</strong>l et Caroline Humphrey (Markets and Moralities:<br />

Ethnographies of Post-Socialism – Marchés et Mœurs: Ethnographies <strong>de</strong> l’époque post-communiste),<br />

met l’accent sur la re-négociation <strong>de</strong>s tabous et la re-structuration <strong>de</strong>s co<strong>de</strong>s moraux dans le<br />

con<strong>text</strong>e du développement <strong>de</strong> l’économie <strong>de</strong> marché dans tous les pays antérieurement<br />

80


asservis au régime communiste qui s’éten<strong>de</strong>nt <strong>de</strong> l’Estonie vers le nord, jusqu’à la Mongolie<br />

vers l’est, les Balkans y compris.<br />

Sont intégrés au volume <strong>de</strong>s compte-rendus <strong>de</strong> livres qui traitent <strong>de</strong>s aspects <strong>de</strong> la vie<br />

culturelle <strong>de</strong>s peuples sud-européens. On fournit par ce biais <strong>de</strong>s précisions sur <strong>de</strong>s ouvrages<br />

concernés par les architectures hongroise et serbe ou sur l’art juif <strong>de</strong> Roumanie, tels: The<br />

Architecture of Historic Hungary (L’architecture <strong>de</strong> la Hongrie historique), édité par Dora<br />

Wiebenson et Jozsef Sisa, Mo<strong>de</strong>rnism in Serbia: The Elusive Margins of Belgra<strong>de</strong> Architecture (Le<br />

mo<strong>de</strong>rnisme en Serbie: Les marges insaisissables <strong>de</strong> l’architecture <strong>de</strong> Belgra<strong>de</strong>) <strong>de</strong> Ljiljana Blagojevič<br />

et, respectivement, Treasures of Jewish Art: The 1673 Illuminated Scroll of Esther Offered to a<br />

Romanian Hierarch (Trésors <strong>de</strong> l’art juif: le manuscrit enluminé d’Esther offert en 1673 à un hiérarque<br />

roumain) <strong>de</strong> Cornelia Bo<strong>de</strong>a. Les succès <strong>de</strong> la cinématographie <strong>de</strong> l’ancienne Yougoslavie sont<br />

popularisés à travers le volume <strong>de</strong> Dina Iordanova sur la vie et la création du plus grand <strong>de</strong> ses<br />

metteurs en scène, Emir Kusturica (Emir Kusturica: BFI World Director Series – Emir Kusturica :<br />

Collection ‘Metteurs en scène du mon<strong>de</strong>’ <strong>de</strong> l’IBF). A ceux qui s’intéressent surtout à l’étu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s<br />

langues du Sud-Est <strong>de</strong> l’Europe, on suggère <strong>de</strong> consulter, par exemple, un dictionnaire <strong>de</strong> mots<br />

d’origine turque entrés dans la langue bulgare (A Dictionary of Turkisms in Bulgarian – Un<br />

dictionnaire <strong>de</strong> mots d’origine turque en bulgare par Alf Grannes, Kjetil Rå Hauge et Hazrize<br />

Sülemanoğlu) et surtout d’approfondir leurs connaissances en dialectologie balkanique, en<br />

lisant soit l’étu<strong>de</strong> Albanskij gegkij govor sela Muhurr (kraina Dibër): Sintaksis, Leksika,<br />

Ètnolingvistika, Teksty ‘The Albanian Geg Dialect of the Village of Muhurr (Dibër region) : Syntax,<br />

Lexicon, Ethnolinguistics, Texts’ – Le dialecte albanais geg du village <strong>de</strong> Muhurr (région <strong>de</strong> Dibër):<br />

syntaxe, lexique, ethnolinguistique, <strong>text</strong>es coordonné par Dželjal’ Jully [Xhelal Ylli] et Andrej N.<br />

Sobolev, ou, pour acquérir une vue d’ensemble, la collection d’essais Grundfragen eines<br />

Südosteuropasprachatlas: Geschichte, Problematik, Perspektive, Konzeption, Metho<strong>de</strong>, Pilotprojekt<br />

‘Foundational Questions of a Southeast European Language Atlas : History, Problems, Perspectives,<br />

Conception, Methods, Pilot Project’ (Questions <strong>de</strong> base pour un atlas <strong>de</strong>s langues sud-est européennes:<br />

histoire, problèmes, perspectives, conception, métho<strong>de</strong>s, projet pilote) éditée par Helmut Schaller.<br />

Enfin, on fait référence à <strong>de</strong>s œuvres littéraires qui représentent <strong>de</strong>s témoignages <strong>de</strong><br />

l’héritage culturel <strong>de</strong> l’espace roumain. D’une part, l’article compte-rendu <strong>de</strong> Marina Cap-Bun<br />

<strong>de</strong> l’Université Ovidius <strong>de</strong> Constanţa (The Symbolism of Light in Ion Creangă’s Memories of My<br />

Boyhood – Le symbolisme <strong>de</strong> la lumière dans les Mémoires d’enfance <strong>de</strong> Ion Creangă) rend hommage à<br />

l’un <strong>de</strong>s plus grands et aimés écrivains roumains, Ion Creangă, dont l’œuvre fondamentale,<br />

Amintiri din copilărie (Mémoires d’enfance), a enchanté <strong>de</strong>s générations entières <strong>de</strong> lecteurs. Pour<br />

que le public étranger découvre pleinement la complexité <strong>de</strong> ce « roman » d’enfance et qu’on le<br />

convainque qu’il mérite d’être rangé parmi les autobiographies spirituelles les plus achevées<br />

<strong>de</strong> la littérature universelle, l’auteur s’attache à souligner, en particulier, le riche symbolisme<br />

<strong>de</strong> la lumière, à valeur thérapeutique, dont les images <strong>de</strong>s enfants, <strong>de</strong> la famille, <strong>de</strong>s gens et <strong>de</strong>s<br />

paysages du village sont chargées, par rapport à l’obscurité associée à l’âge adulte, à la<br />

solitu<strong>de</strong>, à la maladie, à la dépression, à la menace du mon<strong>de</strong> extérieur et, finalement, à la<br />

mort. D’autre part, bien qu’il ne soit pas écrit par un Roumain et qu’il n’arrive pas, à cause <strong>de</strong><br />

nombreuses exagérations et simplifications inopportunes, à créer l’impression d’objectivité,<br />

l’ouvrage à saveur <strong>de</strong> roman d’espionnage <strong>de</strong> Donald Dunham intitulé Assignment Bucharest:<br />

An American Diplomat’s View of the Communist Takeover of Romania (Mission Bucarest : Le point <strong>de</strong><br />

vue d’un diplomate américain à l’égard <strong>de</strong> la prise <strong>de</strong> pouvoir par les communistes en Roumanie)<br />

mérite, toutefois, d’être mentionné et <strong>de</strong>vrait être étudié pour déterminer les stéréotypes qui<br />

dominent la perception <strong>de</strong>s observateurs occi<strong>de</strong>ntaux sur la société roumaine après la secon<strong>de</strong><br />

guerre mondiale.<br />

En somme, cette collection d’articles et <strong>de</strong> compte-rendus peut être utile à tous ceux qui<br />

s’intéressent aux étu<strong>de</strong>s culturelles, plus spécialement quand elles prennent comme objet<br />

d’étu<strong>de</strong> l’espace sud-est européen. Il est vrai que sa structure peut apparaître plutôt sans<br />

rigueur, qu’il est parfois difficile à accepter la gran<strong>de</strong> diversité <strong>de</strong>s sujets abordés et qu’une<br />

81


sélection thématique eût été, peut-être, une meilleure solution pour cette édition anniversaire.<br />

Mais, en tout cas, il faut remarquer comme un point fort du volume qu’il s’agit d’étu<strong>de</strong>s<br />

originales, élaborées avec un grand soin et soutenues par une argumentation cohérente,<br />

permettant aux lecteurs <strong>de</strong> s’informer sur <strong>de</strong>s aspects qui - en raison du climat politique - n’ont<br />

pas pu être ouvertement débattus pendant une longue pério<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> temps. Si, à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> telles<br />

publications, on réussit à franchir <strong>de</strong>s barrières culturelles et <strong>de</strong> mentalité, à mieux entendre les<br />

mécanismes <strong>de</strong>s changements <strong>de</strong> la société, à faire connaître au mon<strong>de</strong> occi<strong>de</strong>ntal les<br />

caractéristiques d’un univers culturel perçu d’abord avec <strong>de</strong>s préjugés, l’hétérogénéité du<br />

volum ne semble plus un point faible, mais peut être conçu comme un point fort. C’est<br />

pourquoi nous recommandons chaleureusement une lecture intégrale ou partielle <strong>de</strong> ce<br />

<strong>de</strong>rnier volume <strong>de</strong> Balkanistica.<br />

THE CULTURAL TURN IN TRANSLATION STUDIES<br />

Rodica Dimitriu<br />

Institutul European, Iaşi, 2006, 244 p.<br />

82<br />

Gabriela Iuliana Colipcă<br />

Volumul <strong>de</strong> faţă se înscrie în seria „Traductologie” a editurii<br />

ieşene şi le este <strong>de</strong>stinat cu prioritate masteranzilor şi<br />

doctoranzilor în domeniu. Ei pot beneficia <strong>de</strong> şapte sinteze<br />

care trec puntea dintre cercetare şi prelegere. Sunt cele şapte<br />

capitole ale cărţii, elaborate <strong>de</strong> autoare după o reţetă<br />

răsturnată ad-hoc dintr-un adagiu latin: „non multum, sed<br />

multa”. Fără a face neapărat concesii tineretului studios, prof.<br />

univ. Rodica Dimitriu adoptă ton tranşant pentru ju<strong>de</strong>căţi <strong>de</strong><br />

valoare şi caracterizări simplificatoare uşor memorabile,<br />

precum şi atenţie sporită pentru secţiunile intitulate activităţi<br />

şi <strong>de</strong>zbateri (“Activities and discussions”) la fiecare final <strong>de</strong><br />

capitol.<br />

Depistarea turnurii culturale pe care o cunoaşte în<br />

perioada recentă traductologia se face în următoarea ordine<br />

tematică: normare polisistemică (Andrew Chesterman, Gi<strong>de</strong>on<br />

Toury), şcoala manipulării (André Lefevere), abordări filosofice (hermeneutica traducerii la<br />

George Steiner şi <strong>de</strong>constructivismul lui Jacques Derrida), statutul traducătorului invizibil în<br />

viziunea lui Lawrence Venuti şi al celui subiectiv în viziunea lui Douglas Robinson,<br />

traducerea şi studiile <strong>de</strong> gen (strategii feministe la Lori Chamberlain), postcolonialismul cu<br />

relevantele asimetrii ale puterii (Rosemary Arrojo) şi <strong>de</strong>colonizarea traducerilor (Gayatri<br />

Spivak). Subliniem că autorii formând baza documentară a volumului sunt mult mai<br />

numeroşi <strong>de</strong>cât ne-am permis să enumerăm. Şi încă un aspect: probabil va mai trece ceva<br />

timp până când ne vom obişnui, urmând propunerea din 1990 a lui Mary Snell-Hornby, să<br />

privim cultura – şi nu <strong>text</strong>ul – ca unitate <strong>de</strong> bază în traducere.<br />

Construind un ansamblu care să îndrume spre reflecţie asupra legăturilor dintre<br />

traducere, literatură şi cultură, Rodica Dimitriu adoptă un discurs specializat, dar precaut<br />

totodată, ca să nu <strong>de</strong>scurajeze un cititor mai puţin iniţiat în teoretizări aca<strong>de</strong>mice.<br />

Dimpotrivă, cartea poate contribui cu succes la ceea ce-şi doresc toţi dascălii: relansarea<br />

interesului tinerilor pentru culturi traduse şi, eventual, asimilate prin noi ordini valorice<br />

propuse <strong>de</strong> cercetători consacraţi ai ultimelor patru <strong>de</strong>cenii. Textele utile, alese pentru<br />

exersare sau seminarizare, vin în sprijinul glosării pe i<strong>de</strong>i care aparţin unei memorii larg<br />

culturale, care să amintească, între altele, <strong>de</strong> grila <strong>de</strong> lucru precomunistă, contrapusă grilei<br />

comuniste; dar şi <strong>de</strong> postcomunismul care începe să se cristalizeze într-un canon propriu.


Prefaţându-şi volumul, autoarea justifică apariţia în a doua anexă a unui articol<br />

semnat Walter Benjamin, datat 1923 şi scris în limba germană. Este vorba <strong>de</strong> un eseu care a<br />

circulat în limba engleză cu titlul The Task of the Translator şi care a influenţat multe puncte <strong>de</strong><br />

ve<strong>de</strong>re expuse în carte. Eseistul este persuasiv în a arăta că între original şi traducere nu<br />

trebuie să existe asemănare, ci înrudire. Metaforizând, vasul e spart şi punem cioburile într-o<br />

închipuire <strong>de</strong> vas nou. Fi<strong>de</strong>litatea formei e o eroare, dacă se transformă în intenţie majoră.<br />

Bucăţelele contează atunci când se potrivesc între ele, ca să satisfacă cerinţe <strong>de</strong> armonie. Iar<br />

lingvistul-traducător trăieşte o mare satisfacţie când eseistul-teoretician este în căutarea<br />

semnificaţiilor culturale recuperabile, nu atât prin asemănarea mai mult sau mai puţin vagă<br />

între două limbi, ci prin complementarităţile lor din planul inefabilului.<br />

Subliniem în finalul acestei recenzii că meritele volumului The Cultural Turn in<br />

Translation Studies sunt rezultatul <strong>de</strong>cantat al unor ani <strong>de</strong> experienţă „ex cathedra” în<br />

abordarea problemelor filologice ridicate <strong>de</strong> perspective diverse asupra traducerii şi<br />

traducătorului.<br />

COMUNICARE CULTURALĂ ŞI COMUNICARE LINGVISTICĂ ÎN SPAŢIUL<br />

EUROPEAN<br />

Ioan Oprea<br />

Institutul European, Iaşi, 2008, 455 p.<br />

83<br />

Daniela Ţuchel<br />

A-l citi pe profesorul universitar Ioan Oprea înseamnă a te<br />

simţi filolog şi când nu eşti. Discursul nu este doar limpe<strong>de</strong> şi<br />

instructiv, dar conţine <strong>de</strong> asemenea elemente ataşante în<br />

formule precum calificativele blagiene <strong>de</strong> major şi minor, care<br />

<strong>de</strong> fapt nu sugerează gradaţii în cultură. Noi, ca români, ne<br />

liniştim cu aprecierea că „<strong>de</strong>şi este prima care se manifestă<br />

din punct <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re cronologic, cultura minoră poate dăinui<br />

mai multe milenii, dând impresia atemporalităţii” (25). Ne<br />

gândim şi regândim poziţia în concertul universal şi, <strong>de</strong><br />

multe ori, ne dă mai multă satisfacţie plasarea noastră în<br />

lumea europeană <strong>de</strong>cât în con<strong>text</strong>ul globalizării planetare.<br />

Volumul prof. Oprea ne dă în mod cert un ajutor preţios<br />

pentru a face această încadrare pe baze <strong>de</strong> informaţie<br />

ştiinţifică.<br />

Textul publicitar <strong>de</strong> pe coperta a IV-a promite „prima<br />

lucrare românească extinsă care tratează o sumă <strong>de</strong> aspecte ce<br />

dau unitate Lumii Europene”. Cercetătorul îşi fişează materia în trei părţi, spre care ne<br />

îndreptăm atenţia pentru a <strong>de</strong>scoperi i<strong>de</strong>ile care le dau consistenţă.<br />

Partea întâi ne „învaţă” cum să analizăm principial o cultură şi o limbă. De fapt, pe<br />

Ioan Oprea îl interesează cel mai mult maniera <strong>de</strong> influenţare a acestora. Actualmente nu<br />

absolut toate etniile europene realizează influenţarea pomenită, ci au întâietate grupul<br />

romanic occi<strong>de</strong>ntal şi grupul germanic. Trebuie stabilit cine are statut <strong>de</strong> superioritate în<br />

parteneriatele culturale iniţiate.<br />

Construcţia noastră spirituală a început cu lumea greacă antică, „o moştenire<br />

intelectuală a libertăţii, toleranţei şi exactităţii” (43). Apoi sunt radiografiaţi celţii şi<br />

germanicii scandinavi. Accentul cărţii se mută pe creştinarea europenilor şi pe noua religie<br />

„care are drept dogmă centrală i<strong>de</strong>ea păcatului şi a mântuirii” (55). Epoca mo<strong>de</strong>rnă –<br />

Renaştere, Reformă, Ortodoxia est-europeană – sunt parcurse tot în această parte a<br />

volumului, pentru a se sublinia un mo<strong>de</strong>l vestic („primatul raţionalităţii şi al ordinii”, 77),


<strong>de</strong>osebit <strong>de</strong> mo<strong>de</strong>lul orientului slav (însemnând „sentimentalitatea şi gestul inexplicabil,”<br />

ibi<strong>de</strong>m).<br />

Partea a doua explică în ce sens există o arhitectură a fiecărei limbi şi ce componente îi<br />

asigură specificul. Aici, în această parte, îşi face loc şi gramatica, prin <strong>de</strong>scrierea evoluţiilor<br />

gramaticale <strong>de</strong> la latină la limbile romanice şi <strong>de</strong> la limba germanică comună la limbile<br />

germanice <strong>de</strong> astăzi. Nu sunt neglijate topica din limbile mo<strong>de</strong>rne (205-218) şi creativitatea<br />

lexicală (219-227).<br />

Cea mai lungă parte, a treia, este <strong>de</strong>dicată temeiurilor unităţii lingvistice şi culturale<br />

din patrimoniul european, dat fiind că la tezaurul general fiecare grup <strong>de</strong> limbi şi fiecare<br />

limbă în parte au avut un aport indicat cu acurateţe admirabilă şi exemple relevante <strong>de</strong> către<br />

profesorul Ioan Oprea.<br />

Dată fiind acumularea atâtor informaţii, materialul supraintitulat Ad<strong>de</strong>nda şi intitulat<br />

„Europenismul românilor” (344-398) capătă brusc atractivitate maximă şi reprezintă punctul<br />

<strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re şi doct şi patriotic al celui care ar dori ferirea spaţiului românesc <strong>de</strong> „minţi<br />

ruginite” şi înviorarea lui <strong>de</strong> către „minţi tinere, care au în faţă <strong>de</strong>schi<strong>de</strong>rea căilor vieţii” (am<br />

citat ultimele cuvinte ale cărţii).<br />

Dacă elementele acestei recenzii sunt insuficiente celui interesat <strong>de</strong> fenomenele <strong>de</strong><br />

comunicare, o mai amplă edificare asupra direcţiilor şi tezelor volumului se poate obţine<br />

dintr-un grupaj <strong>de</strong> rezumate finale în limbile engleză (413-422), franceză (423-432), germană<br />

(433-444) şi spaniolă (445-455). Iată un util transfer poliglot <strong>de</strong> elemente, probabil un nou<br />

indiciu că am început să gândim şi să lucrăm în cadre europene, prin graiuri diferite, cu un<br />

ansamblu <strong>de</strong> interese ştiinţifice împărtăşite.<br />

EMINESCU. NEGOCIEREA UNEI IMAGINI<br />

Iulian Costache<br />

Cartea Românească, 2008, 372 p.<br />

84<br />

Daniela Ţuchel<br />

În con<strong>text</strong>ul unei „bătălii canonice” dure între valorile<br />

culturale şi naţionale promovate, în literatură, <strong>de</strong><br />

generaţiile paşoptiste şi postpaşoptiste, şi fermitatea<br />

criteriului junimist al autonomiei esteticului, mişcarea <strong>de</strong><br />

impunere a unui nou canon şi <strong>de</strong> necesară<br />

redimensionare a celui vechi este înfăptuită cu multă<br />

ştiinţă şi înţelegere a fenomenului <strong>de</strong> receptare specific,<br />

<strong>de</strong> către Titu Maiorescu, care pune la punct şi execută cu<br />

precizie etapele unei binecunoscute politici culturale.<br />

Astăzi, când „naţionalul şi supranaţionalul nu mai<br />

sunt reprezentaţi prin cei doi versanţi tradiţionali ai<br />

patrimoniului, între care nu există corespon<strong>de</strong>nţe directe,<br />

ci numai corespon<strong>de</strong>nţe simbolice” (8), ca şi în epoca <strong>de</strong> la<br />

1848, elementele care compun canonul sunt girate <strong>de</strong><br />

raportul dinamic dintre imaginile sinelui şi ale Celuilalt,<br />

<strong>de</strong> gradul <strong>de</strong> reprezentativitate şi <strong>de</strong> miza i<strong>de</strong>ntitară pe<br />

care şi-o poate asuma literatura. Procesul <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntificare<br />

a sinelui, prin mişcarea formelor literare, ascultă <strong>de</strong><br />

aceleaşi comandamente astăzi, când miturile fondatoare – din unghi cultural şi naţional – sunt<br />

reevaluate, şi în epoca Junimii, când, potrivit lui Iulian Costache, se pun bazele imaginii<br />

publice a poetului naţional, imagine perpetuată, în datele ei esenţiale, până astăzi.<br />

Demonstraţia se face, în principal, pe ediţiile <strong>de</strong> poezie eminesciană îngrijite <strong>de</strong> Maiorescu,


pe „speciile extra-literare <strong>de</strong> discurs”, consi<strong>de</strong>rate, pe bună dreptate, „ambreiori <strong>de</strong> imagine”<br />

(18), ca şi pe formele şi tipurile <strong>de</strong> receptare a <strong>text</strong>elor poetice eminesciene în epocă. Dirijarea<br />

procesului <strong>de</strong> receptare şi a imaginii publice a poetului – asociate mo<strong>de</strong>lului romantic al<br />

geniului, a cărui operă şi conduită sunt plasate sub semnul excepţionalităţii – dove<strong>de</strong>sc o<br />

bună cunoaştere a pieţei culturale şi o practică <strong>de</strong> management cultural fără fisură. Ca<br />

urmare, eul liric intră în scenă asumând poza singurătăţii romantice a poetului, poezia<br />

inaugurală a volumului oferind scenografia simbolică necesară (Singurătate), şi iese<br />

autentificând imaginea, tot romantică, a poetului neînţeles <strong>de</strong> contemporani (Criticilor mei)<br />

(20).<br />

Negocierea şi acceptarea poetului <strong>de</strong> către publicul epocii, în virtutea unei ipostaze<br />

generice (ne)asumate (a se ve<strong>de</strong>a abaterea <strong>de</strong> la direcţionarea junimistă din Epigonii)<br />

presupune o dublă orientare retorică, spre „oferta maximei <strong>de</strong>schi<strong>de</strong>ri a poeziei în raport cu<br />

publicul” – „retorica <strong>de</strong> maximă accesibilitate a romanţei”, şi spre gnomism, „ca ofertă<br />

sapienţială menită a construi un orizont <strong>de</strong> aşteptare comun între cititor şi <strong>text</strong>, pe baza<br />

inducerii unui fond <strong>de</strong> credinţe comune” (20).<br />

De altfel, dirijată cu mână fermă <strong>de</strong> către Titu Maiorescu, receptarea – şi imaginea<br />

publică pe care poetul o dobân<strong>de</strong>şte – se aşază pe două coordonate ce se vor dovedi esenţiale<br />

pentru asimilarea în special a poeziei „minore”, <strong>de</strong> tip romanţă, în epoca marilor Clasici şi<br />

ulterior. Este vorba <strong>de</strong>spre „conduita poetului romantic”, <strong>de</strong>zinteresat <strong>de</strong> cele lumeşti, şi<br />

<strong>de</strong>spre <strong>de</strong>calajul dintre structura spirituală şi morală a omului <strong>de</strong> geniu şi societatea în care<br />

este sortit să trăiască.<br />

Înscriindu-se în mişcarea <strong>de</strong> mare agresiune i<strong>de</strong>ntitară a Junimii, printre promotorii<br />

Direcţiei noi, Eminescu – ca poet public – corespun<strong>de</strong> şi susţine un nou canon literar, şi<br />

serveşte drept instrument strategiei maioresciene <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>plasare a atenţiei <strong>de</strong> la o i<strong>de</strong>ntitate<br />

focalizată – a criticului însuşi, asupra unei i<strong>de</strong>ntităţi <strong>de</strong> grup. Colecţia <strong>de</strong> scriitori ai Direcţiei noi<br />

îl propune pe Eminescu al doilea, imediat după Alecsandri. Iar „selectarea unui poet cu doar<br />

trei poezii într-un top literar şi plasarea sa imediat după autorul reprezentativ” (85)<br />

reprezintă un act <strong>de</strong> curaj al criticului, dar şi dovada unei excelente intuiţii a valorii.<br />

Detractorii binecunoscuţi ai operei emineciene semnalează, unii având încă suportul<br />

i<strong>de</strong>ologiei iluministe, pericolul reprezentat <strong>de</strong> atitudinea pesimistă şi <strong>de</strong> tematica erotică a<br />

poemelor. Preotul greco–catolic Al. Grama se situează, ferm, <strong>de</strong> partea misiunii sociale a artei<br />

şi reacţionează, implicit, criticând <strong>text</strong>ele poetice eminesciene, împotriva mo<strong>de</strong>lului cultural<br />

german, cosmopolit şi perceput, tocmai <strong>de</strong> aceea, ca o alteritate agresivă faţă <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ea <strong>de</strong><br />

românitate.<br />

Însă la vremea aceea „Eminescu nu este perceput ca fiind scriitorul <strong>de</strong> care adversarii<br />

Junimii să se împiedice. El nu are încă un profil proeminent, fiind încă un scriitor <strong>de</strong> climat,<br />

elocvent nu atât în sine, cât pentru climatul (şi aşa «discutabil») pe care Direcţia nouă încerca<br />

să-l promoveze” (141). De fapt, Maiorescu construieşte un mo<strong>de</strong>l inexistent în realitate, un<br />

prototip în virtutea căruia fundamentele literaturii şi ale culturii române s-ar fi stabilizat<br />

graţie principiului a<strong>de</strong>vărului. Asocierea poeziei eminesciene cu structurile virtuale ale<br />

literaturii române mo<strong>de</strong>rne, pe care Direcţia nouă le contura, cel puţin în articolul<br />

maiorescian cu acelaşi nume, se face în virtutea corespon<strong>de</strong>nţelor tematico–structurale<br />

evi<strong>de</strong>nte. Oferta <strong>de</strong> participare – îndreptată către scriitori – şi <strong>de</strong> receptare – adresată<br />

publicului – viza atât simularea unei noi structuri literare, cât şi stimularea suportului concret–<br />

literar <strong>de</strong> care era nevoie. Altfel spus, Maiorescu elaborează o <strong>de</strong>săvârşită formă fără fond<br />

căreia îi construieşte, apoi, cu migală, din ceea ce epoca îi pune la dispoziţie, fondul.<br />

În această ordine <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>i, studiul <strong>de</strong> promovare nu atât a poetului, cât a mizei<br />

reprezentate <strong>de</strong> asocierea lui cu Direcţia nouă, Eminescu şi poeziile lui, arată cum „tipul <strong>de</strong><br />

imagine eminesciană propus <strong>de</strong> Maiorescu se <strong>de</strong>finea în chip polemic în raport cu celelalte<br />

imagini evocate, urmând să «împartă» cu acestea spaţiul <strong>de</strong> joc reprezentat <strong>de</strong> «piaţa <strong>de</strong><br />

imagine» a bunurilor culturale” (158).<br />

85


După analiza direcţiei <strong>de</strong> receptare estetice – reprezentată <strong>de</strong> Mihail Dragomirescu şi<br />

<strong>de</strong> Nicolae Petraşcu, cartea lui Iulian Costache evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază particularităţile <strong>de</strong> receptare<br />

specifice <strong>de</strong>mersului critic al lui C. D. Gherea, precum şi ascen<strong>de</strong>nţa semiozei socialului –<br />

Nicolae Iorga şi Garabet Ibrăileanu.<br />

Aspectele cele mai interesante, însă, vin din direcţia (aproape) <strong>de</strong>loc exploatată, până<br />

acum, a semiozei extra-literare, graţie căreia poetul <strong>de</strong>vine un autentic personaj mediatic.<br />

Raportul firesc dintre viaţă şi operă se inversează, odată cu avansarea bolii poetului, viaţa<br />

părând că începe să copieze opera care, prin <strong>text</strong>e <strong>de</strong>venite foarte populare, ca Mai am un<br />

singur dor, <strong>de</strong> exemplu, anticipa simbolic <strong>de</strong>stinul tragic al lui Eminescu şi al omului <strong>de</strong><br />

geniu. Pe măsură ce istoria bolii poetului se va transforma în temă mediatică, în intervalul<br />

1883 – 1889, „curentul eminescian va putea să <strong>de</strong>vină, simbolic, o paradigmă dominantă şi<br />

pentru că va fi reuşit să impună, într-o astfel <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>ură simbolică, imaginea epigonilor ca<br />

interpretanţi eterni ai operei eminesciene, aşa cum vor fi fost ei acceptaţi în cadrele<br />

imaginarului colectiv al epocii” (184).<br />

Dacă ştirile <strong>de</strong>spre starea financiară precară sau <strong>de</strong>spre starea <strong>de</strong> sănătate a poetului,<br />

ori <strong>de</strong>spre listele <strong>de</strong> subscripţie publică reuşesc să construiască o imagine din ce în ce mai<br />

puternică – având şi argumentul operei – Maiorescu, ce îşi asumă iniţiativa editării operei<br />

eminesciene, încearcă să preia şi o parte a controlului asupra imaginii larg vehiculate a<br />

poetului. Mo<strong>de</strong>lul eroului exemplar va sta la baza atitudinii criticului faţă <strong>de</strong> opera şi <strong>de</strong><br />

personalitatea creatoare eminesciană.<br />

De altfel, „temele criticului” transpar în structura volumelor girate <strong>de</strong> Titu Maiorescu.<br />

Prin poezia Singurătate, care <strong>de</strong>schi<strong>de</strong> volumul din 1883, se instituie cunoscuta poză a<br />

poetului romantic – cum aminteam <strong>de</strong>ja ceva mai înainte – drept marcă esenţială fondatoare<br />

a profilului eminescian pe care Maiorescu mizează. Pe baza acestui prim poem, cititorul<br />

<strong>de</strong>vine „beneficiar al unui rit <strong>de</strong> iniţiere” ce susţine „instructajul” prefeţei.<br />

În centrul volumului se află poezia Se bate miezul nopţii, ca „semn al echilibrului<br />

încremenit în ezitarea dintre două lumi”(288–289). Se ajunge, astfel, la o a<strong>de</strong>vărată mască<br />

editorială a poetului pe care, ulterior, ediţia Perpessicius o autentifică suplimentar. Este<br />

imaginea promovată până în zilele noastre <strong>de</strong> canonul didactic şi, încă rezistent la atacuri, <strong>de</strong><br />

canonul oficial estetic.<br />

DE LINGUA UNIVERSALIS.<br />

Petre Rău<br />

Fundaţia Culturală Antares, 2007, 234 p.<br />

86<br />

Simona Antofi<br />

Literatura care îşi propune popularizarea<br />

preocupărilor specifice unor domenii <strong>de</strong> cercetare dintre<br />

cele mai diverse se bucură <strong>de</strong> apariţia, la o editură din<br />

oraşul nostru, a unui mic tratat <strong>de</strong> lingvistică teoretică pe<br />

înţelesul tuturor. Lucrarea, asupra căreia ne oprim în<br />

recenzia <strong>de</strong> faţă şi, pe care autorul ei, Petre Rău, o consi<strong>de</strong>ră<br />

un eseu (223) impresionează prin elementele particulare cu<br />

care (cu certitudine se va) impune în literatura lingvistică<br />

românească. Publicul căruia i se adresează acest volum ar<br />

putea fi <strong>de</strong>scris ca fiind caracterizat <strong>de</strong> o diversitate <strong>de</strong><br />

interese profesionale şi extraprofesionale, pasiuni, vârstă şi,<br />

nu în ultimul rând, <strong>de</strong> nivel <strong>de</strong> cunoştinţe. Exprimarea<br />

simplă şi clară, prezentarea subiectelor în discuţie fără a se<br />

recurge la complexităţi ştiinţifice (<strong>de</strong> tipul notelor <strong>de</strong>


subsol, al notelor explicative amplasate la sfârşit <strong>de</strong> capitol, al explicaţiilor parantetice),<br />

tonul direct şi argumentarea susţinută prin citate asigură accesul cititorului la un conţinut<br />

complex prin problematica abordată.<br />

Perspectiva istorică <strong>de</strong> prezentare a limbii (ca fenomen social, istoric, etnic şi cultural)<br />

şi a limbajelor (naturale, artificiale sau chiar limbajul trupului) se <strong>de</strong>sfăşoară pe parcursul a<br />

douăzecişiopt <strong>de</strong> capitole, echilibrat construite şi astfel înlănţuite încât asigură coerenţa şi<br />

coeziunea scriiturii propuse <strong>de</strong> autor. Cercetarea sistematică şi amănunţită porneşte <strong>de</strong> la<br />

afirmaţiile privind geneza limbajelor, făcând trimiteri la primele noţiuni legate <strong>de</strong> limbaj care<br />

sunt întâlnite în Vechiul Testament, respectiv în Cartea Genezei (8-10) şi, mai apoi, în<br />

capitolul Facerea. Sunt apoi consemnate opinii <strong>de</strong>spre geneza limbajului aparţinând autorilor<br />

lumii antice (Aristotel, 10, Vitruviu, 11), continuând cu păreri ale autorilor (filozofi sau<br />

scriitori) mai apropiaţi <strong>de</strong> zilele noastre (von Her<strong>de</strong>r, Iorga şi Coşeriu, 12-13).<br />

Odată stabilit cadrul general al apariţiei şi utilizării limbii, oricare ar fi aceasta, autorul<br />

ia în discuţie legile comunicării, introducând componentele fundamentale ale procesului <strong>de</strong><br />

comunicare, <strong>de</strong>scriind esenţa acestui proces şi insitând asupra celor mai recente principii ale<br />

comunicării, formulate <strong>de</strong> reprezentanţii Şcolii <strong>de</strong> la Palo Alto (15). Demersul istoric este<br />

evi<strong>de</strong>nt şi în următoarea secvenţă care se opreşte asupra etapelor <strong>de</strong>zvoltării comunicării<br />

umane. După ce vorbeşte <strong>de</strong>pre legăturile dintre gândire şi limbaj, <strong>de</strong>scrise în funcţie <strong>de</strong><br />

diverse teorii, autorul abor<strong>de</strong>ază limbajul ca instrument al comunicării (40-47), pentru a<br />

continua prin sintetizarea în doar un capitol a unui conţinut <strong>de</strong>scris <strong>de</strong> alţi autori într-un<br />

întreg dicţionar al ştiinţelor limbajului. Apreciem conturarea în linii cuprinzătoare a acelor<br />

ştiinţe ale limbajului frecvent menţionate în manualele şcolare şi cursurile universitare şi<br />

anume, fonetica, gramatica, dialectologia, stilistica, istoria limbii, lexicologia, geografia<br />

lingvistică, paleontologia lingvistică, semantica, hermeneutica, poetica, retorica şi semiotica.<br />

Referirile la semiotică se continuă în capitolul <strong>de</strong>spre semn şi comunicare non-verbală, un<strong>de</strong>,<br />

pe lângă referirile lui Ferdinand <strong>de</strong> Saussure la semnificant şi semnificat, se prezintă şi<br />

clasificarea semnelor avansată <strong>de</strong> Pierce, un<strong>de</strong> se au în ve<strong>de</strong>re legăturile dintre semn şi<br />

referent, distingându-se trei tipuri <strong>de</strong> semne: (a) iconice, (b) indiciale şi (c) simbolice.<br />

Procesul <strong>de</strong> comunicare amplu <strong>de</strong>scris, atât la nivelul omului cât şi la cel al<br />

necuvântătoarelor (vezi capitolul Graiul animalelor, 62-73), un<strong>de</strong>, dincolo <strong>de</strong> anecdotica<br />

începutului, şi un<strong>de</strong> se fac referiri la diverse experimente menite a explora posibiliăţile <strong>de</strong><br />

comunicare ale animalelor, scoate în relief şi anumite dificultăţi (vezi capitolul Dificultăţile<br />

comunicării, 74-80). Dincolo <strong>de</strong> aspectele tehniciste ale procesului în sine, comunicarea poate<br />

fi privită şi ca o artă care implică un anumit grad <strong>de</strong> complexitate sugerat prin limbajul<br />

verbal sau cel paraverbal, prin personalitatea strictă a vorbitorului care îşi dozează, în funcţie<br />

<strong>de</strong> scopul comunicării, fie volumul vocii, care „ne ajută să dominăm sau să fim dominaţi”<br />

(83), fie accentul, fie articularea, fie ritmul şi implicit pauzele şi, mai ales, prin cuvintele<br />

folosite. Puterea cuvântului, următoarea secvenţă a eseului, aduce în atenţie nu numai<br />

limitele cuvântului ca reprezentare a realităţii (cum ar fi, <strong>de</strong> exemplu, ambiguitatea,<br />

polisemia, impreciziile, 90), ci şi dinamica oricărui cuvânt, citându-l pe Noica „De îndată ce<br />

apare pe lume, un cuvânt îşi ia libertatea <strong>de</strong> a se schimba. Omul, fireşte, îl foloseşte în toate<br />

felurile şi pentru toate trebuinţele sale ... în aşa fel încât ai cre<strong>de</strong> că istoveşte virtuţile<br />

cuvântului. Dar cuvântul păstreazî pentru el un rest <strong>de</strong> libertate...”<br />

Consi<strong>de</strong>răm <strong>de</strong> interes secţiunea <strong>de</strong>dicată evoluţiei limbilor naturale <strong>de</strong>oarece în ciuda<br />

faptului că autorul începe cu consi<strong>de</strong>raţii cu un grad evi<strong>de</strong>nt <strong>de</strong> generalitate, inclu<strong>de</strong> totuşi în<br />

prezentare şi date statistice privind numărul limbilor cunoscute şi utilizate în prezent ,<br />

aspecte legate <strong>de</strong> limbile pidgin şi creole. Vom puncta aici confuzia referitoare la aceste limbi<br />

hibri<strong>de</strong>: limbile pidgin şi limbile creole nu <strong>de</strong>rivă unele din celelalte (conform celor susţinute<br />

la pagina 106) ci sunt produse ale contactului lingvistic realizat între vorbitorii nativi <strong>de</strong><br />

limba engleză şi băştinaşii vorbitori ai unor dialecte specifice şi bine <strong>de</strong>terminate geografic.<br />

În cazul limbilor pidgin este vorba <strong>de</strong>spre zona Chinei, iar al limbilor creole <strong>de</strong>spre dialectele<br />

87


ăştinaşilor din zona coastei <strong>de</strong> vest a continentului America <strong>de</strong> Sud (pentru mai multe date,<br />

sugerăm consultarea bibliografiei referitoare la istoria limbii engleze) 1.<br />

După un periplu prin mai multe experimente lingvistice şi prin limbajul maimuţelor,<br />

se abor<strong>de</strong>ază domeniul limbilor şi al limbajelor artificiale, făcându-se referiri la limbile<br />

universale <strong>de</strong> tip esperanto, limbajul trupului, limbajele generaţiilor virtuale, pentru a se<br />

încheia cu unele consi<strong>de</strong>raţii legate <strong>de</strong> internet, „autostrada informaţională” (212).<br />

Referinţe<br />

Baugh,A., Cable, Th. (1991). A History of the English Language, London, Routledge.<br />

Floriana Popescu<br />

88


The Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi.<br />

Fascicle XIII. Language and Literature. New Series<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009 ISSN 1221- 4647<br />

CONTRIBUTORS<br />

Dr. SIMONA ANTOFI is an associate professor at the Department of Literature,<br />

Linguistics and Journalism, Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She is a<br />

coordinator of research projects and an author of papers exploring such topics as “Cultural<br />

I<strong>de</strong>ntity and Multiculturalism. A Romanian I<strong>de</strong>ntity Profile” (in Cultural Limits and Literature,<br />

Galaţi, 2006) or “Les modèles culturels i<strong>de</strong>ntitaires roumains, <strong>de</strong>s solutions d‘intégration<br />

européenne et d’autolégitimité” (in CEDIMES, Târgovişte, 2006) to name only two of them.<br />

Contact: simoantofi@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. FILIP CRISTIAN BACALU is a young lecturer at Spiru Haret University of<br />

Bucharest, particulalry interested in studying and performing research in the field of<br />

bilingualism. Contact:fc.bacalu@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. ANCA CEHAN is an associate professor of linguistics and applied linguistics at<br />

the Faculty of Letters, the English Department, “Alexandru Ioan Cuza” University of Iaşi.<br />

She has carried out research and published studies in the fields of semantics, ELT<br />

methodology, discourse analysis and pragmatics. Contact: acehan@uaic.ro<br />

ANA-ELENA COSTANDACHE is a young aca<strong>de</strong>mic at the French Department,<br />

Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She is now preparing her doctoral<br />

thesis and she is actively engaged in several research projects. Contact: lily_anghel@yahoo.fr<br />

Dr. GABRIELA IULIANA COLIPCĂ is an associate professor at the Department of<br />

English, Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She prepared and<br />

<strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d her doctoral thesis at the University of Lei<strong>de</strong>n, the Netherlands. She currently<br />

teaches Renaissance and eighteenth-century English literature, narratology and film<br />

adaptations. Her research interests are: Renaissance and 18 th-century literature, culture and<br />

civilisation; comparative literature; literary theory and criticism (psychoanalysis,<br />

narratology, feminism); film theory; imagology; cultural analysis; trauma and affect theories;<br />

translation studies. Contact: iuliana75@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. NICOLETA IFRIM is a young aca<strong>de</strong>mic at the Department of Literature,<br />

Linguistics and Journalism, the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She<br />

<strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d her doctoral thesis in Romanian literary studies and she now continues her<br />

research in her field of expertise. Contact: nicodasca@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. GABRIEL ISTODE is a young aca<strong>de</strong>mic at the Department of Applied Mo<strong>de</strong>rn<br />

Languages, the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. He <strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d his<br />

doctoral thesis in contrastive studies and he now continues several project research in his<br />

field of expertise. Contact: gabriel.isto<strong>de</strong>@ugal.ro<br />

Dr. DOINITA MILEA is a professor of the Department of Literature, Linguistics and<br />

Journalism, Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She teaches<br />

comparative literature and Romanian literature, and her interests focus on remarkable<br />

contributions to <strong>de</strong>vising and managing international projects as well as grants fun<strong>de</strong>d by<br />

the Romanian Aca<strong>de</strong>my. Contact: doinita.milea@ugal.ro<br />

Dr. IOANA MOHOR-IVAN is an associate professor at the English Department,<br />

Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. The grants she was awar<strong>de</strong>d by the<br />

89


British Council enabled her to have direct access to Irish culture and literature. Contact:<br />

ioana_mohor@yahoo.com<br />

LIDIA MIHAELA NECULA is a young aca<strong>de</strong>mic of the English Department, Faculty<br />

of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi whose research interests focus on<br />

contemporary English literature. She is now finishing her doctoral thesis and she is involved<br />

in several research projects. Contact: lidiamicky_necula@yahoo.co.uk<br />

Dr. CARMEN OPRIT-MAFTEI, a lecturer at the Department of Applied Mo<strong>de</strong>rn<br />

Languages, the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi, <strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d her<br />

doctoral thesis in 2007 at “Alexandru Ioan Cuza” University of Iaşi. Involved in individual<br />

research studies, she has published over 20 articles. Contact: c_maftei@ yahoo.com<br />

Dr. FLORIANA POPESCU is a professor of English Language and Applied Linguistics<br />

at the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi, Romania. Her research<br />

interests cover the fields of lexicology, translation studies and English for specific purposes.<br />

She has edited 3 books (the latest, Perspectives in Translation Studies, being published in 2009<br />

by Cambridge Scholars Publishing), has authored 4 books and over 60 articles, studies, books<br />

and book reviews and she has contributed to 15 <strong>text</strong>books on the English language<br />

contemporary grammar and other topics. Contact: florianapopescu@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. MICHAELA PRAISLER is a professor of English Literature at the Faculty of<br />

Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi, Romania. Her main research interests are in:<br />

the contemporary novel in English, literary theory and criticism, cultural and film studies.<br />

She has published over 45 articles, essays, reviews and books; from among the titles:<br />

“Media(ted) Discourse. Literary Representations”, “Filmic Translations of Culture”, „The<br />

Contemporary Novel: Pan-Cultural Symbols, Heroes, Rituals”, “A New Treatment for the<br />

Self in/of Fiction: David Lodge, Therapy”, “Fighting Medusa: Fay Weldon’s Big Women”,<br />

“Salman Rushdie’s Wor(l)d: Midnight’s Children”; “On Mo<strong>de</strong>rnism, Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnism and the<br />

Novel”, “For a Psychoanalytical Approach to Literature. Reality and Fiction with Virginia Woolf and<br />

Ernest Hemingway”, “The Contemporary British Literary Scene”.<br />

Contact: mipraisler@yahoo.co.uk<br />

Dr. DANIELA ŞORCARU is a junior lecturer of English Linguistics in the Department<br />

of English Language and Literature of the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of<br />

Galaţi, Romania. She has published articles and studies in conference volumes and chapter<br />

contributions to scientific research volumes, most of them focused on stylistic linguistics. An<br />

important contribution has been ma<strong>de</strong> to the 1400-page English–Romanian Dictionary for<br />

Mechanical Engineering, published by E.D.P. in 2009. Contact: daniela_sorcaru@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. DANIELA ŢUCHEL is an associate professor at the English Department, Faculty<br />

of Letters, „Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. Her research interests cover media<br />

discourse, pragmatic approaches, and interculturality. Contact: tucheldaniela@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. ANGELICA VÂLCU is an associate professor at the French Department, Faculty of<br />

Letters, „Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. Her research interests cover <strong>text</strong>ual grammar,<br />

and French for specific purposes. Contact: a_valcu@yahoo.fr.<br />

90

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!